Turnopeezg44 PDF

Doosan eZ Guide
Operation Manual
TURNOPEEZG44
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country
from where the product is exported.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by  or  in the main body.
TURNOPEEZG44 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
When using a machine equipped with the Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i,
be sure to observe the following safety precautions.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TURNOPEEZG44
1.1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and
preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into
Warning and Caution according to the degree of the risk or the
severity of damage.
Also, supplementary information is described as Note.
Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to
use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being
injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment
being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary
information other than Warning and Caution.
- Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-2
TURNOPEEZG44 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
To ensure safety while using a machine featuring the Doosan

Infracore eZ Guide i function, observe the following precautions:
WARNING
1 Confirm, on the screen, that the data has been entered
correctly before proceeding to the next operation.
Attempting operation with incorrect data may cause the
tool to strike the workpiece or machine, possibly
breaking the tool or machine or injuring the operator.
2 Before starting the machine using the tool
compensation function, carefully determine the
direction of compensation and the compensation value,
and ensure that the tool will not strike the workpiece or
machine. Otherwise the tool or machine may be
damaged or the operator may be injured.
3 When using constant surface speed control, set the
maximum rotating speed of the spindle to a value that is
allowed for the workpiece and workpiece hold unit.
Otherwise, the workpiece or hold unit may be removed
by centrifugal force to damage the tool machine or
injure the operator.
4 Set all necessary parameters and data items before
starting Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i operations. Note that if the
cutting conditions are not suitable for the workpiece, the
tool may be damaged or the operator may be injured.
5 After creating a machining program using Doosan Infracore
eZ Guide i functions, do no run the machine on that
program immediately. Instead, confirm every step of the
resultant program, and make sure that the tool path and
machining operation are correct and that the tool will
not strike the workpiece or machine. Before starting
production machining, run the machine with no
workpiece attached to the machine to make sure that
the tool will not strike a workpiece or the machine. If the
tool strikes the machine and/or work-piece, the tool
and/or machine may be damaged, and even injuries the
operator.
CAUTION
After pressing the power-on button, do not touch any
keys on the keyboard until the initial screen appears.
Some keys are used for maintenance or special
operations such that pressing such a key may cause an
unexpected operation.
s-3
TURNOPEEZG44 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .......................................................................... s-1
I. GENERAL
1 OVERVIEW OF THIS MANUAL .............................................................3
2 READ AT FIRST.....................................................................................4
3 ALL-IN-ONE SCREEN ...........................................................................9
4 SYMBOLS USED .................................................................................12
II. OPERATION
1 OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE.....................................................15
1.1 MAIN FEATURES OF Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i....................................................16
2 MACHINING PROGRAM FORMAT .....................................................18

3 EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS....................................................20
3.1 MACHINING PROGRAM WINDOW AND EIDITNG....................................21
3.2 CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS .......................................................23
3.3 EDITING IN A PROGRAM LIST ..................................................................24
3.4 SEARCHING FOR A MACHINING PROGRAM TO BE EDITED.................26
3.5 BASIC EDITING OPERATIONS OF PART PROGRAM ..............................27
3.5.1 Entering a Word (INSERT key) ............................................................................ 27
3.5.2 Modifying a Word (ALTER key) .......................................................................... 27
3.5.3 Modifying the Numeric Value of a Word (ALTER key) ...................................... 27
3.5.4 Deleting a Word (DELETE key) ........................................................................... 28
3.5.5 Modifying a Block (ALTER key).......................................................................... 28
3.5.6 Deleting a Block (DELETE key)........................................................................... 28
3.5.7 Changing the Program Number (ALTER key)...................................................... 28
3.6 SEARCH (FORWARD AND BACKWARD)..................................................29
3.7 CUT .............................................................................................................30
3.8 COPY...........................................................................................................31
3.9 PASTE .........................................................................................................32
3.10 DELETE.......................................................................................................33
3.11 KEY-IN PASTE ............................................................................................34
3.12 M-CODE MENU...........................................................................................35
3.13 FIXED FORM SENTENCE INSERTION......................................................37
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS TURNOPEEZG44
4 EDITING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS ....................................40

4.1 ENTERING THE START COMMAND..........................................................41
4.2 SELECTING A CYCLE MACHINING TYPE ................................................43
4.3 ENTERING CYCLE MACHINING DATA .....................................................45
4.4 SELECTING FIGURES................................................................................47
4.5 ENTERING FIXED FORM FIGURE DATA FOR CYCLE MACHINING .......50
4.6 ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURE DATA FOR CYCLE MACHINING .........52
4.7 ENTERING CONTOUR PROGRAMS .........................................................55
4.8 ENTERING THE END COMMAND..............................................................57
4.9 CHANGING CYCLE MACHINING AND FIGURE DATA..............................58
5 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY
FIGURES..............................................................................................59
5.1 INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING ..............................................................60
5.2 ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE XY PLANE ............................................62
5.3 ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE YZ PLANE ............................................73
5.4 ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE POLAR COORDINATE
INTERPOLATION PLANE (XC PLANE) ......................................................83
5.5 ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE CYLINDRICAL SURFACE
(ZC PLANE) .................................................................................................94
5.6 ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR TURNING (ZX PLANE) ...............................105
6 OPERATIONS IN THE MEM MODE ..................................................116
6.1 REWINDING A MACHINING PROGRAM..................................................117
6.2 EDITING WITH THE MACHINING PROGRAM LIST ................................118
6.3 SEARHING FOR A SEQUENCE NUMBER IN A PROGRAM ...................119
6.4 SELECTING A PROGRAM FOR MACHINING OPERATION....................120
6.5 CHANGING THE CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY...................................121
6.6 PRESETTING RELATIVE COORDINATES ..............................................122
6.7 DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT RESULTS ...............................................123
6.8 DISPLAYING THE MACHINING SIMULATION WINDOW ........................124
6.9 DISPLAYING THE DRAWING-DURING-MACHINING WINDOW .............125
6.10 BG EDITING ..............................................................................................126
6.11 NC PROGRAM CONVERSION .................................................................127
6.12 NEXT-BLOCK DISPLAY FUNCTION ........................................................128
7 OPERATIONS IN THE MDI MODE ....................................................130
8 OPERATIONS IN THE MANUAL MODE (HANDLE AND JOG).........132
c-2
9 OPERATIONS IN MACHINING SIMULATION ...................................133

9.1 DRAWING DURING MACHINING (TOOL PATH) .....................................135
9.1.1 Program Selection Operation and Other Operations in Drawing during
Machining............................................................................................................ 137
9.1.2 Selecting whether to Display the Tool Path or Not in Drawing during
Machining............................................................................................................ 137
9.1.3 Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations in Drawing during Machining......... 138
9.2 MACHINING SIMULATION (TOOL PATH)................................................141
9.2.1 Program Selection Operation and Other Operations in Machining Simulation
(Tool Path)........................................................................................................... 143
9.2.2 Execution Operations in Machining Simulation (Tool Path).............................. 143
9.2.3 Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations in Machining Simulation
(Tool Path)........................................................................................................... 145
9.3 MACHINING SIMULATION (ANIMATED)..................................................146
9.3.1 Program Selection Operation and Other Operations in Machining Simulation
(Animated)........................................................................................................... 148
9.3.2 Execution Operations in Machining Simulation (Animated).............................. 149
9.3.3 Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations in Machining Simulation
(Animated)........................................................................................................... 149
9.4 CHANGING WORK COORDINATE DURING MACHINING SIMULATION
(ANIMATION, TOOL PATH DRAWING)....................................................150
9.5 SETTING OF DATA FOR ANIMATION .....................................................152
10 SETTING DATA .................................................................................175
10.1 SETTING THE WORK COORDINATE DATA ...........................................176
10.1.1 [MEASUR] Soft Key........................................................................................... 178
10.1.2 [+INPUT] Soft Key ............................................................................................. 180
10.2 SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA...............................................................182
10.2.1 [MEASUR] Soft Key........................................................................................... 184
10.2.2 [+INPUT] Soft Key ............................................................................................. 185
10.2.3 [INP.C.] Soft Key ................................................................................................ 186
10.3 REGISTERING FIXED FORM SENTENCES ............................................187
10.3.1 Registering a New Fixed Form Sentence ............................................................ 189
10.3.2 Modifying a Fixed Form Sentence ...................................................................... 191
10.3.3 Deleting a Fixed Form Sentence ......................................................................... 192
10.3.4 Initialization to Standard Fixed Form Sentences................................................. 193
11 BACKGROUND EDITING ..................................................................194

11.1 STARTING BACKGROUND EDITING.......................................................195
11.2 ENDING BACKGROUND EDITING...........................................................196
11.3 OPERATIONS DURING BACKGROUND EDITING ..................................197
c-3
12 NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION.......................................198

12.1 BASIC SPECIFICATIONS .........................................................................199
12.2 STARTING THE NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION ..................201
12.3 RESTRICTIONS ........................................................................................204
13 TOOL DATA BASE FUNCTION.........................................................206
13.1 SETTING OF TOOL OFFSET DATA.........................................................207
13.2 SETTING OF TOOL DATA ........................................................................208
13.2.1 Setting of Tool Type............................................................................................ 208
13.2.2 Editing of Tool Name .......................................................................................... 208
13.2.3 Setting of Tool Set............................................................................................... 209
13.2.4 Entering of Tool Data.......................................................................................... 209
13.2.5 Cutting Edge Angle of Tool Data Base Function................................................ 210
13.2.6 Initializing of Tool Data ...................................................................................... 211
13.3 SELECTING TOOL DATA AT PROGRAM ENTERING.............................212
13.4 SETTING OF TOOL GRAPHIC DATA.......................................................213
13.4.1 Tool Graphic Data ............................................................................................... 213
14 EDITING OF FREE FIGURE OF SUBPROGRAM FORM ..................214

14.1 OPERATIONS OF EDITING SUBPROGRAM ...........................................215
14.2 WARNING MESSAGE...............................................................................218
15 SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS .......................................................219
15.1 SHORTCUTS FOR VARIOUS CONFIRMATION OPERATIONS..............220
15.2 SHORTCUTS FOR RANGE SELECTION .................................................220
15.3 SHORTCUTS FOR COPY OPERATION...................................................220
15.4 SHORTCUTS FOR CUT OPERATION......................................................220
15.5 SHORTCUTS FOR THE BASE SCREEN SOFT KEYS ............................221
15.6 SHORTCUT FOR STARTING THE CYCLE CHANGE SCREEN ..............221
15.7 SHORTCUTS FOR THE MENU SELECTION SCREEN ...........................221
15.8 SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM INSERTION SCREEN..222
15.9 SHORTCUTS FOR THE M CODE INSERTION SCREEN ........................222
15.10 SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM LIST SCREEN................................222
15.11 SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM CREATION SCREEN .....................222
15.12 SHORTCUTS FOR THE COMMENT EDITING SCREEN .........................223
15.13 SHORTCUTS FOR THE SEARCH SCREEN ............................................223
15.14 SHORTCUTS FOR THE CYCLE INPUT SCREEN ...................................223
15.15 SHORTCUT FOR THE WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
SETTING SCREEN ...................................................................................223
15.16 SHORTCUT FOR THE TOOL OFFSET SETTING SCREEN....................223
c-4
15.17 SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM REGISTRATION

SCREEN ....................................................................................................224
15.18 SHORTCUTS FOR THE CREATION SCREEN FOR REGULAR
PROGRAM REGISTRATION ....................................................................224
15.19 SHORTCUTS FOR THE ALTER SCREEN FOR REGULAR
PROGRAM REGISTRATION ....................................................................224
15.20 SHORTCUTS FOR THE PRESET SCREEN.............................................224
15.21 SHORTCUT FEEDRATE THE MEASUREMENT RESULT SCREEN.......225
15.22 SHORTCUT FOR THE MANUAL MEASUREMENT SCREEN..................225
15.23 SHORTCUT FOR VARIOUS SETTING SCREENS ..................................225
15.24 SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE MAIN SCREEN .........................225
15.25 SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE INPUT SCREEN .......................226
15.26 SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE CREATION SCREEN ...............226
16 HELP SCREEN ..................................................................................227
17 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION..................................229
17.1 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF PART PROGRAM ........................230
17.1.1 Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Part Program........................................... 230
17.1.2 Memory Card Output Operation for Part Program.............................................. 232
17.1.3 Memory Card Input Operation for Part Program ................................................ 234
17.1.4 File Format Allowed for Memory Card Input/Output......................................... 236
17.2 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF TOOL DATA.................................237
17.2.1 Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Tool Data................................................ 237
17.2.2 Memory Card Output Operation for Tool Data................................................... 238
17.2.3 Memory Card Input Operation for Tool Data ..................................................... 239
17.2.4 Data Format ......................................................................................................... 240
17.3 HARD COPY OF Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i SCREENS .......................................241
18 HANDLING LARGE PROGRAMS......................................................242

18.1 SETTING A MAXIMUM PROGRAM SIZE THAT CAN BE HANDLED ......243
18.2 HANDLING A PROGRAM LARGER THAN THE MAXIMUM
ALLOWABLE SIZE ....................................................................................244
19 CALCULATOR FUNCTION................................................................246
19.1 CALCULATOR FUNCTION .......................................................................247
20 AUTOMATIC SETTING OF INITIAL VALUE DATA ...........................250
20.1 AUTOMATIC SETTING OF INITIAL VALUES ON THE INPUT
DATA SCREEN .........................................................................................251
20.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL DEFINITION BLOCK COPY .....................................252
c-5
III. CYCLE MACHINING TYPES

1 MILLING.............................................................................................255
1.1 HOLE MACHINING BY MILLING...............................................................262
1.1.1 Hole Machining Type Block ............................................................................... 262
1.1.2 Hole Position Block (XY Plane) ......................................................................... 278
1.1.3 Hole Position Block (YZ Plane).......................................................................... 286
1.1.4 Hole Position Block (XC Plane and End Face)................................................... 287
1.1.5 Hole Position Block (ZC Plane and Cylindrical Surface) ................................... 289
1.2 HOLE MACHINING BY TURNING (WITH THE TOOL ROTATED)...........290
1.2.1 Machining Type Blocks for Hole Machining by Turning
(with the Tool Rotated) ....................................................................................... 290
1.3 FACING .....................................................................................................297
1.3.1 Machining Type Blocks for Facing ..................................................................... 297
1.3.2 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Facing (XY Plane) .............................................. 303
1.3.3 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Facing (YZ Plane, XC Plane) ............................. 306
1.3.4 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Facing (XY Plane).................................................. 307
1.3.5 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Facing (YZ Plane, XC Plane, ZC Plane) ................ 308
1.4 CONTOURING ..........................................................................................309
1.4.1 Machining Type Blocks for Contouring.............................................................. 309
1.4.2 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Contouring (XY Plane)....................................... 330
1.4.3 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Contouring (YZ Plane, XC Plane)...................... 333
1.4.4 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Contouring (XY Plane) .......................................... 334
1.4.5 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Contouring (YZ Plane, XC Plane, ZC Plane)......... 336
1.5 POCKETING..............................................................................................337
1.5.1 Machining Type Blocks for Pocketing................................................................ 337
1.5.2 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Pocketing (XY Plane) ......................................... 353
1.5.3 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Pocketing (YZ Plane, XC Plane) ........................ 356
1.5.4 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Pocketing (XY Plane)............................................. 357
1.5.5 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Pocketing (YZ Plane, XC Plane, ZC Plane)........... 359
1.6 GROOVING ...............................................................................................360
1.6.1 Machining Type Blocks for Grooving................................................................. 360
1.6.2 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Grooving (XY Plane).......................................... 376
1.6.3 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Grooving (YZ Plane, XC Plane)......................... 381
1.6.4 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Grooving (XY Plane) ............................................. 382
1.6.5 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Grooving (YZ Plane, XC Plane, ZC Plane)............ 383
1.7 C-AXIS GROOVING ..................................................................................384
1.7.1 Machining Type Blocks for C-axis Grooving ..................................................... 384
1.7.2 Figure Blocks for C-axis Grooving ..................................................................... 386
1.8 REAR END FACING BY MILLING.............................................................391
1.8.1 Rear End Facing .................................................................................................. 391
1.9 ADDRESS SETTING OF ROTATION AXIS ..............................................393
1.9.1 Support for C-axis Machining with Rotation Axis.............................................. 393
c-6
1.10 C-AXIS CLAMPING M CODE OUTPUT ....................................................395

1.10.1 Outline .......................................................................................................395
1.10.2 Value of M Code Output ..................................................................................... 395
1.10.3 Distinction between Main and Sub Spindle ........................................................ 396
1.10.4 Position of M Code Output.................................................................................. 396
2 TURNING ...........................................................................................399
2.1 HOLE MACHINING (WORKPIECE ROTATION).......................................402
2.1.1 Machining Type Blocks for Hole Machining (Workpiece Rotation).................. 402
2.2 TURNING...................................................................................................408
2.2.1 Machining Type Blocks for Turning................................................................... 408
2.2.2 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Turning ................................................................... 437
2.3 TURNING GROOVING..............................................................................438
2.3.1 Machining Type Blocks for Turning Grooving................................................... 438
2.3.2 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Turning Grooving ............................................... 465
2.4 THREADING..............................................................................................480
2.4.1 Machining Type Blocks for Threading ............................................................... 480
2.4.2 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Threading............................................................ 486
2.5 REAR END FACING BY TURNING...........................................................492
2.5.1 Rear End Facing .................................................................................................. 492
3 SLANT FACE MACHINING (COORDINATE CONVERSION) ............494

3.1 SUPPORTABLE MACHINE CONFIGURATION........................................495
3.2 SLANT FACE MACHINING COMMAND
(COORDINATE CONVERSION)................................................................497
IV. MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS

1 MULTI-PATH LATHE APPLICATION ................................................507
1.1 PREPARATION .........................................................................................508
1.1.1 Machine Configuration Setting ........................................................................... 508
1.1.2 Set Icon for Selected Turret................................................................................. 510
1.2 OPERATIONS OF MULTI-PATH LATHE ..................................................511
1.2.1 Changing Screens for Each Path ......................................................................... 511
1.2.1.1 Changing by a Soft-key ....................................................................................511
1.2.1.2 Changing by a Switch on a Machine Operator’s Panel ....................................511
1.3 ANIMATION FOR MULTI-PATH LATHE ...................................................512
1.3.1 Tool Path Drawing During Machining and Tool Path Machining Simulation ... 512
1.3.2 Machining Simulation (Animation)..................................................................... 513
1.4 MACHINING SIMULATION FOR EACH PATH .........................................514
1.5 OTHERS ....................................................................................................516
c-7
2 SIMULTONEOUS ALL PATH DISPLAY / EDITING FUNCTION........517

2.1 OUTLINE ...................................................................................................518
2.2 DETAILS....................................................................................................519
2.2.1 How to Start......................................................................................................... 519
2.2.2 How to Finish ...................................................................................................... 519
2.3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION .....................................................................520
2.3.1 Display Position of Each Path ............................................................................. 520
2.3.2 Status Display Part .............................................................................................. 521
2.3.3 Current Position Display Part.............................................................................. 522
2.3.4 Program Display Part........................................................................................... 522
2.4 HOW TO SELECT PATH ..........................................................................523
2.5 OTHERS ....................................................................................................524
3 PROCESS LIST EDITING FUNCTION...............................................525
3.1 PREPARATION .........................................................................................526
3.1.1 Parameter ............................................................................................................. 526
3.2 START AND END OPERATIONS .............................................................527
3.2.1 Start ................................................................................................................... 527
3.2.2 End ................................................................................................................... 528
3.3 DISPLAY CONTENTS ...............................................................................529
3.3.1 Cell ................................................................................................................... 529
3.3.2 Current Cell ......................................................................................................... 529
3.3.3 Spindle ................................................................................................................. 530
3.3.4 Turret ................................................................................................................... 530
3.3.5 Waiting Line ........................................................................................................ 531
3.3.6 Transfer................................................................................................................ 531
3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS................................................................................532
3.4.1 Basic Operations.................................................................................................. 532
3.5 EDITING OPEARTIONS............................................................................534
3.5.1 Insertion of a Cell ................................................................................................ 535
3.5.2 Deletion of a Cell................................................................................................. 536
3.5.3 Copying of a Cell................................................................................................. 538
3.5.4 Moving of a Cell.................................................................................................. 540
3.5.5 Modification of Process Name ............................................................................ 543
3.5.6 Program Edit........................................................................................................ 544
3.5.7 Assign of Waiting................................................................................................ 546
3.5.8 Release of Waiting .............................................................................................. 549
3.5.9 Assign of Transfer ............................................................................................... 551
3.5.10 Release Transfer .................................................................................................. 553
3.5.11 Addition of Optional Block Skip for Each Path Program Check ........................ 555
3.5.12 Deletion of Optional Block Skip for Each Path Program Check ........................ 557
c-8
3.6 DEALING OF THE PART PROGRAM WITH UNFITTED TO PROCESS

LIST FORM................................................................................................558
3.7 FORMAT....................................................................................................560
3.8 OTHERS ....................................................................................................561
V. TOOL MANAGEMENT
1 ASSOCIATING TOOL NUMBERS WITH OFFSET NUMBERS .........565
1.1 SELECTING THE SCREEN FOR ASSOCIATING A TOOL NUMBER
WITH A OFFSET NUMBER ......................................................................566
1.2 SCREEN DISPLAY ITEMS........................................................................567
1.3 DISABLE WARNING MESSAGE...............................................................569
2 VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES ..........................570
2.1 SELECTING THE TOOL NUMBER-BY-TOOL NUMBER TOOL OFFSET
SETTING SCREEN ...................................................................................571
2.3 TOOL OFFSET ..........................................................................................574
2.4 NOTES ......................................................................................................575
2.5 DISABLE WARNING MESSAGE...............................................................577
3 VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA...................578
3.1 SELECTING THE TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA SETTING SCREEN......579
3.2 MAGAZINE DATA SCREENS (MAGAZINE 1 TO 4) .................................580
3.2.1 Screen Display Items ........................................................................................... 580
3.2.2 Displayed Warning Messages ............................................................................. 581
3.3 SPINDLE AND STANDBY POSITION TOOL DISPLAY SCREEN ............582
3.3.1 Screen Display Items ........................................................................................... 582
3.3.2 Displayed Warning Messages ............................................................................. 583
4 VIEWING AND SETTING LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA .....................584

4.1 SELECTING THE LIFE ,ANAGEMENT DATA SETTING SCREEN ..........585
4.3 CHANGING TOOL PRIORITY...................................................................588
4.4 DISPLAY LIFE VALUE OF TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA SCREEN 589
4.4.1 Operation ............................................................................................................. 589
4.5 GROUP NUMBER LIST DISPLAY.............................................................591
4.6 DISPLAY OF GROUP NUMBER LIST.......................................................593
4.6.1 Display Life States of Group............................................................................... 593
4.6.2 Restore Group Life .............................................................................................. 594
4.7 DISPLAYED WARNING MESSAGES .......................................................596
c-9
4.8 SETTING THE LIFE NOTICE FLAG..........................................................597

5 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA LIST SCREEN ...........................598
5.1 SELECTING THE LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA LIST SCREEN ................599
5.2 LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA LIST SCREEN..............................................600
6 MODAL DISPLAY OF OFFSET TYPES.............................................603
6.2 DISPLAYED OFFSET TYPES
(SET BY THE MACHINE TOOL BUILDER)...............................................605
7 DISPLAY TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA OF CNC STANDARD
SCREEN.............................................................................................606
7.1 OPERATION..............................................................................................607
8 OTHERS.............................................................................................609
8.1 RETURN TO MENU SCREEN...................................................................610
8.1.1 Return to SETTINGS Menu Screen .................................................................... 610
8.2 INHIBITION OF EDITING TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA AT CNC
STANDARD SCREEN ...............................................................................612
8.2.1 Operations............................................................................................................ 612
VI. EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING

1 EXPLANATORY NOTES....................................................................615
2 LATHE................................................................................................616
2.1 SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA...............................................................617
2.1.1 Setting of Z-axis Offset Data............................................................................... 618
2.1.2 Setting of X-axis Offset Data .............................................................................. 620
2.2 SETTING OF WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT DATA ..................621
2.3 PREPARING OF THE FIXED FORM SENTENCE MENU.........................623
2.3.1 Entering the Fixed Form Sentence for Turning Machining ................................ 623
2.3.2 Entering of the Fixed Form Sentence for Milling Machining............................. 624
2.4 SETTING OF TOOL DATA ........................................................................625
2.5 CREATING OF PART PROGRAM ............................................................626
2.5.1 Creating New Part Program................................................................................. 626
2.5.2 Operations of “START” Menu............................................................................ 627
2.5.2.1 Entering blank form data..................................................................................627
2.5.3 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for Turning Machining . 628
2.5.3.1 Entering in ISO-code form directly ..................................................................628
2.5.3.2 Entering by fixed form sentence menu .............................................................628
2.5.4 Entering Outer Roughing Process ....................................................................... 629
2.5.4.1 Entering outer roughing cycle block ................................................................629
2.5.4.2 Entering figure for outer roughing....................................................................631
c-10
2.5.5 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotation Blocks for Outer Finishing in
ISO-code Form .................................................................................................... 634
2.5.6 Entering Outer Finishing Cycle Machining Process ........................................... 635
2.5.6.1 Entering figure for outer finishing....................................................................636
2.5.6.2 Entering releasing motion blocks in ISO-code form ........................................636
2.5.7 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for C-axis Drilling......... 637
2.5.8 Entering C-axis Drilling Process ......................................................................... 638
2.5.8.1 Entering C-axis drilling cycle block .................................................................638
2.5.8.2 Entering hole position block.............................................................................639
2.5.9 Operations in the “END” Menu .......................................................................... 640
2.6 CHECKING OF THE PART PROGRAM....................................................641
2.6.1 Checking by Animation....................................................................................... 641
3 MACHINING CENTER .......................................................................642

3.1 SETTING OF TOOL LENGTH OFFSET DATA .........................................643
3.2 SETTING OF WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM DATA..............................646
3.3 PREPARING OF THE FIXED FORM SENTENCE MENU.........................648
3.3.1 Entering the Fixed Form Sentence for Milling.................................................... 648
3.4 SETTING OF THE TOOL DATA................................................................649
3.5 CREATING OF PART PROGRAM ............................................................651
3.5.1 Creating New Part Program................................................................................. 651
3.5.2 Operations of “START” Menu............................................................................ 652
3.5.2.1 Entering blank form data..................................................................................652
3.5.3 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating blocks for Roughing Flat
Endmill ................................................................................................................ 653
3.5.4 Entering Outer Wall Contouring Process ............................................................ 654
3.5.4.1 Entering outer wall contouring (rough) cycle block .........................................654
3.5.4.2 Entering figure for outer wall contouring (rough) ............................................655
3.5.5 Entering Pocket Roughing Process...................................................................... 656
3.5.5.1 Entering pocket roughing cycle block ..............................................................656
3.5.5.2 Entering figure for pocket roughing .................................................................658
3.5.6 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for Finishing Flat
Endmill ................................................................................................................ 663
3.5.7 Entering Pocket Bottom and Side Finishing Process .......................................... 664
3.5.7.1 Entering pocket bottom finishing cycle block ..................................................664
3.5.7.2 Entering figure for pocket bottom finishing .....................................................665
3.5.7.3 Entering figure for pocket side finishing ..........................................................666
3.5.7.4 Entering figure for pocket side finishing ..........................................................667
3.5.8 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for Drill ......................... 667
c-11

3.5.9 Entering Drilling Process .................................................................................... 668
3.5.9.1 Entering drilling cycle block ............................................................................668
3.5.9.2 Entering hole position block.............................................................................669
3.5.10 Operations in the “END” Menu .......................................................................... 670
3.6 CHECKING OF THE PART PROGRAM....................................................672
3.6.1 Checking by Animation....................................................................................... 672
APPENDIX
A PARAMETERS...................................................................................675
A.1 REQUIRED PARAMETERS ......................................................................676
A.1.1 Parameters Required for Basic Options .............................................................. 676
A.1.2 Parameters Required for Machining Simulation ................................................. 677
A.2 BASIC PARAMETERS ..............................................................................678
A.2.1 Settings for the Color Palette for Screen Display (No.2) .................................... 678
A.2.2 Parameters for Operations in General ................................................................. 679
A.2.3 Parameters for the Axial Configuration of the Machine ..................................... 683
A.2.4 Settings for Spindle Status Display ..................................................................... 684
A.2.5 Setting for the Display Language ........................................................................ 685
A.2.6 Settings for Graphic Display ............................................................................... 686
A.2.7 Settings for Machining Simulation Axes ............................................................ 687
A.2.8 Settings for Subprogram Selection Screens ........................................................ 688
A.2.9 Settings for the Color Palette for Screen Display................................................ 689
A.2.10 Settings for the Color Palette for Icon Display ................................................... 692
A.2.11 Settings for the Color Palette for Guide Display................................................. 694
A.2.12 Settings for Tool Path Drawing Colors ............................................................... 696
A.2.13 Settings for Machining Simulation Animation Colors ........................................ 697
A.2.14 Settings for Path Colors During Tool Path Plotting ............................................ 698
A.2.15 Settings for the Allocation of Startup Function Keys ......................................... 699
A.2.16 Settings for Current Position Display.................................................................. 701
A.2.17 Settings for F Load Meter Compensation ........................................................... 702
A.2.18 Settings for Tool Management Functions ........................................................... 703
A.2.19 Settings for Arbitrary Figures.............................................................................. 704
A.2.20 Settings for Operations in General (All common path)....................................... 705
A.2.21 Settings for Operations in General (Each path)................................................... 706
A.2.22 Settings for Operations in General (All common path)....................................... 707
A.3 PARAMETERS FOR MILLING CYCLE MACHINING ................................708
A.3.1 Parameters for Milling Cycles in General ........................................................... 708
A.3.2 Parameters for Facing Cycles .............................................................................. 713
A.3.3 Parameters for Contouring Cycles....................................................................... 714
A.3.4 Parameters for Pocketing Cycles ......................................................................... 717
A.3.5 Parameters for Grooving Cycles.......................................................................... 722
c-12
A.4 PARAMETERS FOR TURNING CYCLE OPTIONS ..................................725

A.4.1 Parameters Common to Turning Cycles.............................................................. 725
A.4.2 Parameters for Turning Cycle Machining ........................................................... 727
A.4.3 Parameters for Threading Cycles ........................................................................ 728
A.4.4 Parameter for Turning and Grooving Cycles ...................................................... 732
A.4.5 Parameters for Machining Simulation (Animated) ............................................. 733
A.4.6 Parameters for Multi Path Lathe Function .......................................................... 746
A.4.7 Parameters for Icon of Path Number Display...................................................... 748
B ALARMS ............................................................................................749
C Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i SETUP METHOD.................................................754
C.1 GENERAL..................................................................................................755
C.2 HARDWARE..............................................................................................756
C.3 SOFTWARE ..............................................................................................757
C.3.1 Lathe ................................................................................................................... 757
C.3.2 Machining Center ................................................................................................ 758
C.3.3 Lathe with Compound Machining Function........................................................ 758
C.3.4 Other Machines ................................................................................................... 759
C.3.5 Note ................................................................................................................... 759
C.4 PARAMETER SETTING ............................................................................760
C.4.1 Lathe ................................................................................................................... 760
C.4.3 Other Machines ................................................................................................... 770
C.5 M CODE OUTPUTED DURING CYCLE EXECUTING ..............................771
C.5.1 M code for Rigid Tapping ................................................................................... 771
C.5.2 M code for Clamping and Unclamping Rotate Axis as “C”................................ 772
C.6 OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE ......................................................774
C.6.1 Lathe ................................................................................................................... 774
c-13
I. GENERAL
TURNOPEEZG44 GENERAL 1.OVERVIEW OF THIS MANUAL
1 OVERVIEW OF THIS MANUAL

This manual describes the functions related to Doosan Infracore
eZ Guide i for the Series 16i/18i/21i-MODEL B.
For other functions, refer to the operator’s manual for the Series
16i/18i/21i-MODEL B.
The specifications and usage of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i may

vary according to the specifications of the operator’s panel of a machine
tool. Be sure to read the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
The functions of the CNC machine tool system are determined not
only by the CNC, but by the combination of the machine tool, the
power magnetic circuit in the machine tool, the servo system, the
CNC, and the operator’s panel.
It is impossible to cover all possible combinations of all functions,

programming methods, and operations in a single manual.
This manual explains only the Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i operations

provided for the CNC. For individual CNC machine tools, refer to
applicable manuals from the machine tool builders.
This manual explains as many detailed functions as possible.

However, it is not possible to describe all of the items which cannot
be done or which the operator must not do. Therefore, please assume
that functions other than those described in this manual cannot be
performed.
Detailed information and special conditions are explained in notes.

The readers may encounter new technical terms in the notes not
previously defined or described. In this case, read this manual through
first, then review the details.
NOTE
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i has options for supporting
milling and turning cycles, animated simulation, and set-up
guidance. This manual covers these functions
assuming that your machine has all these functions.
However, your machine may not actually be provided
with some of these functions.
Refer to the manual published by the machine tool
builder of your machine for details.
-3-
2.READ AT FIRST GENERAL TURNOPEEZG44
2 READ AT FIRST
In this chapter, you will find the explanation of the place where you
should refer to when you operate Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i.
When trying to use a machine equipped with the Doosan Infracore eZ
Guide i be sure to observe the safety precautions written in this
manual with sufficient caution.
What is Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i ?
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i is the operation guidance to support an

operatoron many situations such as creating a part program, checking by
machining simulation, set-up and actual machining. These operations
can be done on the only one screen.
ISO code form is adopted as the part program format, it is widely used
on many CNC machine tools, furthermore, machining cycles, which
can realize complicated machining motions by simple programming,
are provided.
As to the outline of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, refer to the following part.
• Features
II 1.1 MAIN FEATURES OF Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i
• Displaying screens
I 3. ALL-IN-ONE SCREEN
What kind of machines can be supported?
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i can be used for lathe, machining center

and compound machine including the following machine configurations.
• Lathe
From 1-path to 3-path lathe, which includes Y-axis and tool
inclining axis.
• Machining center
Machining center including work rotating table and tool
inclining axis.
• Compound machine
Compound machine with capability of both lathe machining and
milling.
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i has operation ability common to the above
machines. So, you can operate on same screen commonly on the
above machine excepting machining cycles and tool offset data
setting which are used for each machine exclusively.
-4-
TURNOPEEZG44 GENERAL 2.READ AT FIRST
How to install Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i to CNC
In ordinary case, Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i is installed in an CNC and

prepared by MTB such as parameter setting. In that case, you can use
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i as it is.
However, by some reasons, there is a case such like you must install
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i into CNC and set necessary parameter by
yourself.
In order to support you in that case, parameter setting and set-up
guidance explanations are prepared.
• Explanations for the operations for installing Doosan Infracore eZ
Guide i into CNC newly.
Appendix A. PARAMETER
Appendix C. Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i SETUP METHOD
How to begin to operate Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i
In order to display the screen of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, press

some function button on the MDI panel of CNC. As to which function
button should be used, refer to the manual made by MTB because it
depends on the parameter No.14794 and 14795 setting.
NOTE
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i operations cannot be done
during background editing mode of CNC program screen.
How to create a part program
In order to create a part program on Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, refer to the

following part,
• General operations flow of programming
VI. EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING OPERATION
: For lathe and machining center respectively, series of
operations from setting up such as offset data to creating a
part program and its checking are explained.
• Basic operations of part program editing
II 3. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS
: Various editing operations, which are used for the part
program in form of ISO code, are explained.
• Details of machining cycles
II 4. EDITING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS
II 5. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ABOUT ENTERING
ARBITRARY FIGURES
: Operations of various machining cycles, which can be
used for realizing complicated machining, are explained.
-5-
In the ISO code form part program, similar programs are used
frequently such as toll changing and spindle rotation. Doosan Infracore
eZ Guide i supports those frequently used operations by the fixed form
sentence function. Fixed form sentences, programming template, are
made in advance and can be used by selecting from the menu during
programming operations. In to details, refer to the following part.
• Making and using of fixed form sentence
II 3.13. FIXED FORM SENTENCE INSERTION
II 10.3. REGISTERING FIXED FORM SENTENCES
How to check the created part program
As to the operations for checking the created part program on

Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, refer to the following part.
• Checking the part program
II 9. OPERATIONS IN MACHINING SIMULATION
: Operations of checking the part program by using
machining simulation, animation or tool path drawing, are
explained. And also, checking the tool path drawing of
actual motions during machining is explained.
How to set the data needed for machining
In order to execute actual machining, tool offset data and work

coordinate data setting must be done in advance. These data are
prepared as CNC standard function, but these data can be entered by
using Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i too.
• Setting of tool offset data and work coordinate data
II 10.1 SETTING THE WORK COORDINATE DATA
II 10.2 SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA
: Convenient operations for work coordinate data and tool
offset data setting are explained.
In order to execute animation or machining cycle on Doosan Infracore
eZ Guide i, tool data necessary for these functions such as tool type
must be defined in advance. As for necessary operations, refer to the
following part.
• Setting of data necessary for animation and machining cycles.
II 13 TOOL DATA BASE FUNCTION
: Tool type, attaching direction, cutting edge and nose angle
for lathe and so on are set as tool data for each offset
number. Operation for tool data base is explained.
How to edit other part program during machining
By using a background editing function, editing of other part program

during machining can be done.
As for background editing operation, refer to the following part.
• Operation of background editing
II 11 BACKGROUND EDITING
-6-
TURNOPEEZG44 GENERAL 2.READ AT FIRST
How to modify part of cycle machining motions
While cycle machining which can be used in Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i can
create the actual machining motions automatically by using entered
cycle data, modifying part of the created machining motions cannot
be done.
However, there is a case that part of created machining motions
should be modified for more effective machining.
In this case, converting the cycle machining block to standard ISO
code NC part program, motion blocks which are made up with
G00/G01/G02/G03 and so on, is available.
The converted motion blocks are corresponded to each machining
motion, so by modifying part of converted blocks, the actual
machining motion can be changed.
NOTE
Hole machining and threading cycles are converted
to canned cycles, so the detailed motions executed
in a canned cycle cannot be changed.
As for NC program conversion operation, refer to the following part.

• Operations of NC program conversion
II 12 NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION
How to conserve part program and tool data
In order to use part program and tool data again later, these data can
be conserved by outputting to memory card.
As for operations of outputting and inputting these data to and from
memory card, refer to the following part.
• Outputting and inputting of part program and tool data
II 17 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
: In addition to the operations of outputting and inputting of
part program and tool data, screen hard copy operations
for Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i is explained.
How to operate more quickly
Almost all operations of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i use soft-key excepting

numeric data entering. However, if you are inured to Doosan Infracore
eZ Guide i operations, you may feel you can operate more quickly if
you use other key instead of soft-key one by one. This substitute key
operation is called short cut key.
NOTE
On the small key board, short cut key cannot be
used.
-7-
As for short cut key operation, refer to the following part.

• Details of short cut key operation
II 15 SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS
• Displaying explanation of short cut key operation
II 16 HELP SCREEN
: Pressing HELP key on the MDI panel displays the
window of HELP screen for short cut key operations.
How to calculate the entering data
In order to calculate the data before entering, pocket calculator type

calculation function can be used.
As for the operations, refer to the following part.
• Details of operations for calculating data
II 19 CALCULATOR FUNCTION
How are other operations of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i ?
In addition to creating part program, many convenient functions,

which can be used for operating a machine tool, are prepared on
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i.
As for those operations, refer to the following part.
• Other operations than creating part program
II 6. OPERATIONS IN THE MEM MODE
II 7. OPERATIONS IN THE MDI MODE
II 8. OPERATIONS IN THE MANUAL MODE (HANDLE
AND JOG)
: Operations for each mode are explained.
What kind of machining cycles can be used ?
On Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, turning, lathe machining, and milling

machining cycles are prepared as optional function.
As for details of machining cycle types and entering data, refer to the
following part.
• Details of machining cycles
III 1 MILLING
III 2 TURNING
-8-
TURNOPEEZG44 GENERAL 3.ALL-IN-ONE SCREEN
3 ALL-IN-ONE SCREEN
In Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, basically, only one screen called the All-in-
one Screen is used for all the operations from trial machining to actual
machining.
Title area CNC status area
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i
ACTUAL POS DIST TO GO SPINDLE Program

number etc.
Status indicator window
FEED MM/MIN
PROGRAM
Graphic window
Message
window
Soft keys Pop-up window Key-in buffer

Program window
Title area:
The title of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i is always displayed.
CNC status area:
The following CNC statuses are displayed.
• Mode
• Alarm status
• Reset or emergency stop status
• Actual time
Status indicator window:
The following information about CNC is displayed.
• Actual machine position
• Remaining moving distance of the actual block
-9-
3.ALL-IN-ONE SCREEN GENERAL TURNOPEEZG44
• Actual speed and load meter (for the axis with the
maximum load)
Remark) It is possible to display Actual speed in Feed per
revolution. ( Refer to the parameter No.14703#0. )
• Spindle rotating speed and spindle load meter
• Program number and process number
• Command values during automatic operation (M,S,T,F)
Graphic window:
The following graphical drawing is displayed as needed.
• Animated drawing with a solid model (machining
simulation)
• Tool path drawing
Program window:
The machining program is displayed.
Pop-up window:
The following supplemental screens are displayed as needed.
• M-code menu
• Fixed format statement menu
• Set data (workpiece coordinate system, tool offset, fixed
format statement registration)
• Program list
• Data input window for machining cycles
Message window:
The following messages are displayed as needed.
• Meaning of the word which a cursor is allocated (Guidance
Message)
Remark) It is possible to display two Guidance Message of
M/T mode in the CNC for compound lathe.
( Refer to the parameter No.14703#2. )
• Meaning of Machine Cycle which is executing
• Content of Warning and Alarm
Key-in buffer:
Comments on data and input numerical data are displayed as
needed.
Soft keys :
The comments on the following soft-keys are displayed as
needed.
• Editing operation menu
• Machining cycle menu
• Pop-up window menu
Remark)
The soft keys described in this manual are specified to 12 keys
placed under the screen, LCD, as shown in the following
example.
The meaning of each soft key is various by the displayed content
on the screen, and will be displayed on the relevant part for each
key.
- 10 -
TURNOPEEZG44 GENERAL 3.ALL-IN-ONE SCREEN
Example of soft keys)
Soft keys
- 11 -
4.SYMBOLS USED GENERAL TURNOPEEZG44
4 SYMBOLS USED
In this manual, the following conventions are used for keys.
(1) Function buttons are indicated in bold type:
Example) PROGRM, OFSET
(2) The numbers to be input by numerical keys are underlined.
Example) 12.345
(3) The input key is indicated in bold type in the same way as the
function buttons.
Example) 12.345 INPUT
(4) Soft-keys are enclosed in brackets [ ]:
Example) [LIST], [LINE]
(5) The cursor keys are indicated by the following symbols :
Example) ↑, ↓, ←, →
(6) The page keys are indicated by the following symbols :
Example) ↑, ↓
Soft Key
Numeral Key
Cursor Key INPUT Key
Function Button
Page Key
- 12 -
II. OPERATION
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 1.OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE
1 OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE
- 15 -
1.OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
1.1 MAIN FEATURES OF Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i
By using Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, the operator can carry out routine
machining easily.
1) Integrated operation screen that enables almost all routine

machining operations
A single integrated operation screen enables routine machining
operations including machining program input/editing, animated
simulation-based machining program checks, production
machining, MDI operations, and manual operations with JOG
and HANDLE.
2) Machining programs in ISO code format

Using ISO code machining programs, which are in wide use,
enables the operator to specify simple operations with simple
commands, such as those for straight lines and arcs, and
complicated machining operations with machining cycles easily.
3) High affinity with CAD/CAM

ISO code machining programs created using CAD/CAM can be
used without modification. Adding advanced machining cycles
to these machining programs makes them perfect machining
programs. They can be checked easily, using animated
simulation.
4) Advanced machining program editing

Using advanced editing functions, such as substring search and
cut/paste via the clipboard, enables easy editing of machining
programs.
5) Advanced machining using machining cycles (option)

Advanced machining cycles are available which cover various
types of machining including milling and turning. With these
machining cycles, it is possible to perform complex machining
by creating and running programs easily.
6) Fixed format program menu-driven simple program entry

Register a series of frequently used machining operations
previously as a menu, and select necessary machining operations
from the menu when creating a machining program. This method
can eliminate the trouble of entering similar machining
operations repeatedly.
7) M code menu
It is possible to input M codes easily by referencing explanations
displayed in an M code menu. Machine tool builders can create
the explanations easily.
- 16 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 1.OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE
8) Realistic animated simulation (option)

Machining programs can be checked easily, using an animated
simulation method that can realistically show what the surface
machined with a specific type of tool tip is like. In addition, you
can check a simulated workpiece as if you were looking at a real
workpiece because the animated simulation method uses solid
models for all operations, from milling to turning, for the
workpiece.
9) Advanced set-up guidance (option)

It is possible to set up machining operations and check the
precision of machined workpieces easily, using an advanced set-
up guidance function that can handle all measurements, from
tool offset measurement to the measurement of workpieces in
machine tools.
10) Supporting a wide variety of machine types including lathes

and machining centers
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i supports lathes 1 to 3, vertical and
horizontal machining centers, and tilting head-equipped
machining centers with 3 + 2 axes. It also supports compound
machine tools that are capable of turning and milling.
- 17 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 2.MACHINING PROGRAM FORMAT
2 MACHINING PROGRAM FORMAT

Machining programs used with Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i are created using
the ISO code format, which is widely used in CNC machine tools.
They use 4-digit G code machining and measurement cycles to
implement further advanced machining operations.
These 4-digit G code machining and measurement cycles can be input
and edited easily, using menu windows in which machining data can
be entered interactively.
When a machining program is being edited, an explanation about an
address pointed to with the cursor is displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
Note)
“Word” is the minimum data unit of NC part program, and
specified by the combination of address (A to Z) and numerical
data (0 to 9, +, -, decimal point).
“Address” means the content of numerical data such as moving
axis name.
Note)
“Cursor” of the part program means the part whose background
area is displayed by yellow. The part displayed by yellow is
called “selected by the cursor”, and program editing operation
will be dealt on this part.
There are 2 case cases for the selected part by the cursor.
(1) 1 block
When the cursor moved the top of the next block by
pressing the cursor key →, the whole word data included in
the block are selected.
When the cursor selects the top word data of some block,
the whole word data included in the block are selected by
pressing the cursor key ←.
In case that the whole word data include in the block are
selected by the cursor, the next or previous 1 block will be
selected by pressing the cursor key ↓ or ↑.
(2) 1 word
In case that the whole word data in 1 block are selected by
the cursor as described above, if you push the cursor key ←
or →, the cursor will select 1 word only. By pressing the
cursor key ← or → again, the cursor will select the next 1
word.
When the 1 word is selected, the cursor will select the 1
word of same order in the nest or previous block by
pressing the cursor key ↑ or ↓.
- 18 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 2.MACHINING PROGRAM FORMAT
Note)
In the screen, in which numerical data are directly entered such
as offset data or cycle machining data, the cursor is specified by
displaying the data frame by blue.
The part specified by blue frame is called “data item selected by
the cursor”, and you can enter the proper data by pressing
INPUT key after entering numeric data by numeric keys.
By pressing the cursor key ← ↑ → ↓, you can select the next or
previous data item.
- 19 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 3.EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS
3 EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS
- 20 -
3.1 MACHINING PROGRAM WINDOW AND EIDITNG
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i uses a program window to input and edit

machining programs (in ISO code format).
The program window is operated using the following soft keys, which
are displayed by pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or rightmost soft
key [>] several times.
REWIND CHSIZE LINENO
[REWIND] : This soft key takes you to the beginning of the program.
[CHSIZE] : This soft key zooms the program window to full screen.
[LINENO] : This soft key selects whether to display the line number
at the beginning of each block. The line number is not
memorized in the machining program.
The scroll bar displayed on the right edge of the program window
indicates the approximate position of the cursor throughout the
machining program.
The cursor is moved around in the program window, using the cursor
keys ←, ↑, ↓, and →. Pressing → moves the cursor right in a block.
To move the cursor to the next block, you need to select the block
entirely once and then select an individual address. Pressing. ← has
the same effect as for → except for the direction in which the cursor
moves.
The program is edited using the following soft keys, which are
displayed by pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or rightmost soft key
[>] several times.
NEWPRG OPEN SRCH↑ SRCH↓ O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PASTE
- 21 -
Note)
Basically, soft keys are placed in form of 1 line. By pressing the
right end key [>], the soft keys shifted to right direction by 10
will appear. By pressing the left end key [<], the left side soft
keys shifted by 10 will appear.
When the right end soft keys are displayed, the left end soft keys
will appear by pressing [>]. When the left end soft keys are
displayed, the right end soft keys will appear by pressing [<].
- 22 -
3.2 CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS
NEWPRG O LIST SRCH↑ SRCH↓ O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PASTE
Pressing [NEWPRG] displays the program creation window.
For the program creation window, the following soft keys are
displayed.
CREATE CANCEL
In this window, enter a program number, using numeric keys, and

then press [CREATE].
Usually, the program number is 4 digits, but you can use 8 digits
program number when the corresponding optional function is added.
Pressing [CREATE], new program with entered program number only
is created, and it is displayed in the program window. In that case, the
following soft keys for editing operation are displayed.
In addition to the above operation, you can create new part program
by entering new program number after the address “O”, and pressing
INSERT key.
- 23 -
3.3 EDITING IN A PROGRAM LIST
Pressing [O LIST] displays a window that lists registered machining

programs.
By pressing the ← or → cursor key, a sort type (sort by number, sort
by date and time of updating, or sort by size) can be selected.
The following soft keys are displayed in the window. They can be
used for editing such as copying or deleting machining programs.
NEW COPY DELETE EDTCOM SEARCH M CARD ALLDEL SRTORD OPEN CLOSE
[NEW] : This soft key displays the program creation window, in

which you can create machining programs.
[COPY] : This soft key displays the program copy window. After
a program number is entered using numeric keys,
pressing [COPY] copies the specified program.
[DELETE] : This soft key displays a message for asking you
whether you really want to delete a specified program.
Pressing [YES] deletes the specified program. Pressing
[NO] cancels the request to delete the specified
program.
- 24 -
[EDTCOM] : This soft key displays the comment (program name)

edit window. If you move the cursor, using ← or →,
and enter a character, using MDI keys, the character
appears at the left of the cursor. Using the CAN key
can delete the character at the left. Pressing [ALTER]
causes the comment to be changed.
[SEARCH] : This soft key displays the program search window.
After entering a desired program number in the window,
using numeric keys, press [SEARCH].
[M CARD] : This soft key enables input/output to and from the
memory card.
[ALLDEL] : This soft key displays a message for checking if all
programs may be deleted. Pressing [YES] deletes all
programs. Pressing [NO] cancels the deletion of all
programs.
[SRTORD] : This soft key switches the sort order for displaying
programs between ascending order and descending
order.
[OPEN] : After placing the cursor on a program you want to edit,
using the ↑ or ↓ cursor key, pressing this soft key
selects the program and closes the list window. Then,
the soft keys described at the top of this subchapter are
displayed again.
[CLOSE] : This soft key closes the program list window.
- 25 -
3.4 SEARCHING FOR A MACHINING PROGRAM TO BE

EDITED
After entering a desired program number, using numeric keys,

pressing [O SRCH] can select the program.
Pressing [O SRCH] without entering a program number causes the
next program to be selected.
Pressing the O key on the MDI panel, the soft keys changes to the
above one, so enter the program number to be searched and press [O
SRCH].
And as another way, you can select the program in the program list by
pressing [OPEN] after placing the cursor on the program number to
be selected.
When the part program is selected, the content of the part program is
displayed in the program window, and the above soft keys will be
displayed.
- 26 -
3.5 BASIC EDITING OPERATIONS OF PART PROGRAM
Since Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i uses ISO-code form part program, editing
of 1 word, minimum unit of the program and made from address and
numerical data, are available by using INSERT, ALTER and
DELETE keys, which are placed on the MDI panel.
3.5.1 Entering a Word (INSERT key)
Operation
(1) Select the word, before which you want to insert the new
word, by placing the cursor. Otherwise, select the block,
before which you want to insert the new word, by placing the
cursor.
(2) Enter new word by MDI keys. Plural words can be entered at
once.
(3) Press INSERT.
3.5.2 Modifying a Word (ALTER key)
Operation
(1) Select the word to be modified by placing the cursor on the
word.
once.
(3) Press ALTER.
3.5.3 Modifying the Numeric Value of a Word (ALTER key)
Operation
(1) Select the word to be modified by placing the cursor on the
word.
(2) Enter new numeric data only by MDI keys. Plural words can
not be entered.
(3) Press ALTER.
- 27 -
3.5.4 Deleting a Word (DELETE key)
Operation
(1) Select the word to be deleted by placing the cursor on the
word.
(2) Press DELETE.
NOTE
1 As the deleting operation in the CNC program
screen, no prompting message for deleting a word
is displayed.
2 Program number, Oxxxx, and end of program, %,
cannot be deleted.
3.5.5 Modifying a Block (ALTER key)
Operation
(1) Select the block to be modified by placing the cursor on the
block.
once.
(3) Press ALTER.
3.5.6 Deleting a Block (DELETE key)
Operation
(1) Select the block to be deleted by placing the cursor on the
block.
(2) Press DELETE.
3.5.7 Changing the Program Number (ALTER key)
Operation
(1) Select the program number word, Oxxxx, by placing the
cursor on the word.
(2) Enter the address “O” and new program number by MDI
keys.
(3) Press ALTER.
- 28 -
3.6 SEARCH (FORWARD AND BACKWARD)
[ ]
After a character string is entered using MDI keys, pressing [SRCH↑]

(backward search) or [SRCH↓] (forward search) searches for the
specified character string. A substring can also be searched for.
If the character string is found, key-in buffer is cleared, but the string
is displayed in the [ ] under [SRCH↑] and [SRCH↓].
This displayed string can be used for the next time searching
operation. Only pressing [SRCH↑] or [SRCH↓] without entering
same string again, you can search the same string over and over.
- 29 -
3.7 CUT
Pressing [CUT] displays a message that prompts you to select a range

of data to be cut. First select the cut range (by displaying it in yellow),
using cursor keys, and then press [CUT]. The data cut off from the
specified range is stored on the clipboard. The contents of the
clipboard can be pasted to other places in the program and to other
programs.
Clip board is the memory, in which the content of part program can be
stored temporary. By pressing [CUT] or [COPY], the content of the
cursor selected is stored in it, then the old content is cleared. The
content of the clip board is cleared at the power off of CNC.
A clip board size can be selected using bits 4 and 5 of parameter No.
14701.
Bit 4 = 0, bit 5 = 0: Sets a clip board size of 1024 bytes.

NOTE
The contents of the clipboard are preserved until
the power is shut off or other data is stored on the
clipboard. So, the clipboard contents can be used
any number of times.
- 30 -
3.8 COPY
Pressing [COPY] displays a message that prompts you to select a

range of data to be copied. First select the copy range (by displaying it
in yellow), using cursor keys, and then press [COPY]. The data
copied from the specified range is stored on the clipboard. The
contents of the clipboard can be pasted to other places in the program
and to other programs.
- 31 -
3.9 PASTE
Pressing [PASTE] pastes the contents of the clipboard to the place

that immediately follows the current cursor position.
The clipboard contents are preserved.
- 32 -
3.10 DELETE
Pressing [DELETE] displays a message that prompts you to select a

range of data to be deleted. First select the delete range (by displaying
it in yellow), using cursor keys, and then press [SELECT]. A message
appears which asks whether you really want to delete the selected
data. Pressing [YES] deletes the data.
The deleted data is not stored on the clipboard. The clipboard
preserves the previous contents.
- 33 -
3.11 KEY-IN PASTE
Pressing [KEYPST] copies the contents of a range selected (displayed

in yellow) using the cursor to the key-in buffer.
Using the ← and → cursor keys can move the cursor around in the
key-in buffer, so a character entered using an MDI key can be placed
immediately before the cursor. Pressing the CAN key deletes the
character at the left of the cursor.
The character strings in the key-in buffer can be used in the same
manner as for ordinary editing. Pressing the ALTER key, for example,
replaces the cursor-selected current contents in the program with the
current contents of the key-in buffer. Pressing the INSERT key
inserts the key-in buffer contents to the place that immediately
follows the cursor-selected contents in the program.
Pressing CAN after SHIFT clears the contents of the key-in buffer.
NOTE
Using key-in paste enables a very long comment
program and part of a custom macro program block
to be changed easily.
- 34 -
3.12 M-CODE MENU
Pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or rightmost soft key [>] several
times displays [M CODE] as follows:
START CYCLE END MECYC ALTER FIGURE M CODE FIXFRM
Pressing [M CODE] displays the M code menu.
The following soft keys are displayed for M-code menu.
INSERT INS+; CANCEL
Select an M code group, using the ← and → cursor keys, and then
select an M code from the M code group, using the ↑ and ↓ cursor
keys.
Pressing [INSERT] inserts the selected M code to the place that
follows immediately the cursor position in the program. Pressing
[INS+;] inserts an EOB to the place that follows immediately the M
code at the same time.
Entering M-code continuously and pressing [INS+;] at last, plural M-
code can be entered in one block.
- 35 -
NOTE
In many cases, M codes in the M code menu are
set up to a machine tool by the machine tool
builder. So, the M code menu varies from one
machine tool to another.
- 36 -
3.13 FIXED FORM SENTENCE INSERTION
times displays [FIXFRM] for milling or turning.
However, there is a case that either of them is displayed depending on
the machine construction, so into details, refer to the document made
by machine tool builder.
(Example of softy key menu for milling)
(Example of softy key menu for turning)
times displays [FIXFRM].
If [FIXFRM] is displayed together with a milling soft key menu,
pressing it displays a milling fixed form sentence menu. If [FIXFRM]
is displayed together with a turning soft key menu, pressing it displays
a turning fixed form sentence menu.
START CYCLE END ALTER FIGURE M CODE FIXFRM
- 37 -
The following soft keys are displayed for the fixed form sentence
menu.
INSERT CANCEL
Select a fixed form sentence group, using the ← and → cursor keys,
and then select a fixed form sentence from the fixed form sentence
group, using the ↑ and ↓ cursor keys.
Pressing [INSERT] inserts the selected fixed form sentence to the
place that follows immediately the cursor position in the program.
Using this function makes it easy to enter machining program patterns
(fixed form sentences) that may be used frequently.
As the following example, you can register the fixed form sentence, in
which undefined data is replaced to the special character such as “?”.
1. TOOL CHANGE
G28 G91 X0. Y0. ;
G28 Z0. ;
T? ;
M03 S? ;
When the fixed form sentence, in which this special character is

included, is inserted to the part program, warning to urge an operator
to enter the defined data.
Entering the data that is used actually and pressing ALTER can make
the correct part program.
This special character is displayed in red in the program window.
This special character and displaying color can be modified by setting
corresponding parameters.
Set ASCII code in decimal value of the special character to the
parameter No.14860. If 0 is set to this parameter, “/” is used as the
special character.
Set the color code of the displaying color to the parameter No.14480
in form of “AABBCC”. AA is red color value, BB is green color
value and CC is blue color value. If 0 is set to this parameter, the
character is displayed in red.
- 38 -
NOTE
1 In many cases, fixed form sentences in the fixed
form sentence menu are set up to a machine tool
by the machine tool builder. So, the fixed form
sentence menu varies from one machine tool to
another.
Operators can make changes and additions to the
menu. For details, see the descriptions about
[SETING].
2 Start and end command fixed form sentences can
be called from the fixed form sentence group
separately, using, respectively, [START] and
[END].
- 39 -
4.EDITING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
4 EDITING CYCLE MACHINING

OPERATIONS
times displays the following cycle machining soft key menu.
Two cycle machining types, milling and turning, are optionally
supported. A soft key menu is available for each cycle machining
type.
See Sections 3.11 and 3.12 for explanations about [M CODE] and
[FIXFRM].
Flow of creating a part program
Soft key menus for process programming
End
Start Cycle Processing
Process Start Menu Process Cycle Menu Process End Menu
Cycle Shape Menu
Only the menu of the cycle form which

can be used in the selected processing
cycle is displayed automatically.
- 40 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 4.EDITING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS
4.1 ENTERING THE START COMMAND
Pressing [START] displays the start command fixed form sentence

menu.
(Example of the fixed form sentence menu for milling start)
(Example of the fixed form sentence for turning start)
Select a fixed form sentence, using the ↑ and↓ cursor keys.

place that follows immediately the current cursor position in the
program.
This operation makes it easy to enter machining program patterns
(fixed form sentences) that are used frequently at machining program
start.
- 41 -
NOTE
In many cases, fixed form sentences in the fixed
form sentence menu are set up to a machine tool
by the machine tool builder. So, the fixed form
sentence menu varies from one machine tool to
another.
Operators can make changes and additions to the
menu. For details, see the descriptions about
[SETING].
- 42 -
4.2 SELECTING A CYCLE MACHINING TYPE
Pressing [CYCLE] displays the cycle machining menu.
The following soft keys are displayed for the cycle machining menu.
SELECT CANCEL
Select a cycle machining group, using the ← and → cursor keys, and
then select a cycle machining type from the cycle machining group,
using the ↑ and ↓ cursor keys.
Pressing [SELECT] displays the data entry window for the selected
cycle machining type.
After a menu number is inputted, it is possible that cycle machining is
selected by pressing INPUT key.
- 43 -
NOTE
The scroll bar displayed on the right edge of the
cycle machining menu window indicates the
approximate position of the cursor throughout the
cycle machining menu.
If the scroll bar marker is on the middle of the scroll
bar, therefore, it is likely that part of the cycle
machining menu is hidden behind the window. If
this is the case, pressing the ↓ cursor key makes
the hidden part visible.
- 44 -
4.3 ENTERING CYCLE MACHINING DATA
The cycle machining data entry window is divided into two sections,
one section for cutting conditions and the other for detailed data.
CUT COND. DETAIL
Pressing the ← or → cursor key switches between the two sections

and changes the displayed tab. The character in the selected tab is
displayed in blue.
Pressing the ↑ or ↓ cursor key can place the cursor on a desired data
input item.
There are two types of data input items. One type includes those
entered as numbers, and the other type, those selected from a menu
displayed using a soft key. For the first type, the message "KEY IN
NUMERALS." is displayed in the lower section of the window. For
the second type, the message "SELECT SOFT KEY" is displayed.
Necessary data can be entered by referencing a comment for the data
input item and a guide chart displayed in the window.
The following soft keys are displayed for the machining cycle data
window.
CHCURS INSERT CANCEL
When the necessary data has been entered, pressing [INSERT] inserts
a block for the related cycle machining into a machining program.
- 45 -
NOTE
1 Among the data item displayed in the cutting condition
window, there are data should be danger if they are set
automatically such as cutting amount or feedrate. These
data should be entered by an operator always. Other data
are set automatically.
2 Data items displayed in the detail window are usually set
automatically by duplicating the value entered last time. So,
check these automatically set value and modify them if
necessary.
3 Executing cycle machining requires a cycle machining block
and a figure block, which will be explained later.
Once a cycle machining block has been entered, therefore,
be sure to enter a figure block in succession.
4 A data item with an asterisk displayed at its right end has a
default value. You need to enter no data if you accept the
default value.
5 The [CHCURS] soft key is displayed in data entry windows
for cycle machining, figure, and contour programs.
Pressing this soft key can select whether the ← and →
cursor keys are to be used for tab switching or cursor
movement within the entered data. If tab switching is
selected, "Tab ←→" is displayed in the upper right section
of the window. If cursor movement is selected, "Character
←→" is displayed.
- 46 -
4.4 SELECTING FIGURES
In usual case, entering a cycle motion block displays continuously

the following figure menu exclusively used for the already entered
cycle machining.
(Example of figure menu for pocketing)
The cycle figure menu window is divided into two sections, one
section for selecting figure and the other for subprogram.
(Example of tab for pocketing)
POCKET FIG SUBPROGRAM
Pressing the ← or → cursor key switches between the two sections

and changes the displayed tab. The character in the selected tab is
displayed in blue.
Select a figure from the figure group, using the ↑ and ↓ cursor keys.
The following soft keys are displayed for the machining cycle data
window.
SELECT CANCEL
Pressing [SELECT] displays a data entry window for the selected

figure.
- 47 -
There are 2 types of figures used for cycle machining, fixed form
figure and free form figure.
The former one is predefined figure such as square and circle, and can
be specified by entering minimum data such as side length or circle
radius.
The later one is specified by entering figures by line or arc along the
figures written on a blue print one by one.
Pressing the → cursor key displays the menu window of subprogram

and the character in the selected tab is displayed in blue.
If some figure blocks were created as subprogram in advance, the
subprogram number and name are displayed in the subprogram menu,
and suitable subprogram can be selected by placing the cursor on it.
Pressing [SELECT] create the block for calling the selected
subprogram as “M98 Pxxxx ;” in the actual part program.
It is specified by program number to be displayed in the subprogram

menu or not.
For turning cycle machining figure, the minimum and maximum
program number of the programs should be used as the subprogram
are set in the parameter No.14720 (TFIGSNO) and No.14721
(TFIGENO).
For milling cycle machining figure, the minimum and maximum
program number of the programs should be used as the subprogram
are set in the parameter No.14722 (MFIGSNO) and No.14723
(MFIGENO).
Subprogram whose number is within these range is displayed in the
subprogram menu for turning or milling cycle figure.
Over 2 figure blocks can be specified continuously for one cycle

machining block. If adding another figure block to the part program in
which cycle machining block and figure block were already inserted,
press [FIGURE] in the soft-keys of program screen and make the
figure menu window display.
But, in this case, all figure menus for all kind of cycle machining are
displayed in one screen. This is different from the figure menu
displayed at the time some cycle machining block is inserted.
- 48 -
NOTE
The scroll bar displayed on the right edge of the
figure menu window indicates the approximate
position of the cursor throughout the figure menu.
If the scroll bar marker is on the middle of the scroll
bar, therefore, it is likely that part of the figure menu
is hidden behind the window. If this is the case,
pressing the ↓ cursor key makes the hidden part
visible.
- 49 -
4.5 ENTERING FIXED FORM FIGURE DATA FOR CYCLE

MACHINING
Selecting the fixed form figure displays the data entry window for
cycle machining fixed form data entry window.
(Example of the pocketing fixed form figure)
A data entry window for hole positions, fixed form figures (milling),
turning groove figures, or screw figures (turning) may be extended
over two pages as necessary.
Pressing the ← or → cursor key switches between the two pages. It
also changes the displayed tab.
Pressing the ↑ or ↓ cursor key can place the cursor on a desired data
input item.
entered as numbers, and the other type, those selected from a menu
displayed using a soft key. For the first type, the message "KEY IN
NUMERALS." is displayed in the lower section of the window. For
the second type, the message "SELECT SOFT KEY" is displayed.
Necessary data can be entered by referencing a comment for the data
input item and a guide chart displayed in the window.
The following soft keys are displayed for the fixed form figure data
entry windows.
CONCAV NXTFIG INSERT CANCEL
When the necessary data has been entered, press [INSERT] or

[NXTFIG], then a block for the related figure block is inserted into a
machining program.
- 50 -
Pressing [INSERT] returns to the program window. Pressing

[NXTFIG] displays figure selecting menu again.
NOTE
1 More than one figure can be entered in succession
for a single cycle machining type.
Cycle machining is executed for each of the
specified figures sequentially.
2 An ordinary ISO code block can be entered
between cycle machining and figure blocks. If this is
done, no machining operation takes place in the
cycle machining block. Instead, the ISO code block
entered before the figure block is executed. Cycle
machining is executed only in the figure block after
the ISO code block has been executed.
- 51 -
4.6 ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURE DATA FOR CYCLE

MACHINING
For cycle machining, an arbitrary figure consisting of circles and

straight lines can be entered by performing automatic calculation on
entered data to obtain the end point of each figure even if no end point
is specified on the drawing.
1) Entering start points

Be sure to enter a start point for the beginning of an arbitrary
figure.
After entering necessary data, press [OK].
2) Selecting a figure
A menu for figure selection is displayed on soft keys as shown
below. Select whatever is necessary.
LINE ARC ARC CR CC ALTER DELETE RECALC CREATE CANCEL
3) Entering figure data

When a figure is selected, a figure data entry window appears. In
this window, enter the figure data specified on the drawing.
entered as numbers, and the other type, those selected from a
menu displayed using a soft key. For the first type, the message
"KEY IN NUMERALS." is displayed in the lower section of the
window. For the second type, the message "SELECT SOFT
KEY" is displayed.
After entering the necessary data, press [OK].
- 52 -
NOTE
As figures are entered, they are drawn in the figure
entry window.
In the upper section of the window, symbols for
entered figures are displayed sequentially, starting
at the left. The ← or → cursor key can be used to
select an entered figure; the lines that correspond
to the selected figure will be displayed in yellow.
4) Changing figure data

Place the cursor on the figure that contains the figure data you
want to change, and press [ALTER]. The figure data entry
window appears. In this window, place the cursor on the data
input item you want to change, and enter new data.
If you want to delete data, press the CAN and INPUT keys in
the stated sequence.
Pressing [OK] closes the figure data entry window. Press
[RECALC] to perform calculation for all entered figures, and
check drawn figures to see if the intended changes have been
made.
5) Inserting new figures

After placing the cursor on the figure that precedes immediately
the place where your want to add a figure, select the figure to be
added from the soft key menu.
In the figure data entry window that appears for the new figure,
enter figure data necessary for the figure, and press [OK].
Press [RECALC] to perform calculation for all entered figures,
and check drawn figures to see if the intended additions have
been made.
6) Deleting unnecessary figures

After placing the cursor on the figure you want to delete, press
[DELETE].
Press [RECALC] to perform calculation for all entered figures,
and check drawn figures to see if the intended deletions have
been made.
7) Changing figures
If you want to change the type of an entered figure, delete it and
enter a new figure.
8) Writing entered arbitrary figures to machining programs

After all necessary figures have been entered, they can be written
to machining programs.
There are two methods for writing figures to machining
programs. The first method writes directly to the currently
selected machining program. The second method writes to a
newly created subprogram.
After necessary data has been entered, pressing [CREATE]
displays a window for selecting one of the creation methods.
- 53 -
Select whichever creation method you want, using the ↑ and ↓

cursor keys.
To write to the machining program that has been selected,
simply press [OK].
To create a subprogram, enter a new subprogram number to the
subprogram number item, and then press the INPUT key. You
can enter character strings as a comment if necessary. The
comment is displayed as a program name in the list window.
Pressing [OK] now creates a subprogram and writes figures to
the subprogram.
NOTE
See Chapter 5, "Detailed Descriptions about
Entering Arbitrary Figures," for descriptions about
data for arbitrary figures.
- 54 -
4.7 ENTERING CONTOUR PROGRAMS
It is possible to enter arbitrary figures consisting of circles and

straight lines (contour programs), which are different from cycle
machining.
Pressing [CONTOR] displays the same window as for the arbitrary
figure data described earlier. After performing the same operations to
enter figures, write them to the last machining program.
In this case, a G01/G02/G03 program in ISO code format is created.
NOTE
See Chapter 5, "Detailed Descriptions about
Entering Arbitrary Figures," for descriptions about
data entered for contour programs.
1) Entering insertion character strings
Any character string can be entered to all figure blocks entered

for a contour program.
The "INS. STRIN" tab is added to the entry window for each
figure block of the contour program.
Insertion character string

Data item Meaning
F* LAST STRING Character string (consisting of up to 16 characters)
entered at the beginning (immediately after an EOB)
of each figure block
B* NEXT STRING Character string (consisting of up to 16 characters
entered) at the end (immediately before an EOB) of
each figure block
Using "INSERT STRING" can enter G codes and feedrates into figure
blocks.
NOTE
"INSERT STRING" can enter neither a comment
based on a ( ) pair nor an EOB.
- 55 -
2) Editing figure blocks in contour programs

A figure block entered to a contour program can be edited by
performing figure calculation in the same manner as when it was
entered.
For editing figure blocks, entered figure data is written as a
comment to each figure block.
There is a start point G code (G1200, G1300, G1450, G1500, or

G1600) in the first figure block in contour programming. Place
the cursor on the block, and press the [ALTER] soft key.
This operation displays a screen for editing contour programs.
On this screen, perform the same editing operation as for other
arbitrary figures.
- 56 -
4.8 ENTERING THE END COMMAND
Pressing [END] displays the end command fixed form sentence menu.
Select a fixed form sentence, using the ↑ and ↓ cursor keys.

place that follows immediately the current cursor position in the
program.
This operation makes it easy to enter machining program patterns
(fixed form sentences) that are used frequently at machining program
start.
- 57 -
4.9 CHANGING CYCLE MACHINING AND FIGURE DATA
To change the contents of a machining cycle and fixed form figure,

place the cursor on the related block, and press [ALTER].
To change the contents of an arbitrary figure and contour program,
place the cursor at the first of the related blocks, and press [ALTER].
In any case, a data entry window for these items appears. After
making the necessary data changes, press [CREATE] in the same
manner as for new entry. New figures are written to the machining
program.
- 58 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
5 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ABOUT

ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
This chapter explains data for arbitrary figures entered with

Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i.
NOTE
1 When entering arbitrary figures, enter all the data
for each figure specified on the drawing.
If superfluous data is entered, it will not be used in
figure calculation; only the data necessary for figure
calculation is used.
2 If all the data necessary for figure calculation is
specified on the drawing, entering it enables figure
calculation. If data is insufficient, however, it is
necessary to calculate and enter the necessary
figure data separately.
3 If arbitrary-figure calculation according to Doosan Infracore
eZ Guide i produces more than one candidate figure,
the figure that passes the shortest path will be
selected automatically.
In calculating a contact between an arc and straight
line or between two arcs, a figure that links two
figures smoothly is selected automatically.
4 On the program editing screen, after moving the
cursor on the sub program call command (M98
P****) which is composed by the arbitrary figure
blocks, pressing the [INPUT] key displays the
window for editing the arbitrary figures to edit
directly.
5 When positioning the cursor on the block of
subprogram calling in the program-editing screen,
arbitrary figures of the subprogram is drawn on the
graphic window.
- 59 -
5.DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
5.1 INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING
In entering arbitrary figures of element “LINE” or “ARC”, “END

the end point can be set as an incremental programming.
When positioning the cursor on “END POINT”, the softkey [ST.P+I]

and [ST.P-I] are displayed.
1) When the operator pushs the softkey [ST.P+I], “END POINT” is

set to
“Start Point of the figure (=End Point of last figure) +”.
And input the increment or decrement in succession. As aresult
of pushing [INPUT] key, the plus incremental value is set.
2) When the operator pushs the softkey [ST.P-I], “END POINT” is

set to
“Start Point of the figure (=End Point of last figure) -”.
And input the increment or decrement in succession. As aresult
of pushing [INPUT] key, the minus incremental value is set.
- 60 -
NOTE
1 If the last figure element is “CORNER R” or
“CHAMFER”, The point to set as the start point in
this function is as follows.
Start Point Start Point
C
R
Fig1 Last figure is a chamfer. Fig2 Last figure is a corner R.
2 If “END POINT” of the last figure is pending, “END

POINT” is not set to the start point by pressing the
software key [ST.P+I] and [ST.P-I]. The warning
message “START POINT IS PENDING.” is
displayed.
- 61 -
5.2 ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE XY PLANE
Arbitrary figures in the XY plane can be used in the following types

of milling.
1. Facing
2. Contouring (Side cutting)
3. Pocketing
4. Grooving
NOTE
1 See Chapter 1, "Milling," in Part III for detailed
descriptions about data to be entered for each type
of cycle machining.
2 When entering an arbitrary figure for pocketing,
make its end point coincide with its start point. To
put another way, combine parts figures with blank
figures in such a way that a closed curve is created.
Pocketing is carried out in this closed curve.
3 It is possible to specify "PART" and "BLANK" as
"ELEMENT TYPE" for an individual arbitrary figure.
If a pocket is open in part, this "BLANK" can be
used to enter an arbitrary figure resembling a blank
figure for the open portion, thus carrying out
optimum pocketing.
- 62 -
Start point: G1200 (XY plane)
ELEMENT (INPUT DATA) (Note 1)

Data item Meaning
T FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [FACE] : Used as a figure in facing
(Note 2) [CONVEX] : Used as an outer-perimeter figure in
contouring
[CONCAV] : Used as an inner-perimeter figure in
contouring or a figure in pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a figure in grooving
X START POINT X X coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary figure
Y START POINT Y Y coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary figure
Z BASE POSITION Position of the machining surface of an arbitrary figure
D HEIGHT/DEPTH Height or Depth from Base position to cutting surface
Remarks) This item is displayed in Contouring,
Pocketing and Grooving.
W GROOVE WIDTH Groove width (Positive value)
Remarks) This item is displayed in Grooving.
P FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [RIGHT] : The right side of an entered figure as cutting
[LEFT] : The left side of an entered figure as cutting
Remarks) This item is displayed in Open figure of
Contouring.
NOTE
1 ‘INPUT DATA’ means the items, which are
displayed on the input data window in editing or
altering.
2 Select, with a figure type for a start point, which
milling operation is to use an arbitrary figure. Data
to be entered for the start point varies depending on
what figure type is selected. For details, see
descriptions about the respective milling types.
- 63 -
ELEMENT (OUTPUT DATA) (Note 3)

Data item Meaning
T FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [1] : Used as a figure in facing
[2] : Used as an outer-perimeter figure in contouring
[3] : Used as an inner-perimeter figure in contouring or a
figure in pocketing
[4] : Used as a figure in grooving
(Input value)
H START POINT X X coordinate of the start point (Input value)
V START POINT Y Y coordinate of the start point (Input value)
B BASE POSITION Position of the machining surface (Input value)
L HEIGHT/DEPTH Height or Depth from Base position to cutting surface
(Input value)
D GROOVE WIDTH Groove width (Positive value) (Input value)
P FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [1] : The right side of an entered figure as cutting
[2] : The left side of an entered figure as cutting
(Input value)
NOTE
3 ‘OUTPUT DATA’ means the items, which are
displayed on the program window as creating
program. It can be referenced only for program
display purposes.
- 64 -
Straight line: G1201 (XY plane)

Data item Meaning
D LINE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu
indicated on a soft key.
X* END POINT X X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
Remarks1) This data may not be displayed depending
on the value entered as the direction of the
straight line.
Remarks2) Incremental programming is possible.
Y* END POINT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight line
straight line.
A* ANGLE Straight-line angle
Remarks) This data may not be displayed depending
straight line.
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : In contact with the immediately preceding
figure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
preceding figure (initial value)
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : In contact with the immediately following
figure
following figure (initial value)
ATTRIBUTE (INPUT DATA) (Note 1)

Data item Meaning
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks) The system sets the last data as an initial
value.
- 65 -
NOTE
altering.
ELEMENT & ATTRIBUTE (OUTPUT DATA) (Note 2)

Data item Meaning
H END POINT X X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
(calculation result)
V END POINT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight line
K LINE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu
(Input value)
C* END POINT X X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
(Input value)
D* END POINT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight line
(Input value)
(Input value)
L LAST CONNECTION [1] : In contact with the immediately preceding figure
[2] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding figure
(Input value)
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] : In contact with the immediately following figure
[2] : Not in contact with the immediately following figure
(Input value)
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
(Input value)
S SELECT FIG. INFO. In the case of plural intersection or contact, the operator
sets a candidate.
(Input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 66 -
Arc (CW): G1202 (XY plane)

Arc (CCW): G1203 (XY plane)

Data item Meaning
X* END POINT X X coordinate of an arc end point
Remarks) Incremental programming is possible.
Y* END POINT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point
R* RADIUS Arc radius
CX* CENTER POINT CX X coordinate of an arc center
CY* CENTER POINT CY Y coordinate of an arc center
figure
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : In contact with the immediately preceding
figure

Data item Meaning
value.
NOTE
altering.
- 67 -

Data item Meaning
H END POINT X X coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
V END PINT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
R RADIUS Arc radius (calculation result)
I CENTER POINT X X coordinate of an arc center (calculation result)
J CENTER POINT Y Y coordinate of an arc center (calculation result)
C* END POINT X X coordinate of an arc end point (input value)
D* END POINT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point (input value)
E* RADIUS Arc radius (input value)
P* CENTER POINT CX X coordinate of an arc center (input value)
Q* CENTER POINT CY Y coordinate of an arc center (input value)
[2] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding
figure
(input value)
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] : In contact with the immediately preceding figure
figure
(input value)
(Input value)
S SELECT FIG. INFO. In the case of plural intersection or contact, the
operator sets a candidate.
(Input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 68 -
Chamfering: G1204 (XY plane)

Data item Meaning
C CHAMFER Amount of chamfering (radius value, positive value)

Data item Meaning
Remarks) The system sets the last data as an initial value.
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
V END POINT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight line
C CHAMFER Amount of chamfering (input value)
(input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 69 -
NOTE
3 By setting the parameter No.14851#0=1, Corner
element between a blank element and a part
element can be created in the opposite direction.
C
C
C
C C
C
Dotted line : blank element
Normal line : part element
- 70 -
Corner rounding: G1205 (XY plane)

Data item Meaning
R CORNER RADIUS Corner rounding (radius value, positive value)

Data item Meaning
value.
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
V END PINT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
J CENTER POINT Y Y coordinate of an arc center (calculation result)
K ROTATION DIRECTION [2] : clockwise
[3] : counterclockwise
(input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 71 -
NOTE
End of arbitrary figures: G1206 (XY plane)

This block is output at the end of a series of arbitrary-figure blocks.
NOTE
A series of arbitrary figures must be enclosed
between G1200 (start point) and G1206 (end of
arbitrary figures).
- 72 -
5.3 ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE YZ PLANE
Arbitrary figures in the YZ plane can be used in the following types

of milling.
1. Facing
3. Pocketing
4. Grooving
NOTE
See Chapter 1, "Milling," in Part III for detailed
of cycle machining.
Start point: G1300 (YZ plane)

Data item Meaning
contouring
[CONCAVE] : Used as an inner-perimeter figure in
Remarks) Be sure to select [FACE] if facing is
selected.
Z START POINT Z Z coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary figure
X BASE POSITION Position of the machining surface of an arbitrary figure
- 73 -

Data item Meaning
P FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [RIGHT] : The right side of an entered figure as cutting
Contouring.
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
figure in pocketing
(Input value)
H START POINT Y Y coordinate of the start point (Input value)
V START POINT Z Z coordinate of the start point (Input value)
(Input value)
(Input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 74 -
Straight line: G1301 (YZ plane)

Data item Meaning
Y* END POINT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight line
straight line.
Z* END POINT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line
straight line.
straight line.
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : In contact with the immediately
preceding figure
figure

Data item Meaning
value.
- 75 -
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
H END POINT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight line
V END POINT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line
(Input value)
C* END POINT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight line
(Input value)
D* END POINT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line
(Input value)
(Input value)
figure
(Input value)
[2] : Not in contact with the immediately following
figure
(Input value)
(Input value)
(Input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 76 -
Arc (CW): G1302 (YZ plane)

Arc (CCW): G1303 (YZ plane)

Data item Meaning
Y* END POINT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point
Z* END POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point
CY* CENTER POINT CY Y coordinate of an arc center
CZ* CENTER POINT CZ Z coordinate of an arc center
figure
figure

Data item Meaning
value.
NOTE
altering.
- 77 -

Data item Meaning
H END POINT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
V END POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
I CENTER POINT Y Y coordinate of an arc center (calculation result)
J CENTER POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc center (calculation result)
C* END POINT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point (input value)
D* END POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point (input value)
P* CENTER POINT CY Y coordinate of an arc center (input value)
Q* CENTER POINT CZ Z coordinate of an arc center (input value)
figure
(input value)
figure
(input value)
(Input value)
(Input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 78 -
Chamfering: G1304 (YZ plane)

Data item Meaning

Data item Meaning
Remarks) The system sets the last data as an initial value.
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
H END POINT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight line
NOTE
display purposes.
- 79 -
NOTE
C
C
C
C C
C
- 80 -
Corner rounding: G1305 (YZ plane)

Data item Meaning

Data item Meaning
value.
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
H END POINT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
V END PINT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
I CENTER POINT Y Y coordinate of an arc center (calculation result)
(input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 81 -
NOTE
End of arbitrary figures: G1306 (YZ plane)

NOTE
arbitrary figures).
- 82 -
5.4 ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE POLAR COORDINATE

INTERPOLATION PLANE (XC PLANE)
The following types of milling can be specified also for the polar
coordinate interpolation plane (XC plane), and arbitrary figures in the
XC plane can be used in these milling types.
1. Facing
3. Pocketing
4. Grooving
NOTE
1 See Chapter 1, "Milling," in Part III for detailed
of cycle machining.
2 If X coordinate data for the lathe is specified using
diameters, X coordinate values specified for the XC
plane must also be diameters.
Start point: G1500 (XC plane)

Data item Meaning
contouring
selected.
C START POINT C C coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary figure
Z BASE POSITION Position of the machining surface of an arbitrary
figure
- 83 -

Data item Meaning
P FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [RIGHT] : The right side of an entered figure as
cutting
Contouring.
F FACE POSITION [+FACE] : References the figure (+end face)
[-FACE] : References the figure (-end face)
Remarks) This item is displayed when the parameter
No.27000#4=1.
Y ROTATION AXIS NAME [C] : The rotation axis is the C axis.
[A] : The rotation axis is the A axis (No.27000#1=1)
[B] : The rotation axis is the B axis (No.27000#2=1)
[E] : The rotation axis is the E axis (No.27000#3=1)
No.27000#0=1.
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
figure in pocketing
(Input value)
H START POINT X X coordinate of the start point (Input value)
V START POINT C C coordinate of the start point (Input value)
(Input value)
(Input value)
- 84 -

Data item Meaning
Y FACE POSITION [1] : References the figure (+end face)
[2] : References the figure (-end face)
No.27000#4=1.
Z ROTATION AXIS [1] : The rotation axis is the C axis.
NAME [2] : The rotation axis is the A axis (No.27000#1=1)
[3] : The rotation axis is the B axis (No.27000#2=1)
[4] : The rotation axis is the E axis (No.27000#3=1)
No.27000#0=1.
NOTE
display purposes.
- 85 -
Straight line: G1501 (XC plane)

Data item Meaning
X* END POINT X X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
straight line.
C* END POINT C C coordinate of the end point of a straight line
straight line.
straight line.
preceding figure
figure

Data item Meaning
value.
- 86 -
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
V END POINT C C coordinate of the end point of a straight line
(Input value)
(Input value)
D* END POINT C C coordinate of the end point of a straight line
(Input value)
(Input value)
figure
(Input value)
figure
(Input value)
(Input value)
(Input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 87 -
Arc (CW): G1502 (XC plane)

Arc (CCW): G1503 (XC plane)

Data item Meaning
X* END POINT X X coordinate of an arc end point
C* END POINT C C coordinate of an arc end point
CX* CENTER POINT CX X coordinate of an arc center
CC* CENTER POINT CC C coordinate of an arc center
figure
figure

Data item Meaning
value.
NOTE
altering.
- 88 -

Data item Meaning
V END POINT C C coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
J CENTER POINT C C coordinate of an arc center (calculation result)
D* END POINT C C coordinate of an arc end point (input value)
Q* CENTER POINT CC C coordinate of an arc center (input value)
figure
(input value)
figure
(input value)
(Input value)
(Input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 89 -
Chamfering: G1504 (XC plane)

Data item Meaning

Data item Meaning
value.
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
(input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 90 -
NOTE
C
C
C
C C
C
- 91 -
Corner rounding: G1505 (XC plane)

Data item Meaning

Data item Meaning
value.
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
(input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 92 -
NOTE
End of arbitrary figures: G1506 (XC plane)

NOTE
arbitrary figures).
- 93 -
5.5 ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE CYLINDRICAL SURFACE

(ZC PLANE)
The following types of milling can be specified also for the

cylindrical surface (ZC plane), and arbitrary figures in the ZC plane
can be used in these milling types.
1. Facing
3. Pocketing
4. Grooving
NOTE
See Chapter 1, "Milling," in Part III for detailed
of cycle machining.
Start point: G1600 (ZC plane)

Data item Meaning
contouring
selected.
C START POINT C C coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary figure
X BASE POSITION Position of the machining surface of an arbitrary
figure
- 94 -

Data item Meaning
P FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [RIGHT] : The right side of an entered figure as
cutting
Contouring.
Y ROTATION AXIS NAME [C] : The rotation axis is the C axis.
[A] : The rotation axis is the A axis (No.27000#1=1)
[B] : The rotation axis is the B axis (No.27000#2=1)
[E] : The rotation axis is the E axis (No.27000#3=1)
No.27000#0=1.
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
figure in pocketing
(Input value)
H START POINT Z Z coordinate of the start point (Input value)
V START POINT C C coordinate of the start point (Input value)
I START POINT (Z AXIS) Z coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
J START POINT (C AXIS) C coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
(Input value)
(Input value)
- 95 -

Data item Meaning
Y FACE POSITION [1] : References the figure (+end face)
[2] : References the figure (-end face)
No.27000#4=1.
NOTE
display purposes.
- 96 -
Straight line: G1601 (ZC plane)

Data item Meaning
straight line.
C* END POINT C C coordinate of the end point of a straight line
straight line.
straight line.
preceding figure
figure

Data item Meaning
value.
- 97 -
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
H END POINT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line
(Input value)
C* END POINT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line
(Input value)
D* END POINT C C coordinate of the end point of a straight line
(Input value)
(Input value)
figure
(Input value)
figure
(Input value)
(Input value)
(Input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 98 -
Arc (CW): G1602 (ZC plane)

Arc (CCW): G1603 (ZC plane)

Data item Meaning
C* END POINT C C coordinate of an arc end point
CC* CENTER POINT CC C coordinate of an arc center
preceding figure
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : In contact with the immediately
preceding figure

Data item Meaning
value.
NOTE
altering.
- 99 -

Data item Meaning
H END POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
I CENTER POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc center (calculation result)
C* END POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point (input value)
D* END POINT C C coordinate of an arc end point (input value)
P* CENTER POINT CZ Z coordinate of an arc center (input value)
Q* CENTER POINT CC C coordinate of an arc center (input value)
figure
(input value)
figure
(input value)
(Input value)
(Input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 100 -
Chamfering: G1604 (ZC plane)

Data item Meaning

Data item Meaning
value.
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
H END POINT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line
(input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 101 -
NOTE
C
C
C
C C
C
- 102 -
Corner rounding: G1605 (ZC plane)

Data item Meaning

Data item Meaning
value.
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
H END POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
V END PINT C C coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
I CENTER POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc center (calculation result)
(input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 103 -
NOTE
End of arbitrary figures: G1606 (ZC plane)

NOTE
arbitrary figures).
- 104 -
5.6 ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR TURNING (ZX PLANE)
Arbitrary figures in the ZX plane can be used in turning.

1. Outer surface rough/semifinish/finish turning
2. Inner surface rough/semifinish/finish turning
3. End surface rough/semifinish/finish turning
NOTE
1 See Section 2.1, "Turning," in Part III for detailed
of cycle machining.
2 When entering an arbitrary figure for turning, make
its end point coincide with its start point. To put
another way, combine parts figures with blank
figures in such a way that a closed curve is created.
Turning is carried out in this closed curve.
3 It is possible to specify "PART" and "BLANK" as
This "BLANK" can be used to enter an arbitrary
figure resembling a blank figure to be actually
machined, so any portion other than the blank
portion will not be cut. This way, optimum rough
turning can be realized.
Start point: G1450 (ZX plane)

Data item Meaning
DX START POINT DX X coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary figure
NOTE
altering.
- 105 -

Data item Meaning
H START POINT DX X coordinate of the start point (input value)
V START POINT Z Z coordinate of the start point (input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 106 -
Straight line: G1451 (ZX plane)

Data item Meaning
DX* END POINT DX X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
straight line.
straight line.
Remarks) This data may not be displayed
depending on the value entered as the
direction of the straight line.
figure
figure

Data item Meaning
value.
F* FINISH FEEDRATE Cutting feedrate for finishing
Remarks) It is possible to set the feedrate to each
block on Finishing.
- 107 -
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
(Input value)
(Input value)
D* END POINT X Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line
(Input value)
(Input value)
figure
(Input value)
figure
(Input value)
(Input value)
(Input value)
(Input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 108 -
Arc (CW): G1452 (ZX plane)

Arc (CCW): G1453 (ZX plane)

Data item Meaning
DX* END POINT DX X coordinate of an arc end point
CDX* CENTER POINT CDX X coordinate of an arc center
preceding figure
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : In contact with the immediately
following figure

Data item Meaning
value.
block on Finishing.
NOTE
altering.
- 109 -

Data item Meaning
figure
(input value)
figure
(input value)
(Input value)
(Input value)
(Input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 110 -
Chamfering: G1454 (ZX plane)

Data item Meaning

Data item Meaning
value.
block on Finishing.
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
(input value)
(Input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 111 -
NOTE
C
C
C
C C
C
- 112 -
Corner rounding: G1455 (ZX plane)

Data item Meaning

Data item Meaning
value.
block on Finishing.
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
(input value)
(Input value)
- 113 -
NOTE
display purposes.
End of arbitrary figures: G1456 (ZX plane)

NOTE
arbitrary figures).
- 114 -
DIN509 :
Pressing the [DIN509] soft key displays the sub-window. By entering
necessary data, a neck figure for DIN509 can be created.
X
w
P(z,x)
r r 15° d
DIN509F :
Pressing the [D509-F] soft key displays the sub-window. By entering
necessary data, a neck figure for DIN509-F can be created.
X
L w
8°
P(z, x)
r r 15° d
DIN76 :
Pressing the [DIN76] soft key displays the sub-window. By entering
necessary data, a neck figure for DIN76 can be created.
X
w
P(z, x)
r=0.6d 30° d
- 115 -
6.OPERATIONS IN THE MEM MODE OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
6 OPERATIONS IN THE MEM MODE
When the MEM mode is selected with the machine operator's panel,
the soft keys shown below appear on the screen of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i.
Pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or the rightmost soft key [>]
changes the page of the soft key display to the second page.
REWIND O LIST BGEDIT N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST MCHDRW SIMLAT
NC CNV WRK CO T-OFS SETING
For [SETING], [WRK CO], and [T-OFS], see Chapter 10, "SETTING
DATA," in Part II.
- 116 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 6.OPERATIONS IN THE MEM MODE
6.1 REWINDING A MACHINING PROGRAM
By pressing [REWIND], you can return to the beginning of a selected

program.
- 117 -
6.2 EDITING WITH THE MACHINING PROGRAM LIST
By pressing [OPEN], a window showing a list of registered machining

programs is displayed.
The following soft keys appear, allowing you to select machining

programs.
SEARCH SRTORD OPEN CANCEL
[SEARCH] : A window for searching programs appears. Enter the

number of the program you want to search for with
numeric keys, then press [SEARCH]. The search
window can be closed using [CANCEL].
[OPEN] : After performing the above search operation or moving
the cursor to a desired program number by using the
cursor keys ↑ and ↓, press [OPEN]. Then the program
is selected.
[CANCEL] : Close the list window.
[SRTORD] : This soft key switches the sort order for displaying
programs between ascending order and descending
order.
- 118 -
6.3 SEARHING FOR A SEQUENCE NUMBER IN A PROGRAM
When you enter the sequence number you want to search for by using
numeric keys then press [N SRCH], you can search for the block
having the sequence number.
If the sequence number is not found, a warning is displayed. It can be
released by pressing a key.
- 119 -
6.4 SELECTING A PROGRAM FOR MACHINING OPERATION
When you enter the program number you want to select by using
numeric keys then press [O SRCH], the program with the program
number is selected and displayed in the program window.
By pressing [O SRCH] without entering any key, the next program is
selected.
NOTE
If the parameter No.3203#3 is set to “1”, pressing
[O SRCH] without entering any data, the next
program is not selected.
- 120 -
6.5 CHANGING THE CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY
By pressing [ACTPOS], the current position display in the status

display window in the upper part of the screen changes in the
sequence "ACTUAL POS. (ABS)" → "ACTUAL POS.
(RELATIVE)" → "ACTUAL POS. (MACHINE)"
If the manual handwheel interrupt option function is attached, the
position display changes in the sequence "ACTUAL POS. (ABS)" →
"ACTUAL POS. (RELATIVE)" → "ACTUAL POS. (MACHINE)"
→ “HANDLE INTER.(INPUT)” → “HANDLE INTER.(OUTPUT)”
- 121 -
6.6 PRESETTING RELATIVE COORDINATES
By pressing [PRESET], a relative coordinates presetting window

appears with the following soft keys, allowing you to preset relative
coordinates.
ORIGIN ALL 0 ACTPOS ALTER CANCEL
[ORIGIN] : Set the axis selected with the cursor keys to "0." At this
time, no relative coordinates are preset.
[ALL 0] : Set all axes to "0." At this time, no relative coordinates
are preset.
Remark) You can set a desired coordinate value for an axis
selected by the cursor by entering the value you want
to preset by using numeric keys then pressing the
INPUT key. At this time, as described above, the
relative coordinates are not yet preset.
[ACTPOS] : Change the current position display in the status display
window in the upper part of the screen in the sequence
"ACTUAL POS. (ABS)" → "ACTUAL POS.
(RELATIVE)" → "ACTUAL POS. (MACHINE)."
[ALTER] : Preset the relative coordinates to coordinate values set
by the above operation. This soft key also closes the
relative coordinates presetting window.
[CANCEL] : Cancel presetting of coordinates and just close the
window.
- 122 -
6.7 DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT RESULTS
By pressing [MESLST], a window showing a list of measurement

results can be displayed. For details of this window, see "Doosan Infracore
eZ Guide i Operator’s Manual (Set-up Guidance Function)" or the
manual made by machine tool builder.
- 123 -
6.8 DISPLAYING THE MACHINING SIMULATION WINDOW
By pressing [SIMLAT], a machining simulation window can be

displayed. For machining simulation, see Chapter 9, "OPERATIONS
IN MACHINING SIMULATION," in Part II.
Press [GRPOFF] to close the machining simulation window.
- 124 -
6.9 DISPLAYING THE DRAWING-DURING-MACHINING

WINDOW
By pressing [MCHDRW], the drawing-during-machining window can

be displayed. For details of drawing during machining, see II.9,
"OPERATIONS IN MACHINING SIMULATION".
Press [GRPOFF] to close the drawing-during-machining window.
- 125 -
6.10 BG EDITING
By pressing [BGEDIT], the background editing function can be used.

For details of the background editing function, see II.11,
"OPERATIONS IN BACKGROUND EDITING".
- 126 -
6.11 NC PROGRAM CONVERSION
NC CNV WK SET T-OFS SETING
By pressing [NC CNV], the NC program conversion function can be

used. For details of the NC program conversion function, see II.12,
"OPERATIONS WITH THE NC PROGRAM CONVERSION
FUNCTION".
- 127 -
6.12 NEXT-BLOCK DISPLAY FUNCTION
During simulation execution or operation in the MEMORY mode or

MDI mode, the travel distance data of the block to be executed next is
displayed.
NOTE
1 During actual machining, the travel distance of the
actually executed block is displayed in the “DIST
TO GO” columns, but during machining simulation,
0 value is displayed always in those columns.
2 In order to display the travel distance data of the
block to be executed next during single block
operation, set the parameter No.3106#2 to “1”.
• In case of machining simulation nor path drawing during actual

machining is not executed
The travel distance data of the next block is automatically
displayed.
- 128 -
• In case of machining simulation or path drawing during actual

machining is executed
Usually, the travel distance of the next block is not displayed.
Pressing [CHGDSP] erases the display of spindle and actual

feedrate information and displays the travel distance data of the
next block. Pressing [CHGDSP] again returns the screen to the
display of spindle and actual feedrate information.
- 129 -
7.OPERATIONS IN THE MDI MODE OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
7 OPERATIONS IN THE MDI MODE
When the MDI mode is selected with the machine operator's panel,
the soft keys shown below appear on the screen of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i.
Pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or the rightmost soft key [>]
changes the page of the soft key display to the second and third pages
sequentially.
REWIND LINENO ACTPOS PRESET
REWIND SRCH↑ SRCH↓ CHSIZE COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PASTE
WRK CO OFFSET SETING
For soft keys [ACTPOS] and [PRESET] on the first page, see the
following sections:

- 130 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 7.OPERATIONS IN THE MDI MODE
The soft keys on the second and third pages are used for editing
machining programs entered by MDI. For details on these soft keys,
see the following sections:
3.1 MACHINING PROGRAM WINDOW AND EDITING

3.5 SEARCH (FORWARD AND BACKWARD)
3.6 CUT
3.7 COPY
3.8 PASTE
3.9 DELETION
3.10 KEY-IN PASTE
For [SETING], see Chapter 10, "SETTING DATA," in Part II.
- 131 -
8.OPERATIONS IN THE MANUAL MODE (HANDLE AND JOG) OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
8 OPERATIONS IN THE MANUAL MODE

(HANDLE AND JOG)
When the handle or jog mode is selected with the machine operator's
panel, the following soft keys appear on the screen of Doosan Infracore
eZ Guide i:
MESURE MESLST ACTPOS PRESET SETING
NOTE
1 [MESURE] and [MESLST] are displayed only when
the Set-up guidance optional function is attached.
By pressing [MESURE], a window for set-up guidance functions that

are performed in the manual mode is displayed. By pressing
[MESLST], a window showing a list of measurement results is
displayed. For details of these windows, see "Set-up Guidance" in
Part IV.
For soft keys [ACTPOS] and [PRESET], see the following sections:

- 132 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 9.OPERATIONS IN MACHINING SIMULATION
9 OPERATIONS IN MACHINING
SIMULATION
REWIND O LIST BGEDIT N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST MCHDR SIMLAT
W
Pressing [MCHDRW] with the MEM mode selected on the machine

operator's panel selects the mode for drawing during machining (tool
path).
Pressing [SIMLAT] selects the mode for machining simulation

(animated), and the following soft-keys are displayed.
REWIND START PROCES SINGLE STOP INIT CUTDSP INTERF TLPATH GRPOFF
Pressing [TLPATH] selects the mode for machining simulation (tool

path), and the following soft-keys are displayed.
REWIND START PROCES SINGLE STOP DISP NODISP CLEAR ANIME GRPOFF
- 133 -
9.OPERATIONS IN MACHINING SIMULATION OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
Pressing [ANIME] selects the mode for machining simulation

(animated) again.
Pressing [AGRPOFF] in the machining simulation, animation and

tool path drawing, or drawing during machining mode, the screen gets
back to the memory mode screen.
- 134 -
9.1 DRAWING DURING MACHINING (TOOL PATH)
While a machining operation is being performed on the machine, the

tool path can be drawn. This function is available also during machine
lock and dry run operation.
NOTE
1 To perform drawing during machining, open the
window for drawing during machining by pressing
[GRP ON] before starting machining operation.
2 If a coordinate system change is specified in the
program during drawing, drawing is performed
without changing the coordinate system.
3 In the drawing during machining, when the work-
piece specifying block is executed, form of a work-
piece is drawn in form of wire frame. Drawing color
of the work-piece can be specified by the
parameter No.14773.
4 When a simulation window is opened, a blank
figure drawing at the last drawing is displayed.
5 Tool path drawing with a multi-path system is
performed only at the selected path for displaying.
And a simulation window is initialized if the selected
path for displaying is changed. So if the selected
path for displaying is changed in displaying a free
blank figure, the drawing is initialized for a column
figure which encloses it.
When drawing during machining (tool path) is selected, the soft keys
shown below appear. Pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or the
rightmost soft key [>] changes the page of the soft key display to the
second or third page.
- 135 -
1st page soft-keys :

REWIND START PROCES SINGLE STOP INIT CUT DSP INTERF TLPATH GRPOFF
2nd page soft-keys :

LARGE SMALL AUTO ROTATE ←MOVE MOVE→ ↑MOVE ↓MOVE CENTER
3rd page soft-keys :

DISP NODISP CLEAR WK SET T-OFS SETING
4th page soft-keys :

REWIND O LIST CHGDSP N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST GRPOFF
- 136 -
9.1.1 Program Selection Operation and Other Operations in

Drawing during Machining
REWIND O LIST CHGDSP N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST GRPOFF
4th page Soft keys are used for operations such as selection of a
program. These key operations are the same as the operations in the
MEM mode, so see the sections listed below.
To close the window for drawing during machining and stop the mode
for drawing during machining, press [GRPOFF].

6.3 SEARCHING FOR A SEQUENCE NUMBER IN A PROGRAM
9.1.2 Selecting whether to Display the Tool Path or Not in Drawing

during Machining
DISP NODISP CLEAR WK SET T-OFS SETING
3rd page soft keys mainly allow you to select whether to display the
tool path or not.
[NODISP] : As soon as this soft key is pressed, drawing of the tool

path is stopped. The tool path is not drawn until [DISP]
is pressed next.
[DISP] : As soon as this soft key is pressed, drawing of the tool
path is started.
Remark) Only necessary tool path portions can be drawn by
using [DISP] and [NODISP].
[CLEAR] : Erase the tool path drawn so far. Immediately after this
soft key is pressed, tool path drawing is displayed.
- 137 -
9.1.3 Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations in Drawing during

Machining
2nd soft keys allow you to perform scaling and movement of a tool
path drawing as well as selection of a drawing coordinate system.
NOTE
The operations explained below must be performed
before tool path drawing is started.
1) Scaling and movement

[LARGR] : Increase the drawing magnification.
[SMALL] : Decrease the drawing magnification
[AUTO] : When the blank form block for animation has been
input to the machining program, perform
automatic scaling so that the blank figure is fit in
the window.
NOTE
If a blank form for animation has been entered,
automatic scaling is performed when the
corresponding block is executed for the first
time.
[←MOVE] : Move the viewpoint leftward. As a result, the tool

path drawn moves rightward.
[MOVE→] : Move the viewpoint leftward. As a result, the tool
path drawn moves leftward.
[↑MOVE] : Move the viewpoint upward. As a result, the tool
path drawn moves downward.
[↓MOVE] : Move the viewpoint downward. As a result, the
tool path drawn moves upward.
[CENTER] : Set the center of the tool path to the center of the
window.
- 138 -
2) Selecting a drawing coordinate system
[ROTATE] : Display the soft keys shown below for selecting

the drawing coordinate system. A window for
describing drawing coordinate systems is also
displayed.
XY ZY YZ XZ ZX ISO XY ISO XY ISO YZ OK CANCEL
↑ ↓ ← → OK CANCEL
[XY] : Select the XY plane.

[ZY] : Select the ZY plane.
[YZ] : Select the YZ plane.
[XZ] : Select the XZ plane.
[ZX] : Select the ZX plane.
[ISO XY] : Select an equiangular coordinate system with the
positive direction of the Z-axis facing up.
[ISO XY] : Select an equiangular coordinate system with the
positive direction of the Z-axis facing up. But, the
view point is opposed to the above one.
[ISO YZ] : Select an equiangular coordinate system with the
positive direction of the X-axis facing up.
[OK] : Perform drawing in the coordinate system selected
by one of the above soft keys.
[CANCEL] : Cancel the coordinate system selected by one of
the above soft keys and use the original coordinate
system for drawing.
[↑] : Make a counterclockwise rotation by selecting the
right direction viewed when you face the screen as
the center axis.
- 139 -
[↓] : Make a clockwise rotation by selecting the right

direction viewed when you face the screen as the
center axis.
[←] : Make a counterclockwise rotation by selecting the
upward direction viewed when you face the screen
as the center axis.
[→] : Make a clockwise rotation by selecting the upward
direction viewed when you face the screen as the
center axis.
[ ] : Make a clockwise rotation by selecting the
direction toward you viewed when you face the
screen as the center axis.
[ ] : Make a counterclockwise rotation by selecting the
direction toward you viewed when you face the
screen as the center axis.
NOTE
A rotation is made according to the unit specified in
parameter No. 14716.
- 140 -
9.2 MACHINING SIMULATION (TOOL PATH)
The path of the tool in a machining program can be drawn without

performing actual machining operation on the machine (machining
simulation).
NOTE
1 To perform machining simulation, select the MEM
mode with the mode switch on the machine
operator's panel.
program during simulation, simulation is performed
3 In the drawing during machining, when the work-
piece specifying block is executed, form of a work-
piece is drawn in form of wire frame. Drawing color
of the work-piece can be specified by the
parameter No.14773.
4 When a simulation window is opened, a blank
figure drawing at the last drawing is displayed.
5 Tool path drawing with a multi-path system is
performed only at the selected path for displaying.
And a simulation window is initialized if the selected
path for displaying is changed. So if the selected
path for displaying is changed in displaying a free
blank figure, the drawing is initialized for a column
figure which encloses it.
When machining simulation (tool path) is selected, the soft keys

- 141 -



WK SET T-OFS SETING

REWIND O-LIST CHGDSP N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST
- 142 -

Machining Simulation (Tool Path)
WK SET T-OFS SETING
REWIND O-LIST CHGDSP N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST
4th page soft keys are used for operations such as selection of a
To close the machining simulation (tool path) window and stop the
drawing operation of machining simulation, press [GRPOFF].

9.2.2 Execution Operations in Machining Simulation (Tool Path)
On the 1st page soft key, you can perform operations related to
execution in machining simulation (tool path).
[REWIND] : Return to the beginning of the machining program

selected for machining simulation.
[START] : Start machining simulation for the currently selected
machining program.
[PAUSE] : Stop machining simulation temporarily.
[PROCESE]: Stop machining simulation at M01.
Remark) Displaying either [PAUSE] or [PROCES] can be
selected by the parameter No.27310#0.
[SINGLE] : Cause a single-block stop when machining simulation
is performed in the continuous mode. When machining
simulation is in the stopped state, this soft key starts
machining simulation in the single-block mode.
[STOP] : End machining simulation.
- 143 -
[NODISP] : From the block immediately after this soft key is

pressed, suppress tool path drawing. Tool path drawing
is not performed until [DISP] is pressed next.
[DISP] : From the block immediately after this soft key is
pressed, start drawing of the tool path.
Remark) Only necessary tool path portions can be drawn by
using [DISP] and [NODISP].
[CLEAR] : Erase the tool path drawn so far. Tool path drawing
immediately after this soft key is pressed is displayed.
NOTE
By setting bit 0 (PRC) of parameter No. 27310 to 1,
[PAUSE] can be changed to [PROCES] (for
temporarily stopping machining simulation at a
block specifying M01;).
- 144 -
9.2.3 Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations in Machining

Simulation (Tool Path)
2nd page soft keys allow you to perform scaling and movement for
machining simulation (tool path) as well as selection of a drawing
coordinate system. These operations are the same as those in drawing
during machining. For details, see Subsection 9.1.3.
NOTE
1 Operations such as scaling, movement, and
selection of a drawing coordinate system must be
performed before machining simulation (tool path)
is started.
- 145 -
9.3 MACHINING SIMULATION (ANIMATED)
Animated simulation of a machining operation by a machining

program can be performed without performing actual machining
operation on the machine.
NOTE
1 To perform machining simulation, select the MEM
mode with the mode switch on the machine
operator's panel.
When machining simulation (animated) is selected, the soft keys


REWIND START PROCES SINGLE STOP INIT CUT DSP INTERF TLPATH GRPOFF

LARGE SMALL AUTO REVERS ROTATE ←MOVE MOVE→ ↑MOVE ↓MOVE CENTER

WK SET T-OFS SETING
- 146 -

REWIND O LIST CHGDSP N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST
- 147 -

Machining Simulation (Animated)
4th page soft keys are used for operations such as selection of a
To close the machining simulation (animated) window and stop the
drawing operation of machining simulation, press [GRPOFF].

- 148 -
9.3.2 Execution Operations in Machining Simulation (Animated)
On the 1st page soft keys, you can perform operations related to
execution in machining simulation (animated). The operations of
[REWIND], [START], [PAUSE], [SINGLE], and [STOP] are the
same as the operations in machining simulation (tool path). For
details, see Subsection 9.2.3.
[INIT] : Initialize the machined blank used for animation.

[CUT DSP] : Lets you switch between 1/4 work-piece and entire
periphery for rod blanks and drilled rod blanks.
Before starting animated simulation, be sure to switch
if necessary.
[INTERF] : Lets you select whether to make an interference check
during animated simulation. If an interference check is
enabled, a warning is displayed when the tool tip
collides with a work-piece during rapid traverse, and
the portion collided with the tool tip is displayed in the
same color as that of the tool.
NOTE
With bit 0 (ITF) of parameter No. 27311, you can
select continued operation (ITF = 0) or temporary
stop (ITF = 1) if tool interferes with the work-piece
during animation.
9.3.3 Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations in Machining

Simulation (Animated)
The soft keys on the 2nd page allow you to perform scaling and
movement for machining simulation (animated) as well as selection of
a drawing coordinate system. These operations are the same as those
in drawing during machining. For details, see Subsection 9.1.3.
[REVERS] : Change the viewpoint of the blank in animation to the

exactly opposite position. You can use this soft key
when, during machining with a sub-spindle or
machining with the C-axis rotated, for example, you
want to see animation from the opposite side.
NOTE
1 Although [REVERS] may be used even during
machining simulation, switching will sometimes be
delayed depending on the CNC status.
2 Operations such as scaling, movement, and
selection of a drawing coordinate system must be
performed before machining simulation (tool path)
is started.
- 149 -
9.4 CHANGING WORK COORDINATE DURING MACHINING

SIMULATION (ANIMATION, TOOL PATH DRAWING)
If a coordinate system is changed in the part program during

machining simulation, animation or tool path drawing, the drawing is
performed on the changed coordinate system.
But in the path drawing during machining, the drawing is performed
Drawing of Machining Simulation with this function is performed on
the standard coordinate system for drawing which is initialized by
G1900,G1901,G1902 (drawing definition of blank form block) or
G1998(Spindle definition block for drawing). Work rotated axis
(usually C-axis) is the rotated axis around Z-axis of the standard
coordinate system. The standard coordinate system is by drawing
definition of blank form block.
NOTE
1 This function is not availabel in drawing during
machining.
2 Even if the coordinate system is changed in
machining simulation, the axis drawing of
coordinate system is not changed.
3 Drawing of machining simulation is performed on
the premise that the top point of tool (or the center
point of tool diameter) is on a commanded point at
the workpiece coordinate system. So, there are
some case where machining simulation is different
from the movement of real machining before a
position command after slanting a tool.
4 Rotary axis about a blank, C-axis, is one about Z
axis of the basic three axis. So, in the case with
rotary axis about a blank, a “WORK ORIGIN” point
of rectangular solid blank must be set on the rotary
axis by a blank form block. Rotary axis about a
column blank is one about a center point of the
diameter.
5 If 3-D cordinate conversion command or slanted
axis’s machining command are performed in
slanting a tool, the slanted angle of slanted axis is
made ineffective and a tool is drawn on the slant of
the workpiece coordinate system changed by 3-D
cordinate conversion command or slanted axis’s
machining command.
6 On a blank form command or a spindle selection
command, drawing of machining simulation is
performed as a coordinate system set by the
command is same as the continuous-state
workpiece coordinate system.
- 150 -
NOTE
7 If drawing of machining simulation is performed
from an intermidiate point of the program, it is
performed as the continuous-state workpiece
coordinate system is same as one of the last
simulation.
8 Drawing of machining simulation is performed on
the premise that the top point of tool (or the center
point of tool diameter) is on a commanded point at
the workpiece coordinate system. So, it is not
performed correctly if a top point of tool is not on a
commanded position.
9 Rotary C-axis, rotary axis set by parameter
No.14717, always rotates about a blank. And in the
case of a rectangular solid blank, rotary C-axis
rotates about Z-axis on a “WORK ORIGIN” point.
10 Tool drawing is not slant by the rotate angle in
drawing of machining simulation of polar coordinate
interporlation.
In the case of multi-paths T system, G1998(Spindle definition block

for drawing) and G1992 (Top of process definition) are as follows.
1) Parameter No.27311#1(ACD)=1
- Spindle at which animated simulation is performed is defined
only by G1998 command.
- Spindle at which animated simulation is performed is the last
commanded by G1998 command at one of paths.
- If Spindle of G1998 or G1992 commanded at a path is same
as the last commanded by G1998 command, animated
simulation is performed at the path.
2) Parameter No.27311#1(ACD)=0
- Spindle at which animated simulation is performed is defined
only by G1998 or G1992 commands.
- Spindle at which animated simulation is performed is the last
commanded by G1998 or G1992 commands at one of paths.
- If Spindle of G1998 or G1992 commanded at a path is same
as the last commanded by G1998 or G1992 commands,
animated simulation is performed at the path.
- 151 -
9.5 SETTING OF DATA FOR ANIMATION
When animation can be performed, a blank figure and tool figure

must be set. Such animation data must be set in the DRAWING
DEFINITION block, which is to be entered in a machining program.
To display the window for entering DRAWING DEFINITION data,
press [GRPDEF] in the soft key menu for editing machining
programs.
- 152 -
DRAWING DEFINITION
G1902 Rectangular solid
Blank form
G1900 Column
block
G1901 Column with a hole
G1970 Start point
G1971 Line
G1972 Arc (CW)
Arbitrary blank
G1973 Arc (CCW)
figure block
G1974 Chamfering
G1975 Corner rounding
G1976 End
G1910 General-purpose tool (turning)
G1911 Threading tool (turning)
G1912 Grooving tool (turning)
G1913 Round-nose tool (turning)
G1914 Point nose straight tool (turning)
G1921 Drill (turning, milling)
Tool definition
G1931 Counter sink tool (milling)
block
G1932 Flat end mill (milling)
G1933 Ball end mill (milling)
G1922 Tap (turning, milling)
G1923 Reamer (turning, milling)
G1924 Boring tool (turning, milling)
G1930 Face mill (milling)
Spindle
G1998 Spindle selection
selection block
NOTE
1 A tool figure during animation is drawn by a tool
definition block.
2 A blank is initialized by a blank figure block.
3 When you use ‘Tool Data Base Function’, you do
not need to specify ‘Tool Definition Block’.
- 153 -
Blank form block (rectangular solid): G1902
WORK
Data item Meaning
B WIDTH Width of the rectangular solid blank. Length in the X-
axis direction (positive value)
D DEPTH Depth of the rectangular solid blank. Length in the Y-
H HEIGHT Height of the rectangular solid blank. Length in the Z-
I WORK ORIGIN X Distance in the X-axis direction from the lower left
corner of the rectangular solid to workpiece origin
(positive or negative value)
J WORK ORIGIN Y Distance in the Y-axis direction from the lower left
K WORK ORIGIN Z Distance in the Z-axis direction from the lower left
- 154 -
Blank form block (column): G1900
WORK
Data item Meaning
B DIAMETER Diameter of the column blank (positive value)
L LENGTH Length of the column blank (positive value)
K WORK ORIGIN Z Cutting allowance of the end face of the blank (Z-
axis distance between the end face and workpiece
origin) (positive value)
W WORK ORIGIN Z (SPN 2) Cutting allowance of the back end face of the blank
(Z-axis distance between the back end face and
workpiece origin) (positive value)
NOTE
The input item of “WORK ORIGIN Z(SPN 2) (W)“ is
prepared for a machine with a subspindle, and is
displayed when the parameter No.14702 #1 = 1.
- 155 -
Blank form block (column with a hole): G1901
WORK
Data item Meaning
B DIAMETER Diameter of the column blank (positive value)
E INNER DIAMETER Inner diameter of the column blank (positive value)
L LENGTH Length of the column blank (positive value)
K WORK ORIGIN Z Cutting allowance of the end face of the blank (Z-
axis distance between the end face and workpiece
origin) (positive value)
W WORK ORIGIN Z (SPN 2) Cutting allowance of the back end face of the blank
(Z-axis distance between the back end face and
workpiece origin) (positive value)
NOTE
The input item of “WORK ORIGIN Z (SPN 2) (W)”
is prepared for a machine with a subspindle, and is
displayed when the parameter No.14702#1 = 1.
- 156 -
Arbitrary blank figure block (start point): G1970
ELEMENT (INPUT DATA) (Note 1, 2)

Data item Meaning
DX START POINT DX X coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary figure
(positive value)
W WORK ORIGIN Z Cutting allowance of a blank rear end face (distance
(SPN 2) between the rear end face and workpiece origin in the Z-
axis direction) (positive value)
NOTE
altering.
2 The input item of “WORK ORIGIN Z (SPN 2) (W)”
is prepared for a machine with a subspindle, and is
displayed when the parameter No.14702 #1 = 1.
3 Figure input is performed based on the +X-side
cross section of the ZX plane of a round rod.

Data item Meaning
H START POINT DX X coordinate of the start point (input value)
V START POINT Z Z coordinate of the start point (input value)
W WORK ORIGIN Z (SPN Cutting allowance of a blank rear end face
2) (input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 157 -
Arbitrary blank figure block (line): G1971

Data item Meaning
D LINE DIRECTION Select a line direction from the displayed soft key
menu.
DX END POINT DX X coordinate of a line end point
Remark) This item may not be displayed,
depending on the input line direction
value.
Z END POINT Z Z coordinate of a line end point
value.
A ANGLE Line angle
value.
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : Contacts the immediately preceding
figure.
[NOTHING] : Does not contact the immediately
preceding figure. (initial value)
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : Contacts the next figure.
[NOTHING] : Does not contact the next figure.
(initial value)
NOTE
altering.
- 158 -

Data item Meaning
(Input value)
(Input value)
D* END POINT X Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line
(Input value)
(Input value)
figure
(Input value)
figure
(Input value)
(Input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 159 -
Arbitrary blank figure block (arc(CW)): G1972

Arbitrary blank figure block (arc(CCW)): G1973

Data item Meaning
DX END POINT DX X coordinate of an arc end point
Z END POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point
R RADIUS Radius of an arc
CDX CENTER POINT CDX X coordinate of an arc center
CZ CENTER POINT CZ Z coordinate of an arc center
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : Contacts the immediately preceding
figure.
[NOTHING] : Does not contact the immediately
preceding figure. (initial value)
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : Contacts the next figure.
[NOTHING] : Does not contact the next figure.
(initial value)
NOTE
altering.
- 160 -

Data item Meaning
figure
(input value)
figure
(input value)
(Input value)
NOTE
display purposes.
- 161 -
Arbitrary blank figure block (chamfering): G1974

Data item Meaning
C CHAMFER Chamfer (radius value, positive value)
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
NOTE
display purposes.
- 162 -
Arbitrary blank figure block (corner rounding): G1975

Data item Meaning
R CORNER RADIUS Corner R radius (radius value, positive value)
NOTE
altering.

Data item Meaning
NOTE
display purposes.
Arbitrary blank figure block (end) : G1976

This block is output at the end of a series of arbitrary figure blocks.
- 163 -
Tool definition block (general tool): G1910
TOOL
Data item Meaning
Q SETTING Tool installation direction. Select the number of an
installation method from the illustration.
Remark) To be selected visually for both vertical and
horizontal lathes.
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Angle of the cutting edge (positive value)
Remark) Even when the same tool is used, the
location of the cutting edge angle varies with
the cutting direction (for example, outer
surface machining and end facing).
B NOSE ANGLE Angle of the tool nose (positive value)
Remark) Generally, the nose angle remains
unchanged even when the cutting direction
changes.
C TIP LENGTH Length of the tool nose portion that can actually cut
(positive value)
R NOSE RADIUS Radius of the tool nose (positive value)
E IMAGINARY TOOL Imaginary tool nose position. Select a number from the
NOSE menu indicated in the illustration.
horizontal lathes.
F TIP POSITION [FRONT] : Display the tip in front of the holder. (tool
for forward spindle rotation)
[REAR] : Display the tip in the rear of the holder.
(tool for reverse spindle rotation)
HOLDER
Data item Meaning
L* HOLDER LENGTH Length of the holder (positive value)
W* HOLDER WIDTH Width of the holder (positive value)
I* HOLDER LENGTH 2 When the tip is installed in the direction opposite to the
holder installation direction, the distance between the
longitudinal end of the holder and tip center (positive
value)
J* HOLDER WIDTH 2 When the tip is installed in the direction opposite to the
holder installation direction, the distance between the
lateral end of the holder and tip center (positive value)
- 164 -
Tool definition block (thread tool): G1911
TOOL
Data item Meaning
Remark) To be selected visually for both vertical
and horizontal lathes.
A TIP WIDTH Tool tip width
E IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position. Select a number from
the menu indicated in the illustration.
HOLDER
Data item Meaning
- 165 -
Tool definition block (grooving tool): G1912
TOOL
Data item Meaning
C TIP WIDTH Tip width of the grooving tool (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH Length of the cutting portion of the grooving tool
(positive value)
HOLDER
Data item Meaning
- 166 -
Tool definition block (round tool): G1913
TOOL
Data item Meaning
H TIP LENGTH Length of the cutting portion of the round-nose tool
(positive value)
HOLDER
Data item Meaning
- 167 -
Tool definition block (straight tool): G1914
TOOL
Data item Meaning
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Angle of the cutting edge (positive value)
C TIP LENGTH Length of the tool nose portion that can actually cut
(positive value)
HOLDER
Data item Meaning
I* HOLDER LENGTH 2 When the tip is installed in the direction opposite to
the holder installation direction, the distance
between the longitudinal end of the holder and tip
center (positive value)
J* HOLDER WIDTH 2 When the tip is installed in the direction opposite to
the holder installation direction, the distance
between the lateral end of the holder and tip center
(positive value)
- 168 -
Tool definition block (drill): G1921
TOOL
Data item Meaning
horizontal lathes.
D TOOL DIAMETER Drill diameter (positive value)
B NOSE ANGLE Drill nose angle (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH Drill length (positive value)
- 169 -
Tool definition block (counter sink tool): G1931
TOOL
Data item Meaning
horizontal lathes.
D BOTTOM DIAMETER Diameter of the end of the counter sink tool end
(positive value)
E CUTER DIAMETER Diameter of the counter sink tool (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH Length of the cutting portion of the counter sink tool
(tool axis direction, positive value)
B CUTTER LENGTH Cutter length of the counter sink tool (tool axis
direction, positive value)
L SHANK LENGTH Entire length of the counter sink tool (positive value)
W SHANK DIAMETER Diameter of the shank of the counter sink tool (positive
value)
- 170 -
Tool definition block (flat end mill): G1932
TOOL
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER End mill diameter (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH End mill tool length (positive value)
Tool definition block (ball end mill): G1933
TOOL
Data item Meaning
H TIP LENGTH End mill tool length (positive value)
- 171 -
Tool definition block (tap): G1922
TOOL
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER Tap diameter (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH Tap length (positive value)
Tool definition block (reamer): G1923
TOOL
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER Reamer diameter (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH Reamer length (positive value)
- 172 -
Tool definition block (boring tool): G1924
TOOL
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER Boring tool diameter (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH Boring tool length (positive value)
Tool definition block (face mill): G1930
TOOL
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER Face mill diameter (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH Face mill length (positive value)
- 173 -
Spindle selection block: G1998
SEL. SPIND.
Data item Meaning
S SPINDLE NUMBER Spindle number of a subspindle (positive number)
Remark) Enter 2 when the subspindle has the
spindle number 2. Enter 3 when the
subspindle has the spindle number 3.
NOTE
The menu above is prepared for a machine with a
subspindle, and is displayed when bit 1 of
parameter No. 14702 = 1.
- 174 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 10.SETTING DATA
10 SETTING DATA
<1> BASIC
1. WORK COORDINATE DATA
2. TOOL ODFFSET DATA
3. FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING
4. FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR TURNING
5. SETTING OF OFFSET NO. AND TOOL NO.
6. TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA
7. TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA
Remark) For items 5, 6, and 7, see the description of "V. Tool
Management Function" .
<2> MEASURE COND

1. SETTING
<3> CALIBRATION
1. SETTING
Remark) For <2> and <3>, refer to "Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Set-up Guidance Function."
NOTE
The menu mentioned above shows only items that
are required depending on the provided options
and the machine type; all the items above are not
indicated.
For details, refer to the relevant manual issued by
the machine tool builder.
- 175 -
10.SETTING DATA OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
10.1 SETTING THE WORK COORDINATE DATA
[WK SET] to open the work coordinate data window can be displayed
on all mode such as MEM, EDIT and manual mode.
times displays the soft-keys including [WK SET]
Example of MEM mode soft-keys)
Pressing [WK SET] displays the work coordinate data window.
For compound machine tools, the work coordinate setting windows

for the T mode and M mode can be selected with corresponding tabs.
For lathes, a window for setting the work zero point offset data and
work coordinate shift data is displayed.
For machining centers, a window for setting the work zero point
offset is displayed.
(Workpiece origin offset window for milling)
- 176 -
(Workpiece origin offset window for turning)
(Workpiece shift offset window for turning)
The data items to be set and displayed are common to the

corresponding data items of the CNC. So, for details, refer to the
operator's manual of the CNC.
- 177 -
10.1.1 [MEASUR] Soft Key
ACTPOS MEASUR +INPUT CHCURS NO.SRH CLOSE
By pressing [MEASUR], the calculations below can be made.

Current machine coordinate value - Target value of work
coordinate

Current absolute coordinate value + Current setting - Target
value of work coordinate
- 178 -
(Work coordinate system shift amount with the T series)

Current setting - Current value of absolute coordinate + Target
value of work coordinate
- 179 -
10.1.2 [+INPUT] Soft Key
ACTPOS MEASUR +INPUT CHCURS NO.SRH CLOSE
By pressing the [+INPUT], "current value + offset value" can be

calculated.
- 180 -
(Work coordinate system shift amount with the T series)
- 181 -
10.2 SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA
[T-OFS] to open the tool offset data window can be displayed on all
mode such as MEM, EDIT and manual mode.
times displays the soft-keys including [T-OFS]
Pressing [T-OFS] displays the tool offset data window.
(M series)
(T series)
- 182 -
For compound machine tools, the following data items are displayed
for the T mode:
<1> T: GEOMETRY OFFSET

<2> T: WEAR OFFSET
<3> T: GEOMETRY TOOL TYPE OFFSET
<4> T: GEOMETRY WEAR TYPE OFFSET
The following data items are displayed for the M mode:
<5> M: TOOL OFFSET (TOOL LENGTH COMP. / CUTTER

COMPENSATION)
<6> M: TOOL TYPE OFFSET (TOOL LENGTH COMP. / CUTTER
COMPENSATION)
Data for each mode can be selected with a corresponding tab.
For lathes, data items <1> to <4> are displayed. For machining
centers, data items <5> and <6> are displayed.
The data to be set and displayed in <1>, <2>, and <5> is common to
the corresponding data in the CNC. For details, refer to the operator's
manual of the CNC.
For data items <3>, <4>, and <6>, which are related to the tool
management function, see the description of "V. Tool Management
Function".
- 183 -
10.2.1 [MEASUR] Soft Key
ACTPOS MEASUR +INPUT INP.C. CHCURS NO.SRH CLOSE
By pressing [MEASUR], "Current machine coordinate value - Target

value of work coordinate” can be calculated.
With the [WEAR OFFSET] tab usable when tool geometry/wear
compensation option is specified, "Current machine coordinate value
- Current geometry offset value - Target work coordinate value" can
be calculated.
[MEASUR] can be used only on T series
- 184 -
10.2.2 [+INPUT] Soft Key
By pressing the [+INPUT] soft key, "Current value + Offset value"

can be calculated.
(M series)
(T series)
- 185 -
10.2.3 [INP.C.] Soft Key
By pressing the [INP.C.] soft key, "Relative coordinate value" can be

entered to the offset value directly.
(M series)
(T series)
- 186 -
10.3 REGISTERING FIXED FORM SENTENCES
[SETING] to open the setting window can be displayed on all mode

such as MEM, EDIT and manual mode.
times displays the soft-keys including [SETING]

Pressing [SETING] displays the window of setting data.
NOTE
1 On the T series CNC, the “REGISTER FIXED
FORM SENTENCE” menu for milling is displayed
only when the milling cycle optional function is
attached. The menu for turning is always displayed.
2 On the M series CNC, the REGISTER FIXED
FORM SENTENCE” menu for turning is displayed
only when the turning cycle optional function is
attached. The menu for milling is always displayed.
After selecting the menu of “REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE

FOR MILLING” by placing the cursor, pressing [SELECT] displays
the window of data setting.
By similar operations, the window for turning can be displayed.
- 187 -
With "FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING," which is called

by [FIXFRM] displayed together with the milling menu, you can
modify the contents of a selected fixed form sentence or add a new
sentence.
Selecting “FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR TUNING” displays the

following screen.
NOTE
1 The fixed form sentence menu displayed in the tab
of “FORM1” has same contents with the one
displayed in the “START” menu. Into detail, refer to
the II 4.1 “ENTERING THE START COMMAND”.
2 The fixed form sentence menu displayed in the tab
of “FORM5” has same contents with the one
displayed in the “END” menu. Into detail, refer to
the II 4.8 “ENTERING THE END COMMAND”.
- 188 -
10.3.1 Registering a New Fixed Form Sentence
When the REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE MILLING /

TURNING window is displayed on a screen, the following soft-keys
are displayed.
NEW ALTER DELETE STAND. TO MNU
By pressing [NEW], a window for registering a new fixed form

sentence appears. At the same time, the following soft keys appear:
COPY PASTE INSERT ADD CANCEL
Position the cursor at the "REGISTERED NAME" item, from the

MDI keyboard enter the name of the fixed form sentence you want to
register, then press the INPUT key to input the name.
Then, position the cursor at the "REGISTERED SENTENCE" item,
enter a fixed form sentence from the MDI keyboard, press the INPUT
key, then press [INSERT] or [ADD]. This can register the new fixed
form sentence.
[COPY] : Select all registered names or fixed form sentences and

copy them to the clipboard.
[PASTE] : Paste the clip board contents. You can copy a part of a
machining program being edited to the clipboard in
advance, then you can use it later to, for example, copy
it in "REGISTERED SENTENCE."
[INSERT] : Add the name of the new fixed form sentence to be
registered to a location immediately before the item
positioned by the cursor when [NEW] is pressed. The
menu numbers of the subsequent fixed form sentences
are all incremented by one.
- 189 -
[ADD] : Add the name of the new fixed form sentence to be

registered to the end of the menu already registered.
[CANCEL] : Cancel a registration operation.
NOTE
1 10 fixed form sentence in maximum can be
registered to each tab, FORM1~5.
2 128 characters in maximum can be registered to
each fixed form sentence.
- 190 -
10.3.2 Modifying a Fixed Form Sentence
Position the cursor to the name of the fixed form sentence you want to
modify, and press [ALTER]. A window for modifying a fixed form
sentence then appears.
When the above window is displayed, the following soft keys appear:
COPY PASTE ALTER CANCEL
In the "REGISTERED NAME" and "REGISTERED SENTENCE"

items, the contents of the selected fixed form sentence are displayed.
Select an item by using the ↑ and ↓ cursor keys, select the part you
want to modify by using the ← and → cursor keys, then enter a new
character string from the MDI keyboard. This character string is
inserted immediately before the cursor position.
With the CAN key, you can delete the previous character string one
character at a time.
In the same way as in registration, [COPY] and [PASTE] can also be
used.
When you have modified "REGISTERED NAME" and
"REGISTERED SENTENCE," you must press the INPUT key at the
end of the modification.
Pressing [ALTER] replaces the original fixed form sentence with the
new fixed form sentence.
- 191 -
10.3.3 Deleting a Fixed Form Sentence
Position the cursor at the name of the fixed form sentence you want to
delete, and press [DELETE]. Then a message for confirming a
deletion operation is displayed. If you press [YES], the fixed form
sentence is deleted.
Pressing [NO] cancels the deletion operation.
- 192 -
10.3.4 Initialization to Standard Fixed Form Sentences
The machine tool builder can factory-set particular fixed form

sentences as standard fixed form sentences.
In this case, the fixed form sentences are stored as initial data in a
memory area in which data cannot be deleted.
You can use [STAND.] to restore the initial state factory-set by the
machine tool builder.
NOTE
1 When fixed form sentences are initialized, the
sentences that have been entered or modified so
far are all deleted; so, care is necessary.
2 Also when the machine tool builder reads standard
fixed form sentences into memory, initialization
using [STAND.] is required first.
When [STAND.] is pressed, a message for confirming initialization is

displayed. By pressing [YES], initialization is performed.
Selecting [NO] cancels the initialization.
- 193 -
11.BACKGROUND EDITING OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
11 BACKGROUND EDITING
During actual machining on the machine, contents of the other part
program can be edited.
- 194 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 11.BACKGROUND EDITING
11.1 STARTING BACKGROUND EDITING
When MEM mode is selected on the machine operator’s panel, The

following program screen is displayed whether the actual machining
is executing or not.
REWIND O LIST BGEDIT N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS. PRESET MESLST MCHDR SIMLAT
W
Pressing the [BGEDIT] soft key on the automatic operation menu

switches the screen display to the background editing screen. After
the background editing screen appears, the program list screen
appears automatically. So, select a program to be edited.
- 195 -
11.BACKGROUND EDITING OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
11.2 ENDING BACKGROUND EDITING
During back ground editing, pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or
rightmost soft key [>] several times displays the soft-keys including
[BGEND]
BGEND
Pressing the [BGEND] soft key on the fifth page of the background
editing menu ends the background editing screen and returns the
screen display to the automatic operation screen.
- 196 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 11.BACKGROUND EDITING
11.3 OPERATIONS DURING BACKGROUND EDITING
Operations during background editing are basically the same as

editing operations in the EDIT mode. Note, however, that the use of
some operations is restricted.
- 197 -
12.NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
12 NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION

Pressing the [NC CNV] soft key starts the NC program conversion
function.
With the NC program conversion function, a 4-digit G cycle
machining command can be dissolved into a single move command
and stored in the part program storage area of the NC.
* When the NC program conversion function is used, the milling

cycle option or turning cycle option is required.
- 198 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 12.NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION
12.1 BASIC SPECIFICATIONS
(1) With the NC program conversion function, only a 4-digit G cycle

machining command can be dissolved into a single move
command. Any other types of commands are output without
modification.
(2) The NC program conversion function can be used in the MEM
mode only.
(3) Only an executed block becomes an NC program conversion
target.
(4) A block containing an M98, M99, or custom macro program is
not output to the conversion destination program.
(5) In the case of multiple paths, NC program conversion is
performed for each path.
(6) If there is a loop or conditional branch program of a custom
macro program, executed blocks only are output. A block
containing a conditional branch program of a custom macro is
(7) If a loop or conditional branch program of a custom macro
program includes a 4-digit G cycle, the 4-digit G cycle is
expanded as many times as the number of repeats. A block
containing a conditional branch program of a custom macro is
(8) Whether to output a 4-digit G cycle machining command before
expansion as a comment can be chosen using bit 5 of parameter
No. 14703.
Bit 5 of parameter No. 14703 = 0:
Outputs a 4-digit G cycle machining command before
expansion as a comment in NC program conversion.
Bit 5 of parameter No. 14703 = 1:
Does not output a 4-digit G cycle machining command
before expansion as a comment in NC program conversion.
(9) In the case of a subprogram call, see the examples below. A
block containing M98 or M99 is not output to the conversion
destination program.
(Example 1)
(Before conversion)
O0001
M98 P0002; → O0002
M30; G0 X100. ;
% G0 X200. ;
G0 X300. ;
(After conversion) M99;
O0001 %
G0 X100. ;
G0 X200. ;
G0 X300. ;
M30;
%
- 199 -
(Example 2)
(Before conversion)
O0001
G1128I1.R0.8A95.B80.J3.P3.L3.M0.F0.5X1.Y1.Z10. ;
M98 P0002; → O0002
M30; G1450H0.V75. ;
% G1451H0.V0.K7.D0.L0.M0.T1. ;
G1451H5.V0.K1.C5.L0.M0.T1. ;
G1451H5.V75.K3.D75.L0.M0.T2. ;
G1456;
(After conversion) M99;
O0001 %
(NC PROGRAM CONVERSION-START);
G01X963Z1616;
G01X896 Z1654;
:
(NC PROGRAM CONVERSION-END);
M30;
%
- 200 -
12.2 STARTING THE NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION
Selecting MEM mode on the machine operator’s panel, and pressing

the leftmost soft key [<] or rightmost soft key [>] several times
displays the soft-keys including [NC CNV]
<1> The [CREATE PROGRAM FOR DESTINATION] screen

appears. Enter the number of a conversion destination program,
then press the [CREATE] soft key.
CREATE CANCEL
- 201 -
<2> If the program already exists, a message for checking if the

program may be overwritten is displayed. Choose whether to
allow the program to be overwritten. If you select [NO], the
screen goes back to the memory program screen, so press [NC
CNV] again and enter other program number.
<3> Press the [CREATE] soft key. A new program with the entered
number is created. Pressing the [CANCEL] soft key cancels the
NC program conversion function and returns the screen display
to the ordinary MEM mode screen.
- 202 -
<4> The following soft keys appear on the NC program conversion

function screen.
DEST. START PROCES SINGLE STOP OPEN REWIND N SRCH RETURN
[DEST.] :Creates a new conversion destination program.

[START] :Starts NC program conversion execution.
[PAUSE] :Stops NC program conversion execution temporarily.
[SINGLE] :Executes NC program conversion block by block.
[STOP] :Stops NC program conversion execution.
[OPEN] :Selects a conversion source program from the program
list screen.
[REWIND] : Searches for a conversion source program.
[SRCH] : Makes an N search for a conversion source program.
[CHPATH] : Displayed only when the multi-path option is specified.
This soft key switches between paths.
[RETURN] : Ends the NC program conversion function and returns
the screen display to the ordinary MEM mode screen.
* When bit 0 of parameter No. 27310 = 1, the [PAUSE] soft key is
replaced with the [PROCES] soft key.
[PROCES] : Executes NC program conversion process by process.
<5> During executing NC program conversion, the converted part

program blocks are displayed in the destination window.
<6> Confirm that the NC program conversion ends, then press

[RETURN].
DEST. START PROCES SINGLE STOP OPEN REWIND N SRCH RETURN
- 203 -
12.3 RESTRICTIONS
(1) The NC program conversion function cannot be used during

background editing.
(2) Blocks containing the following words are not output to the
conversion destination program:
- M98
- M99
- Custom macro conditional branch program
<1> GOTO
<2> IF
<3> THEN
<4> WHILE
<5> END
- Custom macro variable assignment program
#?=~
- Custom macro external output command program
<1> POPEN
<2> PCLOS
<3> BPRNT[~]
<4> DPRNT[~]
(3) If an alarm is issued during NC program conversion, the results
of conversion at that time are output to the conversion
destination program.
(4) During NC program conversion, the following soft keys cannot
be used:
[DEST.], [START], [OPEN], [REWIND], [SRCH], [CHPATH],
[RETURN]
(5) If an execution mode other than MEM mode is set during NC
program conversion, the execution of NC program conversion is
terminated forcibly.
(6) During NC program conversion, the screen display cannot be
switched to the NC screen.
(7) If only one block is inserted between WHILE programs, blocks
as many as the loop count are not output but only one block is
output.
(Before conversion)
WHILE [#1 EQ #2]DO1;
G0 X0. ;
END1 ;
(After conversion) Only one block is output even if three loop
operations are performed.
G0 X0. ;
- 204 -
(8) The NC program conversion function is designed to expand a 4-

digit G cycle machining code. So, NC program conversion is not
performed as expected in cases other than the cases indicated
below.
(Example 1) When both the machining command and figure command

of a cycle are present on the main program
O0001
G1128I1.R0.8A95.B80.J3.P3.L3.M0.F0.5X1.Y1.Z10. ;
G1450H0.V75. ;
G1451H0.V0.K7.D0.L0.M0.T1. ;
G1451H5.V0.K1.C5.L0.M0.T1. ;
G1451H5.V75.K3.D75.L0.M0.T2. ;
G1456;
M30;
%
(Example 2) When the figure command of a cycle is present on a

subprogram
O0001
G1128I1.R0.8A95.B80.J3.P3.L3.M0.F0.5X1.Y1.Z10. ;
M98 P0002; → O0002
M30; G1450H0.V75. ;
% G1451H0.V0.K7.D0.L0.M0.T1. ;
G1451H5.V0.K1.C5.L0.M0.T1. ;
G1451H5.V75.K3.D75.L0.M0.T2. ;
G1456;
M99;
%
* It is assumed that the subprogram includes only the figure

command of a cycle.
(9) Executed program blocks are the target of NC statement

conversion.
(10) Feedrate command is converted with decimal point
(11) When custom macro block exit before executing stop command
(M00, M01, M02, M30, M99), executing stop command (M00,
M01, M02, M30, M99) is not converted.
(12) When M98 block exit before executing stop command (M00,
M01, M02, M30, M99), executing stop command (M00, M01,
M02, M30, M99) is not converted.
(13) A block including M198 is not converted.
- 205 -
13.TOOL DATA BASE FUNCTION OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
13 TOOL DATA BASE FUNCTION
- 206 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 13.TOOL DATA BASE FUNCTION
13.1 SETTING OF TOOL OFFSET DATA

For a compound machine, the following data items are displayed for
the T mode:
(1) T : GEOMETRY OFFSET
(2) T : WEAR OFFSET
(3) T : TOOL DATA
(4) T : GEOMETORY TOOL TYPE OFFSET
(5) T : GEOMETORY WEAR TYPE OFFSET
(6) T : GEOMETORY DATA TYPE OFFSET
The following data items are displayed for the M mode:

(7) M : TOOL OFFSET (TOOL LENGTH COMP. / CUTTER
COMPENSATION)
(8) M : TOOL DATA
(9) M : TOOL TYPE OFFSET (TOOL LENGTH COMP. /
CUTTER COMPENSATION)
(10) M : TOOL TYPE DATA
Each mode can be selected with [M←→T] soft key.
For lathes, data items (1) to (6) are displayed. For machining centers,
data items (7) to (10) are displayed.
The data to be set and displayed in (1), (2) and (7) is common to the
corresponding data in CNC. For details, refer to the operator’s manual
of the CNC.
And for lathes, inputting tip radius value of milling tools in “radius”
is necessary. If not, sometimes alarm is given.
For data items (4), (5) and (9), which are related to the tool
management function, see the description of “Tool Management
Function” in Appendix.
For data items (3), (6), (8) and (10), which is about tool form data, see
next section.
- 207 -
13.2 SETTING OF TOOL DATA

By selecting “tool data” tab in tool offset window, “tool data” setting
window is displayed. Tool data is the data that is necessary for
executing animation or cycle, and their items are tool radius, kind of
tool, name, setting and tool form data. Of all items, tool radius is
inputted into radius (for lathes) or cutter radius compensation (for
milling) in tool offset table. The rest is inputted in “TOOL DATA”
tab.
These data are reserved in SRAM, so once set, they aren’t deleted
though the power supply is cut. But more than 300 tools can’t be
inputted.
Besides, by parameter No.14850#0, you can decide whether “tool
data” tab is displayed or not.
13.2.1 Setting of Tool Type

By placing cursor on an item for selecting kind of tool, the following
soft keys appear. When appropriate soft key is pushed, a type of tool
is selected and its icon is displayed. Also tool name is displayed on
the right of the icon.
Soft keys for selecting kind of tool for lathes or T mode of combined
machine
GENERL THREAD GROOVE BUTTON STRAIT DRILL TAP F END NO.SRH CLOSE
CHAMFR B END REAMER BORING F MILL CLOSE
Soft keys for selecting kind of tool for machining centers or M mode
of combined machine
DRILL CHAMFR F END B END TAP REAMER BORING F MILL No.SRH CLOSE
13.2.2 Editing of Tool Name

To edit tool name, place cursor on tool name, change mode into
character, input alphabets or numerals, and push INPUT.
This function is useful to distinguish similar tools.
- 208 -
13.2.3 Setting of Tool Set

When a cursor is placed on tool setting number, a guidance window is
automatically displayed in the right of the screen. By inputting tool
setting number and pushing INPUT, tool setting can be set.
13.2.4 Entering of Tool Data

By placing cursor on items of tool data, guidance window is
automatically displayed. By inputting tool data value and pushing
INPUT, tool data can be set. Then three-whole and one-decimal
number can be inputted when unit is [deg.]. When [inch] or [mm],
eight-figure number can be inputted. But numbers that is inputted to 7
decimal places are rounded off to 6 decimal places.
The names of item and the numbers of item depend on kind of tool.
See below about the detail. In this table, tools that don’t have to set
tool data are omitted.
Tool data isn’t necessary to execute milling cycle. So milling cycle
can be executed though tool data isn’t set.
Tool form data for turning

KIND OF TOOL GENERAL THREAD GROOVE
Data1 Cutting edge angle Nose angle Tip width
Data2 Nose angle Tip length (*)
KIND OF TOOL BUTTON STRAIGHT

Cutting edge
Data1 Tip length(*)
angle
Data2 Nose angle
Tool form data for milling

KIND OF TOOL DRILL CHAMFER
Cutter
Data Nose angle(*)
diameter(*)
(*) : Cycle can be executed if not set
- 209 -
13.2.5 Cutting Edge Angle of Tool Data Base Function
An angle that is made by a line parallel with holder width and cutting
edge is defined as a cutting edge angle.
Holder Holder
Width Width
T T
An An
Aa Aa(Cutting Edge angle)
La (parallel with holder

width)
1. Draw a straight line that is parallel with holder width
2. An angle that is made by a straight line La and a straight line T is
defined as a cutting edge angle
Holder Width
Aa(Cutting edge angle)
La(parallel with holder

width)
3. In case of L form holder, the width of a part that is installed tip is

defined as holder width.
Actually MGi defines cutting edge angle from tool setting.

Show following concrete examples.
(set 1) (set 2) …
(set 5) (set 6) …
- 210 -
(set 9) (set 10) …
(set 13) (set 14) …
13.2.6 Initializing of Tool Data

Tool data can be initialized by [INIT] soft key. When [INIT] is
pushed, a message for confirming initialization is displayed. By
pressing [YES], initialization is performed.
But items to be initialized are only items placed in tool data tab and
[INIT] has no connection with offset value.
- 211 -
13.3 SELECTING TOOL DATA AT PROGRAM ENTERING

To select dada number that is set in “TOOL DATA” tab, T code or D
code is used to work machines.
For lathes, T code is used to specify numbers of three types, tool
number, geometry tool offset number and wear tool offset number. In
these numbers, the geometry offset number will be used for actual
machine operations. There are some ways to specify geometry tool
offset, for example setting parameter No.5002#1. But in all case, the
geometry offset number will be used. With tool management function,
D code is used to select offset number. But in this case, the geometry
tool offset number will be used too.
For machining centers, the number of the cutter compensation that is
specified by D code will be used for actual machine operation.
For compound machines, when T mode, the way to appoint tool data
number is the same as lathes. So the same number of geometry tool
offset and runs machine.
When M mode, the way to appoint tool data number is the same as
machining centers. So the number of cutter compensation for actual
machine operation.
In animated simulation, when tool data number is selected by T code
or D code, a tool is drawn.
NOTE
There are 2 ways to draw tools. One is the way to
select tool data number above. The other is the way
to use G code. Place T (or D) code and G code 2
blocks apart when G code follows T (or D code). If
T (or D) code and G code aren’t placed 2 blocks
apart, order of G code sometimes doesn’t work
correctly.
The relation between the specified tool kind and machining cycle will
be checked. For example, if you try to use chamfer tool in drill cycle,
some corresponding alarm will occur. But when kind of tool isn’t
inputted, This checking will not done.
- 212 -
13.4 SETTING OF TOOL GRAPHIC DATA

Several items is needed to execute machine simulation in addition to
items showed in 5.2 and 5.3. These items are called Graphic Data.
Graphic data is showed below.
13.4.1 Tool Graphic Data

Tool graphic data are defined by parameters, from No.27350 to
No.27383. When these parameter isn’t defined, appropriate value will
be inserted automatically. For details, refer to the description of “12.
Parameter”..
Tool graphic data for turning tools

Kind of tool General Threading Grooving Ball endmill
Data1 Tip position Tip position Tip position Tip length
Data2 Tip length Tip width Holder length
Data3 Holder length Holder length Holder width
Data4 Holder width Holder width
Data5 Holder length 2
Data6 Holder width 2
Kind of tool Button turning Straight

Data1 Tip position Tip position
Data2 Holder length Tip length
Data3 Holder width Holder length
Data4 Holder width
Data5 Holder length2
Data6 Holder width 2
Tool graphic data for milling tools

Kind of tool Drill Chamfer Flat endmill Ball endmill
Data1 Tip length Tip length Tip length Tip length
Data2 Cutter length
Data3 Shank length
Data4 Shank diameter
Kind of tool Tap Reamer Boring Face mill

Data1 Tip length Tip length Tip length Tip length
- 213 -
14.EDITING OF FREE FIGURE OF SUBPROGRAM FORM OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
14 EDITING OF FREE FIGURE OF

SUBPROGRAM FORM
On the program editing screen, after moving the cursor on the sub
program call command (M98 P****) which is composed by the free
figure blocks, pressing the [INPUT] key displays the window for
editing the free figures to edit directly.
- 214 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 14.EDITING OF FREE FIGURE OF SUBPROGRAM FORM
14.1 OPERATIONS OF EDITING SUBPROGRAM
The operations are as follows.

(1) On the program editing screen, press the [INPUT] key or the
[ALTER] soft key after moving the cursor on the sub program
call command (M98 P****) which is composed by the free
figure blocks.
(2) The following window for editing the free figures included sub
program is displayed.
- 215 -
(3) On the window to finish editing the free figures, the operations
are as follows.
• Pressing the [OK] soft key alters the existing blocks into the
editing figures in the machining program and returns to the
main program displaying screen.
But, at the case that the another free figures exist after the
editing figures, for example the island figures exist after the
pocket outer free figures, the editing window of the next free
figures is displayed.
• At the case of editing the free figures for pocketing, pressing
the [ISLAND] soft key displays the window for editing the
free figures (“START POINT”) to make the new island
figures after altering the editing figures.
NOTE
On the editing sub program window, the free figures
cannot be output into the another sub program.
- 216 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 14.EDITING OF FREE FIGURE OF SUBPROGRAM FORM
(4) On the window of editing the free figures, pressing the

[CREATE] soft key displays a window for the confirmation to
interrupt editing. From this window, pressing the [YES] soft key
cancels the editing operations and returns to the main program
displaying screen.
NOTE
During editing the subprogram of free figure,
displaying free figure editing window, this editing
mode is canceled and the editing window is closed
by the following operations. The selected program
is kept to the edited subprogram.
• Mode is changed to other than EDIT mode when
foreground editing is done.
• Change to CNC screen.
• Power turned off.
- 217 -
14.2 WARNING MESSAGE
The following warning messages are displayed at the editing of the

subprogram.
• “SUB PROGRAM IS NOT FOUND”

When the [INPUT] key or the [ALTER] soft key is pressed after
moving the cursor on the sub program call command, this warning
message is displayed at the case that the program number specified
by address ’P’ doesn’t exists.
• “PROGRAM IS PROTECTED.”
by address ’P’ is protected.
• “PROGRAM IS NOT FREE FIGURE”

by address ’P’ doesn’t include the free figure blocks.
• “PROGRAM IS SELECTED FOREGROUND

When the screen changes to the main program displaying screen
after the [OK] soft key or the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed at
background editing, this warning message is displayed at the case
that the main program is already selected at foreground.
- 218 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 15.SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS
15 SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS

On Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, almost all the operations excepting
numerical data entering are done by soft-keys. However, if you are
well experienced in those operations, you can operate more quickly
by using other key instead of the assigned soft-key. This other key
operation is called shortcut key.
Pressing HELP key on the MDI panel displays the window in which
explanations of shortcut key are displayed. Into details, refer to II 16.
HELP SCREEN.
NOTE
If the small MDI key board is attached to the CNC,
shortcut key operations cannot be used.
- 219 -
15.SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
15.1 SHORTCUTS FOR VARIOUS CONFIRMATION

OPERATIONS
Soft key Shortcut key

[ YES ] [INPUT]
[ NO ] [CAN]
15.2 SHORTCUTS FOR RANGE SELECTION

[SELECT] [INPUT]
[CANCEL] [CAN]
15.3 SHORTCUTS FOR COPY OPERATION

[COPY] [INPUT]
[CANCEL] [CAN]
15.4 SHORTCUTS FOR CUT OPERATION

[CUT] [INPUT]
[CANCEL] [CAN]
- 220 -
15.5 SHORTCUTS FOR THE BASE SCREEN SOFT KEYS

[<] [-]+[INPUT]
[SF1] [1]+[INPUT]
[SF2] [2]+[INPUT]
[SF3] [3]+[INPUT]
[SF4] [4]+[INPUT]
[SF5] [5]+[INPUT]
[SF6] [6]+[INPUT]
[SF7] [7]+[INPUT]
[SF8] [8]+[INPUT]
[SF9] [9]+[INPUT]
[SF10] [0]+[INPUT]
[>] [.]+[INPUT]
* By setting bit 1 of parameter No. 14703 to 1, a number for

shortcut operation can be displayed under each soft key.
15.6 SHORTCUT FOR STARTING THE CYCLE CHANGE

SCREEN

[ALTER] [INPUT]
15.7 SHORTCUTS FOR THE MENU SELECTION SCREEN

[SELECT] [INPUT] or numeral +[INPUT]
[CANCEL] [CAN]
- 221 -
15.8 SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM INSERTION

SCREEN

[INSERT] [INPUT] or numeral +[INPUT]
[CLOSE] [CAN]
15.9 SHORTCUTS FOR THE M CODE INSERTION SCREEN

[INSERT] [INPUT]
[CLOSE] [CAN]
15.10 SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM LIST SCREEN

[OPEN] [INPUT] or [9]
[CLOSE] [CAN] or [0]
[DELETE] [DELETE] or [3]
[EDTCOM] [ALTER] or [4]
[NEW] [1]
[COPY] [2]
[SEARCH] [5]
[M CARD] [6]
[ALLDEL] [7]
[SRTORD] [8]
15.11 SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM CREATION SCREEN

[CREATE] [INPUT]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
- 222 -
15.12 SHORTCUTS FOR THE COMMENT EDITING SCREEN

[CREATE] [INPUT]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
15.13 SHORTCUTS FOR THE SEARCH SCREEN

[SEARCH] [INPUT]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
15.14 SHORTCUTS FOR THE CYCLE INPUT SCREEN

[INSERT] [INSERT]
[ALTER] [ALTER]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
[SF1] [1]
[SF2] [2]
[SF3] [3]
[SF4] [4]
[SF5] [5]
[SF6] [6]
[SF7] [7]
[SF8] [8]
[SF9] [9]
[SF0] [0]
[>] [.]+[INPUT]
15.15 SHORTCUT FOR THE WORKPIECE COORDINATE

SYSTEM SETTING SCREEN

[CLOSE] [EOB]
15.16 SHORTCUT FOR THE TOOL OFFSET SETTING SCREEN

[CLOSE] [EOB]
- 223 -
15.17 SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM

REGISTRATION SCREEN

[CLOSE] [[INPUT]
[NEW] [INSERT]
[DELETE] [DELETE]
[ALTER] [ALTER]
15.18 SHORTCUTS FOR THE CREATION SCREEN FOR

REGULAR PROGRAM REGISTRATION

[INSERT] [INSERT]
[ADD] [ALTER]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
15.19 SHORTCUTS FOR THE ALTER SCREEN FOR REGULAR

PROGRAM REGISTRATION

[ALTER] [ALTER]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
15.20 SHORTCUTS FOR THE PRESET SCREEN

[ALTER] [ALTER]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
- 224 -
15.21 SHORTCUT FEEDRATE THE MEASUREMENT RESULT

SCREEN

[CLOSE] [CAN]
15.22 SHORTCUT FOR THE MANUAL MEASUREMENT SCREEN

[CLOSE] [EOB]
15.23 SHORTCUT FOR VARIOUS SETTING SCREENS

[CLOSE] [EOB]
15.24 SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE MAIN SCREEN

[CREATE] [INPUT]
[CANCEL] [CAN]
[DELETE] [DELETE]
[ALTER] [ALTER]
[<] [-]
[SF1] [1]
[SF2] [2]
[SF3] [3]
[SF4] [4]
[SF5] [5]
[SF6] [6]
[SF7] [7]
[SF8] [8]
[SF9] [9]
[SF10] [0]
[>] [.]
- 225 -
15.25 SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE INPUT SCREEN

[OK] [INSERT]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
15.26 SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE CREATION

SCREEN

[OK] [INSERT]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
- 226 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 16.HELP SCREEN
16 HELP SCREEN
Pressing the [HELP] key on the MDI keyboard displays the HELP
window, in which explanations for shortcut key operation are
displayed.
In the window, “CONTENTS” and “TOPIC” tabs are displayed.
Moving the cursor by ↑ or ↓, place the cursor to the item of shortcut

key to display the explanation.
- 227 -
16.HELP SCREEN OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
Pressing the cursor key → displays the tab “TOPIC” tab and
explanation of the selected shortcut key.
Pressing the cursor key ← returns to “CONTENTS” tab.
Pressing [CLOSE] closes the HELP window.
- 228 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 17.MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
17 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION
- 229 -
17.MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
17.1 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF PART PROGRAM
17.1.1 Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Part Program
Select EDIT mode on the machine operator7s panel. Pressing [O

LIST] displays the program list window, programs registered in the
CNC.
Following soft-keys are displayed.
NEW COPY DELETE EDTCOM SEARCH M CARD ALL DEL SRTORD OPEN CLOSE
- 230 -
Pressing the [M CARD] soft key on the program list screen displays
the INPUT/OUTPUT PROGRAM BY MEMORY CARD]screen.
Following soft-keys are displayed.
INPUT INP.O DELETE SEARCH OUTPUT FORMAT RETURN
[INPUT] : Inputs a program from the memory card.

[INP.O] : Inputs a program from the memory card (by changing
the O number).
[DELETE] : Deletes files on the memory card.
[SEARCH] : Searches for a file on the memory card.
[OUTPUT] : Displays the screen for output to the memory card.
[FORMAT] : Formats the memory card.
[RETURN] : Returns the screen display to the program list screen.
In order to delete a file in the memory card, place the cursor on the
file name in the above window and press [DELETE]. This soft key
displays a message for checking if selected file may be deleted.
Pressing [YES] deletes the file in the memory card. Pressing [NO]
cancels the deletion of all programs.
YES NO
In case of initializing the memory card such as deleting all files in the
memory card, press [FORMAT]. This soft key displays a message for
checking if the memory card may be initialized. Pressing [YES]
initializes the memory card and all files in the memory card are
deleted.. Pressing [NO] cancels the deletion of all programs.
- 231 -
17.1.2 Memory Card Output Operation for Part Program
Pressing the [OUTPUT] soft key on the INPUT/OUTPUT

PROGRAM BY MEMORY CARD screen displays the OUTPUT
PROGRAM TO MEMORY CARD screen.
The following soft-keys are displayed.
SEARCH OUTPUT ALLOUT SRTORD RETURN
[SEARCH] :
Searches for a program.
[OUTPUT] :
Output a selected program to the memory card.
[ALLOUT] :
Output all programs to the memory card.
[SRTORD] :
Switches the sort order for displaying a program list
between ascending order and descending order.
[RETURN] : Returns the screen display to the [INPUT/OUTPUT
PROGRAM BY MEMORY CARD] screen.
Pressing [SEARCH] displays the following window of program

searching.
- 232 -
Enter the program number to be searched, then press [SEARCH].
1. Output single part program

Select the part program to be outputted by placing the cursor on it.
Pressing [OUTPUT] displays the following window for entering
outputting file name.
ON OFF OUTPUT CANCEL
If the program number can be used as the outputted file name,

press [OUTPUT] without entering file name.
In case that the outputted file name should be changed, enter the
file name to OUTPUT FILE NAME and press [OUTPUT].
In order to output the selected program together with subprogram
called from the program, press [ON] for OUTPUT WITH
SUBPROGRAM item. If not, press [OFF].
- 233 -
2. Output all part programs

Pressing [ALLOUT] displays the following window for entering
outputting file name.
If the file name “PROGRAM ALL” can be used as it is, press

[OUTPUT] without entering file name and all part programs
stored in the CNC, the currently selected path when multi-path
lathe, are outputted to the memory card with this name.
In case that the outputted file name should be changed, enter the
file name to OUTPUT FILE NAME and press [OUTPUT].
17.1.3 Memory Card Input Operation for Part Program
INPUT INP.O. DELETE SEARCH OUTPUT FORMAT RETURN
Select the file to be inputted by placing the cursor on it on the

program input/output window.
Pressing [INPUT] begins to read the part program in the file from
memory card to CNC.
Pressing [INP.O.] displays the following window for changing the
reading program number, so enter the new program number and press
[INPUT].
- 234 -
When the file, in which all part program was outputted with file name
of “PROGRAM ALL”, is read to CNC with changing the program
number by [INP.O.], the program number of the 1st program is
changed to the new number.
INPUT INP.O. DELETE SEARCH OUTPUT FORMAT RETURN
In order to search the file to be inputted to CNC, press [SEARCH]

and the following file searching window is displayed.
Enter the file name to be searched, and press [SEARCH], then the file
is searched if the file is stored in the memory card.
- 235 -
17.1.4 File Format Allowed for Memory Card Input/Output
Only text files can be input to and output from the memory card. The
file format described below must be observed.
<1> A file must start with "%" and "LF".

<2> A file must end with "%".
<3> For input, data read operation is skipped after the first "%" is
detected until an "LF" is detected.
<4> A block must end not with a semicolon (;) but with an "LF".
("LF" is 0A of ASCII code.)
<5> When a file containing lowercase alphabetic characters, kana
characters, and some special characters (such as $, ¥, and !) is
input, those characteristics are ignored.
<6> ASCII code is used as input/output code, regardless of the setting
parameter (ISO/EIA).
<7> Whether to output an "LF" only or an "LF, CR, CR" as an EOB
can be chosen using bit 3 (NCR) of parameter No. 0100.
<8> Characters usable for a file name
Alphabetic characters : A to Z
Numeric characters : 0 to 9
Special characters : $ & # % ' ( ) - @ ^ { } ~ ` ! _
- 236 -
17.2 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF TOOL DATA
17.2.1 Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Tool Data
During displaying TOOL DATA window, the following soft-keys are

displayed by pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or rightmost soft key
[>] several times.
OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE
In order to input or output the tool data between memory card, select
EDIT mode on the machine operator’s panel.
Insert the memory card into the memory card slot on the MDI/LCD
panel.
- 237 -
17.2.2 Memory Card Output Operation for Tool Data
OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE
Pressing [OUTPUT] displays the following window for entering the

output file name.
Pressing [OUTPUT] without entering the file name outputs the tool
data with the file name “TOOLDAB.DAT].
In order to change the file name, enter the file name and press
[OUTPUT].
- 238 -
17.2.3 Memory Card Input Operation for Tool Data
OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE
Pressing [INPUT] displays the following window of f the file list

store in the memory card.
Select the file in which tool data are stored and to be read to CNC by
placing the cursor by the cursor key.
Pressing [READ] begins reading the tool data to CNC form the
memory card.
- 239 -
17.2.4 Data Format
The following format can be inputted or outputted.
1. Machining Center
G1980 P_ K_ T_ S_ A_ ;
P : Offset Number (1 à 999)
K : Kind of Tool
T : Name of Tool
S : Setting
A : Tool Data
2. Lathe
G1981 P_ J_ K_ Q_ S_ A_ B_ ;
P : Offset Number (1 à 999)
J : Path Number (only multiple paths)
K : Kind of Tool
T : Name of Tool
S : Setting
A : Tool Data1
B : Tool Data2
- 240 -
17.3 HARD COPY OF Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i SCREENS
In order to make a copy to memory card of the screen of Doosan Infracore

eZ Guide i, you need to operate as follows.
1. Setting of parameters
In addition to the parameter for hard copy of standard CNC screen,
No.3301#7HDC = 1, setting of the parameter for C executor,
No.8650#4CKM = 1, is necessary.
And furthermore, you need to set the parameter for memory card,
No.20 = 4.
2. Operations
Mount a memory card and display a necessary screen, then push
“SHIFT” key more than 5 seconds.
Release “SHIFT” key after checking the clock display on the
screen stops. The clock display will move again when copying the
screen completes.
3. Created File
By the above operations, new file with name of “Hdcpy***.bmp”
is created in the memory card. *** is the serial number and
numbered as 001, 002. However, once the CNC power is turned
off, this number is initialized to 000 from the next time of creating
hard copy file.
- 241 -
18.HANDLING LARGE PROGRAMS OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
18 HANDLING LARGE PROGRAMS
- 242 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 18.HANDLING LARGE PROGRAMS
18.1 SETTING A MAXIMUM PROGRAM SIZE THAT CAN BE

HANDLED
In parameter No. 14795, specify a maximum allowable memory size

to be used for program management.
Parameter
<1> No.14795#4 = 0 & No.14795#5 = 0
Set the maximum allowable program size to 200K bytes.
<2> No.14795#4 = 1 & No.14795#5 = 0

Set the maximum allowable program size to 500K bytes.
<3> No.14795#4 = 0 & No.14795#5 = 1

Set the maximum allowable program size to 1M bytes.
<4> No.14795#4 = 1 & No.14795#5 = 1

Set the maximum allowable program size to 1.5M bytes.
* A size of 200K bytes represents about 100,000 characters (4,000

blocks) when one block consists of 25 characters on average.
CAUTION
To specify a maximum allowable memory size
greater than 200K bytes in parameter No. 14795,
set an appropriate value in parameter No. 8781
(DRAM size that can be used by a C language
application).
To increase the DRAM size, the custom capacity
option is separately required.
* If the DRAM size is increased by 1M bytes by
using parameter No. 8781, about 500,000
characters (about 20,000 blocks) can be
increased as a guideline when one block
consists of 25 characters on average.
Restrictions
<1> If a large program is selected, the time required for switching
from the NC screen to MGi screen increases.
<2> If a large program is selected, a longer time is required to move

the program cursor as the program number increases.
- 243 -
18.HANDLING LARGE PROGRAMS OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
18.2 HANDLING A PROGRAM LARGER THAN THE MAXIMUM

ALLOWABLE SIZE
If the size of a program calculated according to the formula below

exceeds the maximum allowable memory size set in parameter No.
14795, the program cannot be handled on Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i.
Calculated size = (18 bytes)×(total number of blocks)+((number of

program characters)×1.1)
A program larger than the maximum allowable size is handled as

described below.
(1) If the screen display is switched from the NC screen to the MGi
screen
If the screen display is switched from the NC screen to the MGi
screen when a program larger than the maximum allowable
memory size is selected, the screen described below appears.
All MGi operations are disabled. Only switching to the NC
screen with the function key is enabled.
(2) If a selection is made on the program list screen

If a program larger than the maximum allowable memory size is
selected with the cursor and the [OPEN] soft key is pressed on
the program list screen, the [PROGRAM EXCEED MAXIMUM
SIZE.] message is displayed in the message display field on the
program list screen and the selection of the program is disabled.
CAUTION
If the program list screen contains only those
programs that are larger than the maximum
allowable memory size, the program list screen
cannot be closed. In this case, create a program to
close the program list screen.
(3) If an O search is made

<1> If the program number of a program larger than the
maximum allowable memory size is entered into the key-in
buffer, and the [O SRCH] soft key is pressed, the
[PROGRAM EXCEED MAXIMUM SIZE.] message is
displayed in the message display field on the base screen.
<2> If the program number of a program larger than the
maximum allowable memory size is not entered into the
key-in buffer, but the [O SRCH] soft key is pressed, the
program is not searched for.
- 244 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 18.HANDLING LARGE PROGRAMS
(4) If a program larger than the maximum allowable memory size is

called by a subprogram call during operation or animated
simulation
If a program larger than the maximum allowable memory size is
called by a subprogram call during operation or animated
simulation, the [PROGRAM EXCEED MAXIMUM SIZE.]
message is displayed in the program display field, and the
program is not displayed.
- 245 -
19.CALCULATOR FUNCTION OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
19 CALCULATOR FUNCTION
- 246 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 19.CALCULATOR FUNCTION
19.1 CALCULATOR FUNCTION
When numeric data is input, expressions for arithmetic operations,

trigonometric functions, square root calculations, and so forth can be
input for calculation.
1) Applications
The fixed-point format calculation function can be used for cycle
input, arbitrary figure input, contour program input, setting of
various data items (basis setting, measurement condition setting,
calibration setting), relative coordinate preset input, and the key-
in buffer(*).
2) Calculation methods
• Arithmetic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication,
and division)
Arithmetic operations are performed using the key
operations described below. The result of a calculation is
displayed at the cursor position for input data.
(1) Addition : 100.+200. [INPUT]
(2) Subtraction : 100.-200. [INPUT]
(3) Multiplication : 100.*200. [INPUT]
(4) Division : 100./200. [INPUT]
Example of input
- 247 -
19.CALCULATOR FUNCTION OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
• Trigonometric functions (sine, cosine, tangent, arcsine,

arccosine, arctangent)
Trigonometric function calculations are made using the key
(1) Sin : SIN(45) [INPUT]
(2) Cosine : COS(45) [INPUT]
(3) Tangent : TAN(45) [INPUT]
(4) Arcsine : ASIN(0.5) [INPUT]
(5) Arccosine : ACOS(0.5) [INPUT]
(6) Arctangent : ATAN(20,2) [INPUT]
(Note that for an arctangent calculation, a special format
using two arguments is required. Enter data according to
the format ATAN(a,b). arctan(a/b) is calculated.)
For a calculation, () is required at all times.
• Square root
A square root calculation is made using the key operations
described below. The result of a calculation is displayed at
the cursor position for input data.
(1) Square root : SQRT(45) [INPUT]
• Exponential functions
Exponential function calculations are made using the key
(1) Exponential function 1 (An exponential function of e
= 2.718... can be calculated.) :
EXP(4) [INPUT]
(2) Exponential function 2 ("a" raised to the power of "b"
can be calculated.) :
PWR(4,3) [INPUT]
(Note that for a calculation of exponential function 2, a
special format using two arguments is required. Enter data
according to the format PWR(a,b). "a" raised to the power
of "b" is calculated.)
• Logarithmic functions (common logarithm, natural

logarithm)
Logarithmic function calculations are made using the key
(1) Common logarithm : LOG(45) [INPUT]
(2) Natural logarithm : LN(45) [INPUT]
- 248 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 19.CALCULATOR FUNCTION
• Absolute value
An absolute value calculation is made using the key
(1) Absolute value : ABS(-45) [INPUT]
• Rounding
Rounding operations are performed using the key
(1) Rounding 1 (rounding off to an integer) :
RND(1.234) [INPUT]
(2) Rounding 2 (rounding off "a" to the decimal places
specified by "b") :
RND2(1.267,0.01) [INPUT]
(Note that for a calculation of rounding 2, a special format
using two arguments is required. Enter data according to
the format RND(a,b). The value of "a" is rounded off to the
decimal places specified by "b". As "b", do not specify a
value other than 1, 0.1, 0.01, and so forth.)
• Discarding
This operation discards all decimal places. A discarding
operation is performed using the key operations described
below. The result of a calculation is displayed at the cursor
position for input data.
(1) Discarding : FIX(1.234) [INPUT]
• Circle ratio
A circle ratio calculation is made using the key operations
described below. The circle ratio 3.14... is indicated.
(1) Circle ratio : PAI [INPUT]
(*) In the case of key-in buffer input, no decimal point is assigned

when an integer is produced as the result of a calculation. In
cases other than key-in buffer input, the respective input formats
are to be followed.
- 249 -
20.AUTOMATIC SETTING OF INITIAL VALUE DATA OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
20 AUTOMATIC SETTING OF INITIAL

VALUE DATA
- 250 -
TURNOPEEZG44 OPERATION 20.AUTOMATIC SETTING OF INITIAL VALUE DATA
20.1 AUTOMATIC SETTING OF INITIAL VALUES ON THE INPUT

DATA SCREEN
Data previously entered on the data input screen of the cycle menu or
drawing definition menu (blank figure block and tool definition
block) is automatically set as initial input value data.
Accordingly, the operator needs to enter cycle menu and drawing

definition menu data just once at the beginning. Then, the previously
entered data is set as initial values.
The input data items other than the [TOOL COND] tab of the cycle
menu are automatically set. The input data of the [TOOL COND] tab
is automatically set according to Section 20.2, "AUTOMATIC TOOL
DEFINITION BLOCK COPY".
For the figure menu, input data depends on the drawing data, so that
no initial values are automatically set.
- 251 -
20.AUTOMATIC SETTING OF INITIAL VALUE DATA OPERATION TURNOPEEZG44
20.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL DEFINITION BLOCK COPY
If the user does not use Tool Data Base function, the user needs to
specify the tool definition block of Drawing Definition menu before
Milling cycles or Turning cycles.
In that case, the user specifies the same data as the tool condition data
of each cycle menu.
This time, in each cycle menu, the tool condition data is set
automatically by copying the data of tool definition block.
That is, when data is input in the tool definition block of the drawing
definition menu, the data is once saved as internal data. Then, when
data is to be input according to the cycle menu, the tool definition
block data saved internally is copied as tool condition input data.
Accordingly, the operator just needs to enter a tool definition block

initially. Then, the operator need not enter tool condition data in
subsequent cycle menus.
The following tool definition block data is saved as internal data:
• Milling tool
1) TOOL DIAMETER (D)
• Turning tool
1) NOSE RADIUS (R)
2) CUT EDGE ANGLE (A)
3) NOSE ANGLE (B)
4) IMAGINARY TOOL (J)
- 252 -
III. CYCLE MACHINING TYPES
TURNOPEEZG44 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.MILLING
1 MILLING
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i supports the following types of milling.
Hole machining (with the tool rotated)

Machining type block Milling Turning
G1000 G1110 Center drilling
G1001 G1111 Drilling
G1002 G1112 Tapping
G1003 G1113 Reaming
G1004 G1114 Boring
G1005 - Fine boring
G1006 - Back boring
G1210 Random points
G1211 Linear points (same interval)
G1212 Linear points (different interval)
G1213 Grid points
Hole position block (XY plane)
G1214 Rectangle points
G1215 Circle points
G1216 Arc points (same interval)
G1217 Arc points (different interval)
G1310 Random points
G1311 Linear points (same interval)
G1312 Linear points (different interval)
G1313 Grid points
Hole position block (YZ plane)
G1314 Rectangle points
G1315 Circle points
G1316 Arc points (same interval)
G1317 Arc points (different interval)
Hole position block (XC plane, G1572 Circle points
end face) G1573 Random points
Hole position block (ZC plane, G1672 Circle points
cylindrical surface) G1673 Random points
NOTE
Hole Machining with the tool rotated has 2 type for
Milling machine and Turning machine (Lathe).
Therefore, please set the parameter No.27000 #1
in order to use suitable one for your machine.
No.27000#1=0 : For Milling machine
No.27000#1=1 : For Lathe
- 255 -
1.MILLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES TURNOPEEZG44
Facing
G1020 Roughing
Machining type block
G1021 Finishing
G1220 Rectangle
Fixed-figure block (XY plane) G1221 Circle
G1222 Track
G1200 Start point
G1201 Straight line
G1202 Arc (CW)
Arbitrary-figure block
G1203 Arc (CCW)
(XY plane)
G1204 Chamfering
G1206 End
G1320 Rectangle
Fixed-figure block
G1321 Circle
(YZ plane)
G1322 Track
G1300 Start point
G1301 Straight line
G1302 Arc (CW)
G1303 Arc (CCW)
(YZ plane)
G1304 Chamfering
G1306 End
G1520 Rectangle
Fixed figure block (XC plane,
G1521 Circle
end face)
G1522 Track
G1500 Start point
G1501 Straight line
G1502 Arc (CW)
Arbitrary-figure block (XC plane,
G1503 Arc (CCW)
end face)
G1504 Chamfering
G1506 End
G1600 Start point
G1601 Straight line
G1602 Arc (CW)
Arbitrary-figure block (ZC plane,
G1603 Arc (CCW)
cylindrical surface)
G1604 Chamfering
G1606 End
- 256 -
Contouring
G1060 Outer Wall Roughing
G1061 Outer Wall Bottom finishing
G1062 Outer Wall Side finishing
G1063 Outer Wall Chamfering
G1064 Inner Wall Roughing
G1065 Inner Wall Bottom finishing
G1066 Inner Wall Side finishing
G1067 Inner Wall Chamfering
G1068 Partial Roughing
G1069 Partial Bottom finishing
G1070 Partial Side finishing
G1071 Partial Chamfering
G1220 Rectangle
Fixed-figure block
G1221 Circle
(XY plane)
G1222 Track
G1200 Start point
G1201 Straight line
G1202 Arc (CW)
G1203 Arc (CCW)
(XY plane)
G1204 Chamfering
G1206 End
G1320 Rectangle
Fixed-figure block
G1321 Circle
(YZ plane)
G1322 Track
G1300 Start point
G1301 Straight line
G1302 Arc (CW)
G1303 Arc (CCW)
(YZ plane)
G1304 Chamfering
G1306 End
G1520 Rectangle
Fixed-figure block (XC plane,
G1521 Circle
end face)
G1522 Track
G1500 Start point
G1501 Straight line
G1502 Arc (CW)
G1503 Arc (CCW)
end face)
G1504 Chamfering
G1506 End
G1600 Start point
G1601 Straight line
G1602 Arc (CW)
G1603 Arc (CCW)
G1604 Chamfering
G1606 End
- 257 -
Pocketing
G1040 Roughing
G1041 Bottom finishing
G1042 Side finishing
G1043 Chamfering
G1220 Rectangle
Fixed-figure block
G1221 Circle
(XY plane)
G1222 Track
G1200 Start point
G1201 Straight line
G1202 Arc (CW)
G1203 Arc (CCW)
(XY plane)
G1204 Chamfering
G1206 End
G1320 Rectangle
Fixed-figure block
G1321 Circle
(YZ plane)
G1322 Track
G1300 Start point
G1301 Straight line
G1302 Arc (CW)
G1303 Arc (CCW)
(YZ plane)
G1304 Chamfering
G1306 End
G1520 Rectangle
Fixed-figure block (XC plane,
G1521 Circle
end face)
G1522 Track
G1500 Start point
G1501 Straight line
G1502 Arc (CW)
G1503 Arc (CCW)
end face)
G1504 Chamfering
G1506 End
G1600 Start point
G1601 Straight line
G1602 Arc (CW)
G1603 Arc (CCW)
G1604 Chamfering
G1606 End
- 258 -
Grooving
G1050 Roughing
G1051 Bottom finishing
Machining process block
G1052 Side finishing
G1053 Chamfering
G1220 Rectangle
Fixed-figure block G1221 Circle
(XY plane) G1222 Track
G1223 Radial groove
G1200 Start point
G1201 Straight line
G1202 Arc (CW)
G1203 Arc (CCW)
(XY plane)
G1204 Chamfering
G1206 End
G1320 Rectangle
Fixed-figure block G1321 Circle
(YZ plane) G1322 Track
G1323 Radial groove
G1300 Start point
G1301 Straight line
G1302 Arc (CW)
G1303 Arc (CCW)
(YZ plane)
G1304 Chamfering
G1306 End
G1520 Rectangle
Fixed-figure block (XC plane, G1521 Circle
end face) G1522 Track
G1523 Radial groove
G1500 Start point
G1501 Straight line
G1502 Arc (CW)
G1503 Arc (CCW)
end face)
G1504 Chamfering
G1506 End
G1600 Start point
G1601 Straight line
G1602 Arc (CW)
G1603 Arc (CCW)
G1604 Chamfering
G1606 End
C axis grooving
Machining process block G1056 C axis grooving
Fixed-figure block (XC plane, G1570 C axis groove
end face) G1571 X axis groove
Fixed-figure block (ZC plane, G1670 C axis groove
cylindrical surface) G1671 Z axis groove
- 259 -
NOTE
1 Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i supports three types of hole
machining, that is, hole machining by milling, hole
machining by turning (with the tool rotated), and
hole machining by turning (with the workpiece
rotated).
On the CNC for milling, only hole machining by
milling is usable. On the CNC for lathe turning, hole
machining by turning (with the tool rotated) and
hole machining by turning (with the workpiece
rotated) are usable.
On the CNC for complex machining, all types of
machining are usable, and what machining type to
use can be selected using parameters.
Refer to manuals from respective machine tool
builders for explanations about what type is actually
usable.
2 When Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i is used to enter cycle
machining data, combinations of a machining type
block and a figure block must be entered in
succession for all machining types except hole
machining by turning.
More than one figure block can be entered for one
machining type block.
For arbitrary figures, however, more than one set of
arbitrary figures can be entered if one set is
assumed to consist of up to 90 figures enclosed
between start and end points.
3 A data item whose address is indicated with [*] in
the following tables is automatically set with a
typical value unless a value is entered for it. You
need to enter no data if you accept the typical
value.
4 On the screen, [*] is displayed in the right end of
the data item.
5 In some of the input data items, the system sets the
last inputed data as an initail data. As to these input
data items, the mark of “(COPY)” was described.
6 In the input data item of “APROCH MOTION”,
when the machine is 2 axes of Maximum
simultaneously controlled axes, please sure not to
specify the [3 AXES] soft-key.
(If [2 AXES] is specified, the alarm 15 occurred
during execution of Cycles.)
- 260 -
NOTE
7 In the input data item of “CUT ANGLE” of
Pocketing Rough (G1040) and Bottom Finish
(G1041), when the machine is 2 axes of Maximum
simultaneously controlled axes, please sure not to
set the data.
(If the data is set, the alarm 15 occurred during
execution of Cycles.)
8 The motions go back to the start point where the
machining cycle started after completing the all
cycle motions.
(It is possible not to go back to the start point when
the parameter No. 27002#7 is set to 1.)
Remarks) Cycle retract motions

In case of No.27002#7=0, Retracting motions indicated as broken
lines in the following drawing will be outputted. The order of
motion axis will be opposite to the approched motions
Retracting motions of a
Position where the
machining cycle
machining cycle started
Approaching motions of a
machining cycle
In case of carrying out plural figures machining by one G4 digit

cycle, such like drilling or C-axis grooving, this retracting motions
will be available at the last figure machining.
- 261 -
1.1 HOLE MACHINING BY MILLING
1.1.1 Hole Machining Type Block
Center Drilling: G1000
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
W MACHINING TYPE [NORMAL] : No dwelling is performed.
(initial value)
[DWELL] : Dwelling is performed.
I REF. PT. MODE [INIT-1]: An R position return is made in moving
between holes. Finally, a return is made to
the I point. (initial value)
[INIT-2]: All movements between holes, including
the last return, are made as an I point
return.
[REF.] : All movements between holes, including
the last return, are made as an R position
return.
J I POINT Coordinate of the I point (COPY)
L CUT DEPTH Cut depth (radius value, negative value)
C CLEARANCE Distance between the workpiece surface and R
position (radius value, positive value) (COPY)
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate (positive value) (COPY)
P* DWELL TIME Dwell time at the hole bottom. If omitted, 0 is
assumed. (units of seconds, positive value) (COPY)
Z APROCH MOTION [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position
to the machining start point, the tool first
moves in the machining plane in two-axis
synchronous operation and then moves
along the tool axis. (initial value)
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position
to the machining start point in three-axis
synchronous operation.
- 262 -
• Tool path
<1> Move the tool to the position "cutting start position + clearance
(C)" in rapid traverse.
<2> Move the tool to the cutting end position at the cutting feedrate
(F).
- 263 -
Drilling: G1001
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
W MACHINING TYPE [NORMAL] : One cut with no dwelling performed
(initial value)
[DWELL] : One cut with dwelling performed
[PECK] : Peck drilling (Note 1)
[H SPED] : High-speed peck drilling (Note 2)
Q PECKING CUT DEPTH Depth of cut made by one cut (radius value, positive
value) (COPY)
I REF. PT. MODE [INIT-1] : An R position return is made in moving
[INIT-2] : All movements between holes, including the
last return, are made as an I point return.
[REF.] : All movements between holes, including the
last return, are made as an R position return.
K GO PAST AMOUNT Length of the incomplete hole portion at the tool tip. If
omitted, 0 is assumed. (Radius value, positive value)
(COPY)
P* DWELL TIME Dwell time at the hole bottom. If omitted, 0 is assumed.
(units of seconds, positive value) (COPY)
Z APROCH MOTION [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position to
the machining start point, the tool first
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position to
the machining start point in three-axis
- 264 -
NOTE
1 In the case of ‘MACHINING TYPE’ = ‘PECK’, the
system refers to the parameter No.5115 as the
return amount. Therefore, please set No.5115 to
suitable value before machining.
2 In the case of ‘MACHINING TYPE’ = ‘H SPED’, the
system refers to the parameter No.5114 as the
• Tool path
A drilling tool path can be selected from the following:
- [NORMAL]/[DWELL]
(F).
- 265 -
- [PECK]
<2> Move the tool to the position "cutting start position - primary cut
depth (D1)" at the cutting feedrate (F).
<4> Move the tool to the position "previous cutting end position +
return clearance (U)" in rapid traverse.
<5> Move the tool to the position "previous cutting end position -
compensation cut depth (Dn)" at the cutting feedrate (F).
<6> Repeat steps <3> to <5> until the last cutting end position is
reached.
- 266 -
- [H SPED]
<2> Move the tool to the position "cutting start position - primary cut
depth (D1)" at the cutting feedrate (F).
<3> Move the tool to the position "current position + return clearance
(U)" in rapid traverse.
<4> Move the tool to cut to the position "previous cutting end
position - compensation cut depth (Dn)" at the cutting feedrate
(F).
<5> Repeat steps <3> and <4> until the cutting end position is
reached.
- 267 -
Tapping: G1002
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
W MACHINING TYPE [NORMAL] : CW tapping (initial value)
[REVERS] : CCW tapping
D THREAD LEAD Tapping tool lead (radius value, positive value)
(COPY)
I REF. PT. MODE [INIT-1] : An R position return is made in moving
RIGID TAP
Data item Meaning
R TAP TYPE [FLOAT]: Specifies the float tap. (initial value)
[RIGID]: Specifies the rigid tap. (Note)
-1
S SPINDLE SPEED Spindle speed (min )
- 268 -
NOTE
1 When you use Rigid tap mode M code command
(No.5200#0=0), the system refers to No.5210 or
No.5212 as the value of M code. Therefore, please
set No.5210 or No.5212 to suitable value before
machining.
2 When the tool of Rigid tap extracts from the bottom
of a hole, Spindle changes to the reverse direction.
But, Icon is not changed to the reverse.
• Tool path
(F).
<3> Stop the spindle.
<4> Rotate the spindle in reverse.
(C)" at the cutting feedrate (F).
<6> Cause the spindle to start rotating normally.
- 269 -
Reaming: G1003
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
W MACHINING TYPE [CUT] : The tool retracts from the hole bottom in
cutting feed. (initial value)
[RAPID] : The tool retracts from the hole bottom in
rapid traverse.
[DWELL] : After dwelling at the hole bottom, the tool
retracts in cutting feed.
[INIT-2]: All movements between holes, including the
- 270 -
• Tool path
(F).
(C)" at the returning feedrate (Fr).
- 271 -
Boring: G1004
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
W MACHINING TYPE [CUT] : The tool retracts from the hole bottom in
cutting feed. (initial value)
[RAPID] : The tool retracts from the hole bottom in
rapid traverse.
[DWELL] : After dwelling at the hole bottom, the tool
retracts in cutting feed.
[INIT-2]: All movements between holes, including the
- 272 -
• Tool path
(F).
- 273 -
Fine Boring: G1005
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
Q SHIFT AMOUNT Shift amount (radius value) at the hole bottom after
spindle orientation (COPY)
I REF.PT.MODE [INIT-1] : An R position return is made in moving
[REAF.]: All movements between holes, including the
- 274 -
• Tool path
(F).
<3> The tool retracts to the position "cut end position + clearance
(Ut) along the tool axis" at the feedrate (Fut) specified for
clearance along the tool axis.
<4> Spindle orientation is performed.
<5> The tool retracts to the position "current position + clearance
(Ur) in the tool radius direction" at the feedrate (Fur) specified
for clearance in the tool radius direction.
- 275 -
Back Boring: G1006
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
Q SHIFT AMOUNT Shift amount (radius value) at the hole bottom after
spindle orientation (COPY)
M CUT DEPTH Cut depth (radius value, negative value)
L DIST. FROM BOTTOM Distance (radius value) at the hole bottom in the lifting
direction
K GO PAST AMOUNT Go-past amount at the hole bottom. If omitted, 0 is
assumed. (radius value, positive value) (COPY)
P* DWELL TIME Dwell time at the hole bottom after lift machining. If
omitted, 0 is assumed. (units of seconds, positive
value)
(COPY)
- 276 -
• Tool path
<2> The tool is shifted away from the tool tip.
<3> The tool moves to the bottom of the hole (R point) by rapid
traverse.
<4> The tool returns by a shift amount toward the tool tip.
<5> The spindle is turned in the normal direction to cut in to the
position "K + L" along the tool axis at the feedrate (F) specified
for cut-in.
<6> The spindle is stopped.
<7> After being shifted away from the tool tip, the tool is pulled out
from the hole.
- 277 -
1.1.2 Hole Position Block (XY Plane)
Random Points: G1210
HOLE POS-1
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the workpiece surface
H POINT-1 (X) X coordinate of the first hole
V POINT-1 (Y) Y coordinate of the first hole
A* POINT-2 (X) X coordinate of the second hole
C* POINT-2 (Y) Y coordinate of the second hole
D* POINT-3 (X) X coordinate of the third hole
E* POINT-3 (Y) Y coordinate of the third hole
F* POINT-4 (X) X coordinate of the fourth hole
I* POINT-4 (Y) Y coordinate of the fourth hole
HOLE POS-2
Data item Meaning
J* POINT-5 (X) X coordinate of the fifth hole
K* POINT-5 (Y) Y coordinate of the fifth hole
M* POINT-6 (X) X coordinate of the sixth hole
P* POINT-6 (Y) Y coordinate of the sixth hole
Q* POINT-7 (X) X coordinate of the seventh hole
R* POINT-7 (Y) Y coordinate of the seventh hole
S* POINT-8 (X) X coordinate of the eighth hole
T* POINT-8 (Y) Y coordinate of the eighth hole
NOTE
It is unnecessary to enter values for every hole
position. If entered, however, both X and Y
coordinates in a pair must be entered for a hole
position.
- 278 -
Linear Points (Same Interval): G1211
HOLE POSIT
Data item Meaning
H START POINT (X) X coordinate of the start point (first hole) of a straight
line
V START POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the start point (first hole) of a straight
line
A ANGLE Angle of a straight line from the X-axis
(initial value = 0)
D HOLE POS.TYPE [LENGTH] : Specified with the distance between the
first and last holes, and the number of
holes.
[PITCH] : Specified with the distance between
two adjacent holes, and the number of
holes.
E LENGTH / PITCH Length : Distance between the first and last holes (if
[LENGTH] is selected for item D)
Pitch : Distance between two adjacent holes (if
[PITCH] is selected for item D)
C NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes
SKIP
Data item Meaning
F* OMITTING POINT 1 Point where no hole is to be made (1)
I* OMITTING POINT 2 Point where no hole is to be made (2)
J* OMITTING POINT 3 Point where no hole is to be made (3)
K* OMITTING POINT 4 Point where no hole is to be made (4)
NOTE
It is unnecessary to enter a value for any item of an
omitting point.
- 279 -
Linear Points (Different Interval): G1212
HOLE POS-1
Data item Meaning
line
line
A ANGLE Angle of a straight line from the X-axis
HOLE POS-2
Data item Meaning
C PITCH WIDTH-1 Distance between the first and second holes
D PITCH WIDTH-2 Distance between the second and third holes
E* PITCH WIDTH-3 Distance between the third and fourth holes (positive
or negative value)
F* PITCH WIDTH-4 Distance between the fourth and fifth holes (positive
or negative value)
I* PITCH WIDTH-5 Distance between the fifth and sixth holes (positive
or negative value)
J* PITCH WIDTH-6 Distance between the sixth and seventh holes
K* PITCH WIDTH-7 Distance between the seventh and eighth holes
M* PITCH WIDTH-8 Distance between the eighth and ninth holes
P* PITCH WIDTH-9 Distance between the ninth and tenth holes (positive
or negative value)
Q* PITCH WIDTH-10 Distance between the tenth and eleventh holes
NOTE
It is unnecessary to enter a value for every pitch
width data item.
- 280 -
Grid Points: G1213
HOLE POSIT
Data item Meaning
line
line
U LENGTH FOR X AXIS Length of the first side of a grid (positive value)
W LENGTH FOR Y AXIS Length of the second side of a grid (positive value)
I NUMBER FOR X AXIS Number of holes on the first side of a grid (positive
value)
J NUMBER FOR Y AXIS Number of holes on the second side of a grid
(positive value)
K ANGLE FOR X AXIS Angle of the first side of a grid from the X-axis
(initial value = 0)
M ANGLE FOR Y AXIS Angle of the second side of a grid from the X-axis
(initial value = 90)
SKIP
Data item Meaning
A* OMITTING POINT 1 Point where no hole is to be made (1)
C* OMITTING POINT 2 Point where no hole is to be made (2)
D* OMITTING POINT 3 Point where no hole is to be made (3)
E* OMITTING POINT 4 Point where no hole is to be made (4)
NOTE
omitting point.
- 281 -
Rectangle Points: G1214
HOLE POSIT
Data item Meaning
line
line
U LENGTH FOR X AXIS Length of the first side of a rectangle (positive value)
W LENGTH FOR Y AXIS Length of the second side of a rectangle (positive
value)
I NUMBER FOR X AXIS Number of holes on the first side of a rectangle
(positive value)
J NUMBER FOR Y AXIS Number of holes on the second side of a rectangle
(positive value)
K ANGLE FOR X AXIS Angle of the first side of a rectangle from the X-axis
(initial value = 0)
M ANGLE FOR Y AXIS Angle of the second side of a rectangle from the X-
axis (initial value = 90)
SKIP
Data item Meaning
A* OMITTING POINT 1 Point where no hole is to be made (1)
C* OMITTING POINT 2 Point where no hole is to be made (2)
NOTE
omitting point.
- 282 -
Circle Points: G1215
HOLE POINTS
Data item Meaning
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center of a circle
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center of a circle
R RADIUS Radius of a circle (positive value)
A START POINT ANGLE Central angle of the first hole from the X-axis
(positive or negative value) (initial value = 0)
C NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes to be made (positive value)
SKIP
Data item Meaning
NOTE
omitting point.
- 283 -
Arc Points (Same Interval): G1216
HOLE POSIT
Data item Meaning
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center of an arc
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center of an arc
R RADIUS Radius of an arc (positive value)
C PITCH ANGLE Central angle between two adjacent holes (positive
or negative value)
D NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes to be made (positive value)
SKIP
Data item Meaning
J* OMITTING POINT 4 Point where no hole is to be made (4)
NOTE
omitting point.
- 284 -
Arc Points (Different Interval): G1217
HOLE POS-1
Data item Meaning
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center of an arc
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center of an arc
R RADIUS Radius of an arc (positive value)
HOLE POS-2
Data item Meaning
C* PITCH ANGLE-1 Central angle between the first and second holes
D* PITCH ANGLE-2 Central angle between the second and third holes
E* PITCH ANGLE-3 Central angle between the third and fourth holes
F* PITCH ANGLE-4 Central angle between the fourth and fifth holes
I* PITCH ANGLE-5 Central angle between the fifth and sixth holes
J* PITCH ANGLE-6 Central angle between the sixth and seventh holes
K* PITCH ANGLE-7 Central angle between the seventh and eighth holes
M* PITCH ANGLE-8 Central angle between the eighth and ninth holes
P* PITCH ANGLE-9 Central angle between the ninth and tenth holes
Q* PITCH ANGLE-10 Central angle between the tenth and eleventh holes
- 285 -
1.1.3 Hole Position Block (YZ Plane)
The same hole position block types as for the XY plane explained in the
previous subsection are available for the YZ plane. They are provided
with the following G codes.
The data to be set for the YZ plane is the same as for the XY plane except
that the XY plane is changed to the YZ plane and that the direction in
which the tool moves to cut is changed from the Z-axis to the X-axis.
Random Points : G1310

Linear Points (Same Interval) : G1311
Linear Points (Different Interval) : G1312
Grid Points : G1313
Rectangle Points : G1314
Circle Points : G1315
Arc Points (Same Interval) : G1316
Arc Points (Different Interval) : G1317
- 286 -
1.1.4 Hole Position Block (XC Plane and End Face)
A menu for selecting a hole position block in which the C-axis is used in
making holes is displayed by selecting the "C-axis Figure" tab from the
milling figure menu, using the ← and → cursor keys.
C Axis Hole on Face (Circle Points): G1572
POS / SIZE
Data item Meaning
X X AXIS POS.(RAD.) X coordinate of a hole position (common to all holes)
A START ANGLE Central angle of the first hole form the C0 axis
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
C PITCH ANGLE Amount of movement between two holes along the
C-axis (positive or negative value)
M NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes to be made (positive value)
- 287 -
C Axis Hole on Face (Random Points): G1573
HOLE POS-1
Data item Meaning
H X AXIS POS.1(RAD.) X coordinate of the first hole (radius value)
V C AXIS POS.1 C coordinate of the first hole
A* X AXIS POS.2(RAD.) X coordinate of the second hole (radius value)
C* C AXIS POS.2 C coordinate of the second hole
D* X AXIS POS.3(RAD.) X coordinate of the third hole (radius value)
E* C AXIS POS.3 C coordinate of the third hole
F* X AXIS POS.4(RAD.) X coordinate of the fourth hole (radius value)
I* C AXIS POS.4 C coordinate of the fourth hole
HOLE POS-2
Data item Meaning
J* X AXIS POS.5(RAD.) X coordinate of the fifth hole (radius value)
K* C AXIS POS.5 C coordinate of the fifth hole
M* X AXIS POS.6(RAD.) X coordinate of the sixth hole (radius value)
P* C AXIS POS.6 C coordinate of the sixth hole
Q* X AXIS POS.7(RAD.) X coordinate of the seventh hole (radius value)
R* C AXIS POS.7 C coordinate of the seventh hole
S* X AXIS POS.8(RAD.) X coordinate of the eighth hole (radius value)
T* C AXIS POS.8 C coordinate of the eighth hole
- 288 -
1.1.5 Hole Position Block (ZC Plane and Cylindrical Surface)

The same hole position block types as for the XC plane explained in the
previous subsection are available for the ZC plane. They are provided
with the following G codes.
The data to be set for the ZC plane is the same as for the XC plane except
that the XC plane (blank end face) is changed to the ZC plane (blank
cylindrical surface) and that the direction in which the tool moves to cut
is changed from the Z-axis to the X-axis.
Holes on a cylindrical surface (ZC) figure along the C-axis -

Circle Points: G1672
Holes on a cylindrical surface (ZC) figure along the C-axis -
Random Points: G1673
- 289 -
1.2 HOLE MACHINING BY TURNING (WITH THE TOOL

ROTATED)
1.2.1 Machining Type Blocks for Hole Machining by Turning (with

the Tool Rotated)
NOTE
1 Hole machining by turning (with the tool rotated) is
enabled when bit 1 of parameter No. 27000 = 1.
2 The hole position blocks for hole machining by
turning (with the tool rotated) are the same as those
for hole machining by milling. See the previous
section (Hole Position Block).
Center drilling: G1110
Cutting condition
Data item Meaning
[INITI-2]: All movements between holes, including
the last return, are made as an I point
return.
[REF.] : All movements between holes, including
the last return, are made as an R position
return.
P* DWELL TIME Dwell time at the hole bottom (units of seconds,
positive value). (COPY)
- 290 -
Cutting condition
Data item Meaning
Z APROCH MOTION [Z→X] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the X-axis
direction.
[X→Z] : From the current position to the
the Z-axis direction and then in the X-axis
direction. (initial value)
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
- 291 -
Drilling: G1111
Cutting condition
Data item Meaning
Q* PECKING CUT DEPTH Depth of cut made by one cut (radius value, positive
value) (COPY) (Note)
K GO PAST AMOUNT Length of the incomplete hole portion at the tool tip
(radius value, positive value) (COPY)
Z APROCH MOTION [Z→X] : From the current position to the machining
start point, the tool moves in the Z-axis
direction and then in the X-axis direction.
[X→Z] : From the current position to the machining
(initial value)
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the machining
start point, the tool moves simultaneously
in the X- and Z-axis directions.
NOTE
The system refers to the parameter No.5114 as the
- 292 -
Tapping: G1112
Cutting condition
Data item Meaning
D THREAD LEAD Tapping tool lead (radius value, positive value)
(COPY)
(initial value)
Rigid tapping
Data item Meaning
R TAP TYPE [FLOAT] : Specifies the float tap.
[RIGID] : Specifies the rigid tap.
-1
- 293 -
NOTE
1 When you use Rigid tap mode M code command
(No.5200#0=0), the system refers to No.5210 or
No.5212 as the value of M code. Therefore, please
set No.5210 or No.5212 to suitable value before
machining.
- 294 -
Reaming: G1113
Cutting condition
Data item Meaning
(initial value)
- 295 -
Boring: G1114
Cutting condition
Data item Meaning
position (radius value, positive value)
(initial value)
- 296 -
1.3 FACING
1.3.1 Machining Type Blocks for Facing
Rough: G1020
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER Face mill diameter
NOTE
1 Tab ‘TOOL COND.’ is enabled when bit 0 (TLG) of
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of ‘TOOL DATA’ in Tool Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
T* THICKNESS Face mill diameter
H* FINISH AMOUNT Finishing allowance in facing
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut in the tool radius direction to the next
cutting path
J CUT DEPTH OF AXIS Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting
operation
F FEED RATE – RADIUS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in
the tool radius direction
E FEED RATE – AXIS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in
the tool axis direction
- 297 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
W CUTTING METHOD [SINGLE] : Cutting in the tool radius direction is
always performed in the same
direction.
[ZIGZAG] : Cutting in the tool radius direction is
performed back and forth.
(COPY)
P PATH MOVE METHOD [PULL] : Retracts to point R before moving to the
start point of the next cutting path (in the
tool axis direction).
[KEEP] : Moves to the start point of the next
cutting path directly without retracting to
point R.
Remark1) This data item is indicated only when
[ZIGZAG] is selected for CUTTING
METHOD, and [KEEP] is set
automatically.
Remark2) This data item is enabled when the
parameter No.27030#0(FC0) = 1.
(COPY)
V PATH MOVE FEED RATE Feedrate applicable when the tool moves to the
start point of the next cutting path. Initially, the
feedrate is set to 0, allowing the tool to move at a
rapid traverse rate. (COPY)
METHOD.
C CLEARANCE OF AXIS Distance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cutting start point (point R) in the
tool axis direction (radius value)
Remark) By referring to the parameter No.27009
(Minimum clump value), the system sets
the data as Initial value.
M CLERANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the end of a blank being
machined and the end of the tool placed at the
retract position (radius value)
- 298 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
A CUTTING DIRECTION [RIGHT] : Performs cutting rightward as indicated
in the illustration. When both directions
are selected, cutting for the first cutting
path is performed rightward.
[LEFT] : Performs cutting leftward as indicated in
the illustration. When both directions
path is performed leftward.
[UP] : Performs cutting upward as indicated in
path is performed upward.
[DOWN] : Performs cutting downward as indicated
path is performed downward.
Remark) The actual cutting direction is determined
by the coordinate axis indicated in the
illustration. (COPY)
B CUT DEPTH DIRECTION [RIGHT] : Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path rightward as indicated in
the illustration.
[LEFT] : Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path leftward as indicated in the
illustration.
[UP] : Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path upward as indicated in the
illustration.
[DOWN] : Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path downward as indicated in
the illustration.
Z APROCH MOTION [2 AXES] : When moving from the current
position to the machining start point,
the tool first moves in the machining
plane in two-axis synchronous
operation and then moves along the
tool axis. (initial value)
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current
position to the machining start point in
three-axis synchronous operation.
- 299 -
Finish: G1021
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER Face mill diameter
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut in the tool radius direction to the next
cutting path
F FEED RATE – RADIUS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in
- 300 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
W CUTTING METHOD [SINGLE] : Cutting in the tool radius direction is
always performed in the same
direction.
[ZIGZAG] : Cutting in the tool radius direction is
performed back and forth.
(COPY)
P PATH MOVE METHOD [PULL] : Retracts to point R before moving to the
start point of the next cutting path (in the
tool axis direction).
[KEEP] : Moves to the start point of the next
cutting path directly without retracting to
point R.
METHOD, and [KEEP] is set
automatically.
(COPY)
V PATH MOVE FEED RATE Feedrate applicable when the tool moves to the
start point of the next cutting path. Initially, the
feedrate is set to 0, allowing the tool to move at a
rapid traverse rate. (COPY)
METHOD.
tool axis direction (radius value)
M CLERANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the end of a blank being
machined and the end of the tool placed at the
retract position (radius value)
- 301 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
A CUTTING DIRECTION [RIGHT] : Performs cutting rightward as indicated
path is performed rightward.
[LEFT] : Performs cutting leftward as indicated in
path is performed leftward.
[UP] : Performs cutting upward as indicated in
path is performed upward.
[DOWN] : Performs cutting downward as indicated
path is performed downward.
B CUT DEPTH DIRECTION [RIGHT] : Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path rightward as indicated in
the illustration.
[LEFT] : Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path leftward as indicated in the
illustration.
[UP] : Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path upward as indicated in the
illustration.
[DOWN] : Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path downward as indicated in
the illustration.
- 302 -
1.3.2 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Facing (XY Plane)
Square: G1220 (XY plane)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a figure for facing
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer figure for contouring
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner figure for contouring or
as a figure for pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a figure for grooving
Remark) When facing is selected as machining type,
be sure to select [FACE].
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the final surface for facing (in the tool
axis direction)
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center position of a rectangular
figure
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center position of a rectangular
figure
U LEBGTH FOR X AXIS Length of the side in the X-axis direction (radius value,
positive value)
W LENGTH FOR Y AXIS Length of the side in the Y-axis direction (radius value,
positive value)
R* CORNER RADIUS Radius for corner rounding (positive value)
A* ANGLE Inclination angle of a rectangular figure relative to the
X-axis (positive or negative value)
- 303 -
Circle: G1221 (XY plane)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
axis direction)
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center position of a circular figure
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center position of a circular figure
R RADIUS Radius of a circular figure (radius value, positive
value)
- 304 -
Track: G1222 (XY plane)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
axis direction)
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center position of the left
semicircle
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center position of the left
semicircle
U BETWEEN DISTANCE Distance between the centers of the right and left
semicircles (radius value, positive value)
R RADIUS Radius of the left and right semicircles (radius value,
positive value)
A* ANGLE Inclination angle of a track figure relative to the X-axis.
The blank is regarded as 0 degrees. (positive or
negative value)
- 305 -
1.3.3 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Facing (YZ Plane, XC Plane)
The same fixed-figure block types as for the XY plane explained in

the previous subsection are available for the YZ plane and the XC
plane (polar coordinate interpolation plane). They are provided with
the following G codes.
The data to be set for the YZ and XC planes is the same as for the XY
plane except that the XY plane is changed to the YZ or XC plane and
that the direction in which the tool moves to cut is changed to the X-
axis (YZ plane) or the Z-axis (XC plane).
Square : G1320 (YZ plane)

Circle : G1321 (YZ plane)
Track : G1322 (YZ plane)
Square : G1520 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation plane)
Circle : G1521 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation plane)
Track : G1522 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation plane)
NOTE
When performing machining (polar coordinate
interpolation) on the XC plane, note the following:
(When bit 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 0)
The mode needs to be switched to the polar
coordinate interpolation mode beforehand.
Specifically, enter G12.1 before the machining
type.
Enter G13.1 for canceling polar coordinate
interpolation as required.
G12.1 and G13.1 are automatically output before
and after cycle machining, respectively.
- 306 -
1.3.4 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Facing (XY Plane)

When an arbitrary figure for facing is input, data such as a figure type and
machining reference position is specified in the start point block. Other
data items to be input such as a straight line and arc are exactly the same
as for arbitrary figures of other machining types.
So, this subsection describes only the start point block of an arbitrary
figure for facing.
For other arbitrary figures, see Section 4.4, "INPUT OF ARBITRARY
FIGURES," in Part II.
ELEMENT
Data item Meaning
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner figure for contouring or as
a figure for pocketing
Remark) When facing is selected as machining type, be
sure to select [FACE].
Z BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the final surface for facing (in the tool axis
direction)
- 307 -
1.3.5 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Facing (YZ Plane, XC Plane, ZC

Plane)
The same arbitrary-figure block types as for the XY plane explained

in the previous subsection are available for the YZ plane, the XC
plane (polar coordinate interpolation plane), and ZC plane (cylindrical
surface). Their start points are specified with the following G codes.
The data to be set for the YZ, XC, and ZC planes is the same as for
the XY plane except that the XY plane is changed to the YZ, XC, or
ZC plane and that the direction in which the tool moves to cut is
changed to the X-axis (YZ and ZC planes) or the Z-axis (XC plane).
Start point : G1300 (YZ plane)

Start point : G1500 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation plane)
Start point : G1600 (ZC plane, plane)
NOTE
1 When performing machining (polar coordinate
type.
2 When performing machining (cylindrical
interpolation) on the ZC plane, note the following:
The mode needs to be switched to the cylindrical
Specifically, enter G07.1C (cylinder radius) before
the machining type.
Enter G07.1C0 for canceling cylindrical
G07.1C (cylinder radius) and G07.1C0 are
automatically output before and after cycle
machining, respectively.
- 308 -
1.4 CONTOURING
1.4.1 Machining Type Blocks for Contouring
Outer Wall Rough: G1060

Inner Wall Rough: G1054
Partial Rough: G1068
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER End mill diameter
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND
Data item Meaning
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the bottom in side face
machining (radius value, positive value)
S SIDE THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the side face (radius value,
positive value)
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut per side face machining operation (in
the tool radius direction) (radius value, positive
value)
operation (radius value, positive value)
K* SIDE FINISH AMOUNT Finishing allowance on the side face. The blank is
regarded as 0. (Radius value, positive value)
H* BOTTOM FINISHI AMT. Finishing allowance at the bottom in side face
machining. The blank is regarded as 0. (radius
value, positive value)
- 309 -
CUT COND
Data item Meaning
F FEED RATE- SING.CUT Feedrate applicable when only the one-side cutter
portion of an end mill is used for cutting. This
feedrate is used for cutting in retract operation and
on the side face other than initial cutting.
V FEED RATE- BOTH CUT Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of
an end mill is used for cutting. This feedrate is
used for initial cutting.
the tool axis direction toward the bottom of a side
face being machined
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cut
mode, assuming that the tool is
rotating clockwise.
(COPY)
tool axis direction (radius value, positive value)
P APPROACH TYPE [ARC] : Approaches a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN]: Approaches a side face along the
straight line tangent to the first figure
in side face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Approaches a side face along the
straight line normal to the first figure in
side face cutting.
(COPY)
R APPROACH RAD./DIST. Radius when [ARC] is specified.
Straight line length when [TANGEN] or [VERTIC] is
specified. (radius value, positive value)
A* APPROACH ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specified.
The default is 90 degrees. (positive value)
Remark) This data item is indicated only when
[ARC] is selected for APPROACH TYPE.
- 310 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
Q ESCAPE TYPE [ARC] : Retracts from a side face along an
arc.
[TANGEN]: Retracts from a side face along the
straight line tangent to the last figure
[VERTIC] : Retracts from a side face along the
straight line normal to the last figure in
side face cutting.
(COPY)
X ESCAPE RAD./DIST. Radius when [ARC] is specified.
Y* ESCAPE ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specified.
[ARC] is selected for ESCAPE TYPE.
(COPY)
- 311 -
• Tool path
In-feed machining
in the tool radius
direction
Approach Retract
In-feed machining
in the tool axis
direction
The side-face contour of a machining profile is cut off.

The following tool path is created.
<1> The tool moves to above the approach start point.

<2> The tool moves to the height of the cutting surface.
<3> The tool cuts along the side-face contour of the machining
profile.
The tool performs in-feed machining in the tool radius direction until
the cutting allowance in the tool radius direction is removed.
<4> Steps <2> and <3> are repeated until the cutting allowance in
the tool axis direction is removed.
<5> The tool retracts.
- 312 -
- Approach
First in-feed
machining cycle
in the tool radius
direction
Cutting start point
Approach start point
Clearance Ct in the tool axis direction
Machining profile top

surface height
Amount cut in the Ftm

first in-feed
machining cycle Ft
in the tool axis
direction
<1> The tool moves to the position "machining profile top surface
height + clearance (Ct) in the tool axis direction" by rapid
traverse.
<2> The tool moves to the position "amount to be cut in the first in-
feed machining cycle in the tool axis direction - clearance (Ct) in
the tool axis direction" at the feedrate (Ftm) specified for
movement in the tool axis direction.
<3> The tool cut in to the position "amount to be cut in the first in-
feed machining cycle in the tool axis direction" at the feedrate
(Ft) specified for cutting in the tool axis direction.
<4> The tool approaches, in the tool radius direction, the start point
of the first in-feed machining cycle in the tool radius direction.
- Retraction
Clearance (Ct) in the tool axis direction
Machining profile top surface height
Ftm
<1> The tool moves from the approach end point to the position
"machining profile top surface height + clearance (Ct) in the tool
axis direction" at the feedrate (Ftm) specified for movement in
the tool axis direction.
- 313 -
- In-feed machining in the tool radius direction

Finishing
allowance in the
tool radius
direction
Cutting
allowance in the
tool radius
direction
First in-
feed
machining
cycle
Second in-
feed
machining
Third in-feed machining
Amount to be
cut in each in-
feed machining
cycle in the tool
radius direction
Retraction from the wall at

the end of in-feed machining
Feedrate Fr specified for in the tool radius direction
single-edge thread cutting
Feedrate Fd specified for

double-edge thread cutting
Start and end points of the first in-feed machining cycle

(they coincide in this case)
<1> The tool moves to cut along the contour from the first in-feed
machining cycle start point to the end point at the feedrate (Fs)
specified for single-edge thread cutting.
<2> The tool approaches, using the following method.
When the in-feed machining start point coincides with the in-feed
machining end point:
The tool directly approaches the next in-feed machining start point in
the normal direction at the feedrate (Fd) specified for double-edge
thread cutting.
When the in-feed machining start point does not coincide with the in-
feed machining end point:
The tool approaches the second in-feed machining start point.
<3> The tool moves to cut along the contour of the machining profile
at the feedrate (Fs) specified for single-edge thread cutting.
<4> Steps <2> and <3> are repeated until the cutting allowance
(cutting allowance in the tool radius direction - finishing
allowance) is removed.
- 314 -
Outer Wall Bottom finish : G1061

Inner Wall Bottom finish : G1065
Partial Bottom finish : G1069
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND
Data item Meaning
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the bottom in side face
machining (radius value, positive value)
S SIDE THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the side face (radius value,
positive value)
K* SIDE FINISH AMOUNT Finishing allowance on the side face. The blank
is regarded as 0. (radius value, positive value)
Remark) This data item is used when machining is
to be performed with a small amount of
cutting allowance left.
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut per side face machining operation (in
the tool radius direction) (radius value, positive
value)
- 315 -
CUT COND
Data item Meaning
V FEED RATE- BOTH CUT Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of
E FEED RATE- AXIS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in
face being machined
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
clockwise.
rotating clockwise.
(COPY)
side face cutting.
(COPY)
arc.
side face cutting.
(COPY)
- 316 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
(COPY)
- 317 -
• Tool path
The bottom surface of the side-face contour of the machining profile
is finished.
In-feed machining
in the tool radius
direction
Approach Retract
<1> The tool approaches the approach start point of the machining
profile.
<2> The tool moves to the bottom surface height of the machining
profile.
<3> The tool moves to cut along the side-face contour of the
machining profile.
In-feed machining in the tool radius direction is performed until the
cutting allowance in the tool radius direction is removed.
- 318 -
- Approach
First in-feed
machining cycle in
the tool radius
direction
Cutting start point

surface height
Ftm
Machining profile
bottom surface
Ft height
traverse.
<2> The tool moves to the position "machining profile bottom
surface + cutting allowance (Vt) in the tool axis direction +
clearance (Ct) in the tool axis direction" at the feedrate (Ftm)
specified for movement in the tool axis direction.
<3> The tool moves to the machining profile bottom surface at the
feedrate (Ft) specified for cutting in the tool axis direction.
<4> The tool approaches, in the tool radius direction, the in-feed
machining start point in the tool radius direction.
- 319 -
- Retraction

surface height
Ftm
"machining profile top height + clearance (Ct) in the tool axis
direction" at the feedrate (Ftm) specified for movement in the
tool axis direction.

This movement is the same as for contouring (roughing).
See descriptions about contouring (roughing) for details.
- 320 -
Outer Wall Side finish: G1062

Inner Wall Side finish : G1066
Partial Side finish : G1070
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
I INPUT TYPE [INPUT] : Inputs a cutter compensation value
directly.
[REF.] : Inputs a cutter compensation number to
read a cutter compensation value by
that number.
Remark) This item is indicated only when [INPUT]
is selected for INPUT TYPE.
M CUTTER COMP.NO. Cutter compensation number of an end mill
(positive value)
Remark) This item is indicated only when [REF.] is
selected for INPUT TYPE.
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
S SIDE THICKNESS Cutting allowance in side face finishing (radius
K* SIDE FINISH AMOUNT Finishing allowance of the side face. The blank is
regarded as 0. (radius value, positive value)
Remark) This data item is used when machining is
to be performed with a small amount of
cutting allowance left.
B NUMBER OF FINISHING Number of cuts for finishing (positive value)
Remark) Depth of each cut = (side surplus
thickness)/(number of finishing cuts)
- 321 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
V FEED RATE- BOTH.CUT Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of
face being machined
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
clockwise.
rotating clockwise.
(COPY)
side face cutting.
(COPY)
- 322 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
arc.
side face cutting.
(COPY)
(COPY)
- 323 -
• Tool path
The side-face contour of the machining profile is finished.
Approach Retract
<1> The tool approaches a point above the approach start point.
<2> The tool moves to the bottom surface of the machining profile.
<3> The tool moves to cut along the side-face contour of the
machining profile.
In-feed machining is performed for the cutting allowance (Vt) in the
tool radius direction a specified number of finishing cycles.
- 324 -
- Approach
Cutting start point

surface height
Ftm
Ft
traverse.
surface + finishing allowance (Tt) in the tool axis direction +
clearance (Ct) in the tool axis direction" at the feedrate (Ftm)
specified for movement in the tool axis direction.
surface + finishing allowance (Tt) in the tool axis direction" at
the feedrate (Ft) specified for cutting in the machining profile.
<4> The tool approaches, in the tool radius direction, the in-feed
machining start point in the tool radius direction.
- 325 -
- Retraction

surface height
Ftm
"machining profile top surface height + clearance (Ct) in the tool
axis direction" at the feedrate (Ftm) specified for movement in
the tool axis direction.
Feedrate Fr specified for cutting

in the tool radius direction
Overlapped length
Final finishing cycle
First finishing cycle
Feedrate Frm specified for movement

in the tool radius direction
<1> The tool approaches the cutting start point in the tool radius
direction at the feedrate (Fr) specified for cutting in the tool
radius direction.
<2> The tool moves to cut along the contour from the first in-feed
machining cycle start point to the first in-feed machining cycle
end point at the feedrate (Fr) specified for cutting in the tool
radius direction.
<3> The tool retracts from the cutting end point in the tool radius
direction at the feedrate (Fr) specified for cutting in the tool
radius direction.
<4> The tool approaches the next in-feed machining cycle start point,
using the specified [movement method for in-feed machining].
<5> Steps <2> to <4> are repeated as many times as the required
number of finishing cycles.
- 326 -
Outer Wall Chamfer : G1063

Inner Wall Chamfer : G1067
Partial Chamfer : G1071
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
K TOOL SMALL DIAMETER Diameter of the tip of a chamfering tool (positive
value)
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
S CHAMFER Chamfer length (radius value, positive value)
H EJECTION STROKE Distance between the tip of a chamfering tool and
an actually cut position in the tool axis direction
(radius value, positive value)
F FEED RATE- RADIUS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
clockwise.
rotating clockwise.
(COPY)
- 327 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
side face cutting.
(COPY)
arc.
side face cutting.
(COPY)
(COPY)
- 328 -
• Tool path
<1> The tool moves to the position "cutting start position + clearance
(Cr)" by rapid traverse.
<2> The tool moves to the position "amount to be chamfered (C) +
ejection stroke (P)" at the feedrate (F) specified for cutting.
<3> The tool cuts in to the portion to be chamfered by the cut depth
(Dr) in the tool radius direction at the feedrate (Fd) specified for
both-edge thread cutting.
<4> The tool cuts along the contour of the hole machining profile at
the feedrate (Fr) specified for single-edge thread cutting.
<5> Steps <3> and <4> are repeated until only the finishing
allowance (Tr) in the tool radius direction is left uncut.
<6> The tool turns around the finishing allowance (Tr) in the tool
radius direction to perform finishing at the feedrate (Ff)
specified for finishing.
<7> The tool moves to the position "cut-in start position + clearance
(Cr)" by rapid traverse.
- 329 -
1.4.2 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Contouring (XY Plane)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer figure for
contouring
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner figure for
contouring or as a figure for
pocketing
Remark) When contouring is selected as
machining type, select [CONVEX] if an
outer figure is to be machined; if an inner
figure is to be machined, select
[CONCAVE].
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the top surface or the bottom of the
side face of a part to be subject to contouring (in
the tool axis direction)
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece is selected as
the BASE POSITION, specify the distance to the
bottom of the side face by using a negative value
(radius value). → Depth
When the bottom of a side face is selected as the
BASE POSITION, specify the distance to the top
surface of the workpiece by using a positive value
(radius value). → Height
figure
figure
U LENGTH FOR X AXIS Length of the side in the X-axis direction (radius
W LENGTH FOR Y AXIS Length of the side in the Y-axis direction (radius
A* ANGLE Inclination angle of a rectangular figure relative to
the X-axis (positive or negative value)
- 330 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
contouring
pocketing
[CONCAVE].
side face of a part to be subject to contouring (in
the tool axis direction)
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center position of a circular
figure
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center position of a circular
figure
value)
- 331 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
contouring
pocketing
[CONCAVE].
side face of a part to be subject to contouring(in the
tool axis direction)
semicircle
semicircle
R RADIUS Radius of the left and right semicircles (radius
A* ANGLE Inclination angle of a track figure relative to the X-
axis (positive or negative value)
- 332 -
1.4.3 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Contouring (YZ Plane, XC

Plane)


Square : G1520 (XC plane), polar coordinate interpolation plane)
Circle : G1521 (XC plane), polar coordinate interpolation plane)
Track : G1522 (XC plane), polar coordinate interpolation plane)
NOTE
type.
- 333 -
1.4.4 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Contouring (XY Plane)

When an arbitrary figure for contouring is input, data such as a figure
type and machining reference position is specified in the start point block.
Other data items to be input such as a straight line and arc are exactly the
same as for arbitrary figures of other machining types.
figure for contouring.
ELEMENT
Data item Meaning
[OPEN] : Used when only one side is cut during
contouring
Remark) When contouring is specified as a machining
type, one of [CONVEX], [CONCAVE], and
[OPEN] must be selected.
Z BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the top surface or the bottom of the side
face of a part to be subject to contouring (tool axis
direction)
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece is selected as the
BASE POSITION, specify the distance to the bottom of
the side face by using a negative value (radius value). →
Depth
When the bottom of a side face is selected as the BASE
POSITION, specify the distance to the top surface of the
workpiece by using a positive value (radius value). →
Height
- 334 -
ELEMENT
Data item Meaning
P FIGURE [RIGHT] : The right side of an entered figure as viewed
ATTRIBUTE with respect to the direction of movement is
cut. (initial value)
[LEFT] : The left side of an entered figure as viewed
with respect to the direction of movement is
cut. (initial value)
Remark) These items are displayed only when [OPEN] is
selected as a figure type.
- 335 -
1.4.5 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Contouring (YZ Plane, XC Plane,

ZC Plane)


Start point : G1600 (ZC plane, cylindrical surface)
NOTE
type.
the machining type.
- 336 -
1.5 POCKETING
1.5.1 Machining Type Blocks for Pocketing
Rough: G1040
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
T* BOTTOM THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the bottom in side face

S* SIDE THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the side face. The blank is
Remark) When both the side surplus thickness and
bottom surplus thickness are omitted, an
entire pocket area is cut.
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut on the side face (tool radius direction)
per cutting operation (radius value, positive value)
- 337 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
V FEED RATE- BOTH.CUT Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of an
end mill is used for cutting. This feedrate is used for
initial cutting.
E FEED RATE- AXIS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the
tool axis direction toward the bottom of a side face
being machined
NOTE
When a non-zero value is input for just one of the
data items, side surplus thickness and bottom
surplus thickness, cutting is performed for the input
surplus thickness, and for the omitted surplus
thickness, cutting operation is not performed on the
assumption that the omitted surplus thickness is 0.
When non-zero values are input for both the side
surplus thickness and bottom surplus thickness,
cutting is performed for each surplus thickness.
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
clockwise.
rotating clockwise.
(COPY)
B CLEARANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the wall of a pocket and a tool
retract position in the tool radius direction (radius
Remark1) When one pocket cutting operation is
completed, the tool performs a retract
operation in the tool axis direction from the
side face of the pocket by this clearance
amount.
Remark2) By referring to the parameter No.27009
- 338 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
moves in the machining plane in two-
axis synchronous operation and then
moves along the tool axis. (initial value)
A* CUT ANGLE Angle at which the tool cuts into the pocket obliquely.
The blank is regarded as 0 degrees. (in one-degree
increments, positive value)
Remark) By performing cutting also using the side
face of an end mill, the load on the tool can
be reduced. (COPY)
P* START PT.(1ST AXIS) 1st-axis coordinate of the cutting start point of
pocketing. When omitting this item, also omit the
2nd-axis coordinate. In this case, the coordinates of
the start point are determined automatically.
Remark1) The 1st axis is the X-axis on the XY plane,
the Y-axis on the YZ plane, the X-axis on
the XC plane, or the Z-axis on the ZC
plane.
Remark2) This item is enable when the parameter
No. 27060#7(PR7) = 1.
Q* START PT.(2ND AXIS) 2nd-axis coordinate of the cutting start point of
pocketing. When this item is omitted, the coordinate
is determined automatically.
Remark1) The 2nd axis is the Y-axis on the XY
plane, the Z-axis on the YZ plane, the C-
axis on the XC plane, or the C-axis on the
ZC plane.
No. 27060#7(PR7) = 1.
- 339 -
• Tool path
The inside of a pocket machining profile is cut off in a spiral manner.
More than one island machining profile and more than one cavity
machining profile can be defined for a pocket machining profile. The
island machining profiles are left uncut.
The cavity machining profiles are detoured so that they will not be
cut.
The tool path is created in such a way that an anticipated interference
with pocket machining profiles or island machining profiles can be
avoided.
The created tool path is effective because retraction in the tool axis
direction is avoided as much as possible.
For this tool path, in-feed machining in the tool axis direction is
possible.
Only specified cutting allowances can be cut off.
The direction of cutting can be either up-cut or down-cut. The
direction of cutting is controlled automatically around islands.
It is possible to cut in from the inside and outside of the machining
profile.
If there is a portion left uncut at a corner, it is possible to
automatically discriminate the uncut portion and cut it off.
It is possible to cut in at an arbitrary angle in the tool axis direction.
It is possible to specify an arbitrary position as a cutting start point.
It is possible to determine a cutting start point automatically.
It is possible to select a movement method for tool movement.
It is possible to control automatically a cut-in depth on the island
machining profile top surface automatically.
It is possible to set up cutting conditions, such as finishing allowance
for island machining profiles, for each island machining profile.
- 340 -
In the following pocket machining profile, which has a pocket through

which the tool can pass, the tool is lifted automatically to cut only a
range that can be cut.
If there is more than one cut in the tool axis direction, each range is
cut completely before another.
A contour specified as an open element of a pocket machining profile

is cut off as shown below.
- 341 -
Bottom Finish: G1041
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
T* BOTTOM THICKNESS Cutting allowance at the bottom of a pocket. The
blank is regarded as 0. (radius value, positive value)
K* SIDE FINISH AMOUNT Finishing allowance on the side face of a pocket.
The blank is regarded as 0. (radius value, positive
value)
H* BOTTOM FINISHI AMT. Finishing allowance at the bottom of a pocket. The
initial cutting.
being machined
- 342 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
clockwise.
rotating clockwise.
(COPY)
B CLEARANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the wall of a pocket and a tool
Remark1) When one pocket cutting operation is
side face of the pocket by this clearance
amount.
A* CUT ANGLE Angle at which the tool cuts into the pocket obliquely.
The blank is regarded as 0 degrees. (in one-degree
increments, positive value)
Remark) By performing cutting also using the side
face of an end mill, the load on the tool can
be reduced. (COPY)
- 343 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
P* START PT.(1ST AXIS) 1st-axis coordinate of the cutting start point of
pocketing. When omitting this item, also omit the
2nd-axis coordinate. In this case, the coordinates of
the start point are determined automatically.
Remark1) The 1st axis is the X-axis on the XY plane,
the Y-axis on the YZ plane, the X-axis on
the XC plane, or the Z-axis on the ZC
plane.
No. 27060#7(PR7) = 1.
Q* START PT.(2ND AXIS) 2nd-axis coordinate of the cutting start point of
pocketing. When this item is omitted, the coordinate
is determined automatically.
Remark1) The 2nd axis is the Y-axis on the XY
plane, the Z-axis on the YZ plane, the C-
axis on the XC plane, or the C-axis on the
ZC plane.
No. 27060#7(PR7) = 1.
- 344 -
• Tool path
The bottom surface of a pocket machining profile is finished in a

spiral manner.
The tool path for it is the same as for pocketing (roughing).
See descriptions about pocketing (roughing) for details.
No in-feed machining in the tool axis direction is performed, though.
The top surface of island machining profiles is not cut off either.
- 345 -
Side face finish: G1042
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
I INPUT [INPUT] : Inputs a cutter compensation value directly.
read a cutter compensation value by that
number.
Remark) This item is indicated only when [INPUT] is
selected for INPUT.
M CUTTER COMP.NO. Cutter compensation number of an end mill (positive
value)
selected for INPUT.
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
K* SIDE FINISH AMOUNT Finishing allowance on the side face of a pocket. The
H* BOTTOM FINISHI AMT. Finishing allowance at the bottom of a pocket. The
portion of an end mill is used for cutting. This feedrate
is used for cutting in retract operation and on the side
face other than initial cutting.
initial cutting.
being machined
- 346 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cut mode,
clockwise.
(COPY)
machined and a cutting start point (point R) in the tool
axis direction (radius value, positive value)
(Minimum clump value), the system sets the
data as Initial value.
[TANGEN]: Approaches a side face along the straight
line tangent to the first figure in side face
cutting.
[VERTIC] : Approaches a side face along the straight
line normal to the first figure in side face
cutting.
(COPY)
A* APPROACH ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specified. The
default is 90 degrees. (positive value)
Remark) This data item is indicated only when [ARC] is
selected for APPROACH TYPE. (COPY)
Q ESCAPE TYPE [ARC] : Retracts from a side face along an arc.
straight line tangent to the last figure in
side face cutting.
side face cutting.
(COPY)
- 347 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
Y* ESCAPE ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specified. The
Remark) This data item is indicated only when [ARC]
is selected for ESCAPE TYPE. (COPY)
- 348 -
• Tool path
The side-face contour of pocket and island machining profiles is

finished. The tool path for it is the same as for contouring (side-face
finishing).
See descriptions about contouring (side-face finishing) for details.
The specifications for the following points differ in part, though.

No in-feed machining is performed in the tool radius direction or tool
axis direction.
Even if it is anticipated that the tool may interfere with a pocket or
island machining profile during finishing, no tool path that can avoid
interference is created.
- 349 -
Chamfer: G1043
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
S CHAMFER AMOUNT Chamfer length (radius value, positive value)
H EJECTION STROKE Distance between the tip of a chamfering tool and an
actually cut position in the tool axis direction (radius
F FEED RATE - RADIUS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the
tool radius direction
E FEED RATE - AXIS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the
tool axis direction
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cut mode,
clockwise.
(COPY)
- 350 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
cutting.
cutting.
(COPY)
side face cutting.
side face cutting.
(COPY)
- 351 -
• Tool path
The top surface of a wall of a pocket is chamfered. The tool path for it
is the same as for contouring (chamfering).
See descriptions about contouring (chamfering) for details.
- 352 -
1.5.2 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Pocketing (XY Plane)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner figure for contouring
or as a figure for pocketing
Remark) When pocketing is selected as machining
type, be sure to select [CONCAVE].
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the top surface of a workpiece subject
to pocketing or the bottom of a pocket (in the tool axis
direction)
a pocket by using a negative value (radius value).
→ Depth
When the bottom of a pocket is selected as the BASE
POSITION, specify the distance to the top surface of
the pocket by using a positive value (radius value).
→ Height
figure
figure
U LENGTH FOR X AXIS Length of the side in the X-axis direction (radius value,
positive value)
positive value)
- 353 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the top surface of a workpiece subject
to pocketing or the bottom of a pocket (in the tool axis
direction)
a pocket by using a negative value (radius value).
→ Depth
POSITION, specify the distance to the top surface of
the pocket by using a positive value (radius value).
→ Height
value)
- 354 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the top surface of a workpiece
subject to pocketing or the bottom of a pocket (in the
bottom of a pocket by using a negative value (radius
value). → Depth
When the bottom of a pocket is selected as the
surface of the pocket by using a positive value
semicircle
semicircle
positive value)
A* ANGLE Inclination angle of a track figure relative to the X-
- 355 -
1.5.3 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Pocketing (YZ Plane, XC Plane)


Square : G1520 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation plane)
Circle : G1521 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation plane)
Track : G1522 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation plane)
NOTE
type.
- 356 -
1.5.4 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Pocketing (XY Plane)
When an arbitrary figure for pocketing is input, data such as a figure

type and machining reference position is specified in the start point
block. Other data items to be input such as a straight line and arc are
exactly the same as for arbitrary figures of other machining types.
figure for pocketing.
For other arbitrary figures, see Section 5, "INPUT OF ARBITRARY
ELEMENT
Data item Meaning
Remark) When pocketing is selected as machining type,
be sure to select [CONCAVE].
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the top surface of a workpiece subject to
pocketing or the bottom of a pocket (in the tool axis
direction)
BASE POSITION, specify the distance to the bottom of a
pocket by using a negative value (radius value). → Depth
pocket by using a positive value (radius value). → Height
- 357 -
Input of Island :
After inputting the outer wall figure of Pocket, the following screen is
displayed by pushing the soft-key [CREATE].
If there is a island, push the soft-key [ISLAND] in order to input the

island figure. The following START POINT screen is displayed.
As to the input data item [FIGURE TYPE] is set “CONVEX”
automatically. ( When a outer wall, it is set “CONCAV”.)
After that, input the island figure as the same of a outer wall figure.
NOTE
As to the soft-key [NXTFIG], it is used in the case of
inputting the other pocket figure one after another.
- 358 -
1.5.5 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Pocketing (YZ Plane, XC Plane, ZC

Plane)


NOTE
type.
the machining type.
- 359 -
1.6 GROOVING
1.6.1 Machining Type Blocks for Grooving
Roughing: G1050
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
H* BOTTOM FINISH AMT. Finishing allowance at the bottom in side face
- 360 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
initial cutting.
being machined
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cutting
rotating clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cutting
rotating clockwise.
(COPY)
B CLEARANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the wall of a groove and a tool
Remark1) When one groove cutting operation is
side face of the groove by this clearance
amount.
- 361 -
• Tool path
The following tool path is created to cut off the inside of a groove
machining profile.
In-feed machining in the tool radius direction
Approach Retract
In-feed machining in the

tool axis direction
<1> The tool approaches a point above the cutting start point of a
groove machining profile.
- 362 -
<2> The tool cuts in the groove machining profile in the tool radius
direction.
<3> The tool cuts in the groove machining profile in the tool axis
direction.
<4> Step <2> and <3> are repeated until the cutting allowance is
removed.
- Approach
Cutting start point
Clearance Ct in the tool

axis direction
Amount to be cut in the first in-feed
Ft machining cycle in the tool axis
direction
Groove machining
profile top surface
height
<1> The tool moves to the position "groove machining profile top
surface height + clearance (Ct) in the tool axis direction" by
rapid traverse.
<2> The tool cuts in by the amount to be cut in the first in-feed
machining cycle in the tool axis direction at the feedrate (Ft)
specified for cutting in the tool axis direction.
- 363 -
- Retract
Ftm
Clearance Ct in the tool axis

direction
Groove machining profile

bottom surface
heightdirection
<1> The tool retracts from the groove machining profile bottom
surface height to the position "groove machining profile top
surface height + clearance (Ct) in the tool axis direction" at the
feedrate (Ftm) specified for movement in the tool axis direction.
- 364 -
Bottom face finishing: G1051
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
T* BOTTOM THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the bottom of a groove. The
blank is regarded as 0. (radius value, positive
value)
H* BOTTOM FINISHI AMT. Finishing allowance of the bottom of a groove.
value)
V FEED RATE- BOTH.CUT Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of
face being machined
- 365 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cutting
rotating clockwise.
rotating clockwise.
(COPY)
B CLEARANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the wall of a groove and a tool
Remark1) When one groove cutting operation is
side face of the groove by this clearance
amount.
- 366 -
• Tool path
The following tool path is created to cut off the inside of a groove
machining profile.
In-feed machining in the tool

radius direction
Approach Retract
<1> The tool approaches a point above the cutting start point of a
groove machining profile.
<2> The tool cuts in the groove machining profile in the tool radius
direction.
- 367 -

- Approach
Cutting start point

direction
Groove Ftm Ct + cutting allowance in the

machining profile tool axis direction
top surface
height Groove machining profile
Ft bottom surface height
<1> The tool moves to the position "groove machining profile top
traverse.
<2> The tool moves to the position "groove machining profile bottom
feedrate (Ftm) specified for cutting in the tool axis direction.
<3> The tool cuts in to the height of the groove machining profile
bottom surface at the feedrate (Ft) specified for cutting in the
tool axis direction.
- Retract

direction
Ftm
Groove machining profile

bottom surface height
<1> The tool retracts from the height of the groove machining profile
bottom surface to the position "groove machining profile top
feedrate (Ftm) specified for movement in the tool axis direction.

This operation is the same as grooving (roughing).
See descriptions about grooving (roughing) for details.
- 368 -
Side face finishing: G1052
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
I INPUT [INPUT] : Inputs a cutter compensation value directly.
read a cutter compensation value by that
number.
Remark) This item is indicated only when [INPUT] is
selected for INPUT.
M CUTTER COMP.NO. Cutter compensation number of an end mill (positive
value)
selected for INPUT.
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
S* SIDE THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the side face. The blank is
B NUMBER OF FINISHING Number of cuts for finishing (positive value)
Remark) Depth of each cut = (side surplus
thickness)/(number of finishing cuts)
- 369 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
F FEED RATE-SING.CUT Feedrate applicable when only the one-side cutter
portion of an end mill is used for cutting. This feedrate
is used for cutting in retract operation and on the side
face other than initial cutting.
initial cutting.
being machined
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cutting mode,
clockwise.
mode, assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwise.
(COPY)
cutting.
cutting.
(COPY)
- 370 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
side face cutting.
side face cutting.
(COPY)
is selected for ESCAPE TYPE.
(COPY)
- 371 -
• Tool path
The side-face contour of a groove machining profile is finished.

The tool path for it is the same as for contouring (side-face finishing).
See descriptions about contouring (side-face finishing) for details.
- 372 -
Chamfer: G1053
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
S CHAMFER AMOUNT Chamfer length (radius value, positive value)
H EJECTION STROKE Distance between the tip of a chamfering tool and
an actually cut position in the tool axis direction
F FEED RATE - RADIUS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in
E FEED RATE - AXIS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cutting mode,
clockwise.
mode, assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwise.
(COPY)
- 373 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
cutting.
cutting.
(COPY)
side face cutting.
side face cutting.
(COPY)
- 374 -
• Tool path
The top surface of a wall of a groove is chamfered. The tool path for
it is the same as for contouring (chamfering).
See descriptions abut contouring (chamfering) for details.
- 375 -
1.6.2 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Grooving (XY Plane)

As fixed form figures for grooving, a "square", "circle", "track", and
"radial grooves" are available. When any of these pattern figures is
specified, a groove with a specified width is cut along the contour.
NOTE
Each of a "square", "circle", and "track" is a closed
figure. In actual grooving, sets of a start point and
end point are determined, and cutting from the start
point to the end point of a set is repeated.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
Remark) When grooving is selected as machining
type, be sure to select [GROOVE].
side face of a part to be subject to contouring (in the
the side face by using a negative value (radius value).
→ Depth
figure
figure
U LENGTH FOR X AXIS Length of the side in the X-axis direction (radius value,
positive value)
- 376 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
positive value)
D GROOVE WIDTH Groove width (radius value, positive value)
- 377 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
Remark) When grooving is selected as machining
type, be sure to select [GROOVE].
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top
surface of a workpiece subject to grooving (in the
bottom of the groove by using a negative value
When the bottom of a groove is selected as the
surface of the groove by using a positive value
value)
- 378 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
Remark) When grooving is selected as machining type,
be sure to select [GROOVE].
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top surface
of a workpiece subject to grooving (in the tool axis
direction)
the groove by using a negative value (radius value).
→ Depth
When the bottom of a groove is selected as the BASE
groove by using a positive value (radius value).
→ Height
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center position of a left semicircle
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center position of a left semicircle
positive value)
A* ANGLE Inclination angle of a track figure relative to the X-axis
- 379 -
Radial grooves: G1223 (XY plane)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top surface of
a workpiece subject to grooving (in the tool axis direction)
BASE POSITION, specify the distance to the bottom of the
groove by using a negative value (radius value). → Depth
groove by using a positive value (radius value). → Height
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center position of a circle where radial
grooves are placed
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center position of a circle where radial
grooves are placed
U BETWEEN DISTANCE Distance between the centers of two semicircles along a
radial groove (in a track figure) (radius value, positive value)
D GROOVE WIDTH Width of a radial groove (radius value, positive value)
E* GROOVE ANGLE Groove inclination angle in an arc where radial grooves are
placed, in the radial direction (positive or negative value)
R RADIUS Radius of an arc where radial grooves are placed (radius
A* START ANGLE Center angle of the first groove position relative to the X-
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
C* PITCH ANGLE Center angle formed by two adjacent grooves (positive or
negative value)
M* BROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves to be cut (positive value)
- 380 -
1.6.3 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Grooving (YZ Plane, XC Plane)


Radial groove : G1323 (YZ plane)
Square : G1520 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation
plane)
Circle : G1521 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation
plane)
Track : G1522 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation
plane)
Radial groove : G1523 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation
plane)
NOTE
type.
- 381 -
1.6.4 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Grooving (XY Plane)

When an arbitrary figure for grooving is input, data such as a figure type
and machining reference position is specified in the start point block.
Other data items to be input such as a straight line and arc are exactly the
same as for arbitrary figures of other machining types.
figure for pocketing.
FIGURES", in Part II.
When an arbitrary figure is specified for grooving, a groove with a
specified width is cut along the arbitrary figure line.
ELEMENT
Data item Meaning
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner figure for contouring or as a
figure for pocketing
Remark) When grooving is selected as machining type, be
sure to select [GROOVE].
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top surface of
a workpiece subject to grooving (in the tool axis direction)
BASE POSITION, specify the distance to the bottom of the
groove by using a negative value (radius value). → Depth
groove by using a positive value (radius value). → Height
- 382 -
1.6.5 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Grooving (YZ Plane, XC Plane, ZC

Plane)


NOTE
type.
the machining type.
- 383 -
1.7 C-AXIS GROOVING
1.7.1 Machining Type Blocks for C-axis Grooving
Roughing: G1056
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
J* CUT DEPTH OF AXIS Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting
operation. By default, one cutting operation is
used. (radius value, positive value)
F FEED RATE- RADIUS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in
the side face direction of the end mill
E FEEDRATE - AXIS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in
face being machined
- 384 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
- 385 -
1.7.2 Figure Blocks for C-axis Grooving

As C-axis grooving figures, a "C-axis groove on the polar coordinate
plane (XC plane)", "X-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane (XC
plane)", "C-axis groove on the cylindrical surface (ZC plane)", and "Z-
axis groove on the cylindrical surface (ZC plane)" are available. When
any of these figures is specified, a groove with the diameter as large as
the end mill diameter is cut.
In C-axis grooving, in-feed cutting in the tool axis direction is performed,
but in-feed cutting in the width direction is not performed.
NOTE
C-axis grooving uses neither polar coordinate
interpolation nor cylinder interpolation. So, it is
unnecessary to switch to the polar coordinate
interpolation or cylinder interpolation mode.
- 386 -
C-axis groove: G1570 (XC plane, end face)
On the end face of a workpiece, circular grooves are cut by rotating the
C-axis with the X-axis position of the tool fixed. Multiple grooves of the
same figure can be cut.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
direction)
→ Depth
→ Height
X X AXIS POS.(RAD.) X coordinate of the center line of a groove (radius value)
Q GROOVE ANGLE Center angle formed by the start point (tool center) and
end point (tool center) of a groove (positive or negative
value)
A START ANGLE C coordinate of the start point (tool center) of the first
groove
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
C* PITCH ANGLE Center angle formed by the start points (tool centers) of
two adjacent grooves (positive or negative value)
M* GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves to be cut (positive value)
- 387 -
X-axis groove: G1571 (XC plane, end face)
On the end face of a workpiece, radial grooves are cut by moving the tool
in the X-axis direction with the C-axis position fixed. Multiple grooves of
the same figure can be cut.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
direction)
the groove by using a negative value (radius value). →
Depth
groove by using a positive value (radius value). →
Height
X X AXIS POS.(RAD.) X coordinate of the start point of a groove (radius value)
P GROOVE LENGTH Distance between the start point (tool center) and end
point (tool center) of a groove (radius value,
positive/negative value)
groove
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
- 388 -
C-axis groove: G1670 (cylindrical surface)
On the peripheral surface of a workpiece, grooves are cut by rotating the

C-axis with the Z-axis position of the tool fixed. Multiple grooves of the
same figure can be cut.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION X coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top surface
direction)
→ Depth
→ Height
Z Z AXIS POS. Z coordinate of the center line of a groove
Q GROOVE ANGLE Center angle formed by the start point (tool center) and
end point (tool center) of a groove (positive or negative
value)
groove
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
- 389 -
Z-axis groove: G1671 (cylindrical surface)
On the peripheral surface of a workpiece, straight grooves are cut by

moving the tool in the Z-axis direction with the C-axis position fixed.
Multiple grooves of the same figure can be cut.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION X coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top
surface of a workpiece subject to grooving (in the
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece is selected
as the BASE POSITION, specify the distance to
the bottom of the groove by using a negative value
When the bottom of a groove is selected as the
surface of the groove by using a positive value
Z Z AXIS POS. Z coordinate of the start point of a groove
P GROOVE LENGTH Distance between the start point (tool center) and
end point (tool center) of a groove (radius value,
positive/negative value)
A START ANGLE C coordinate of the start point (tool center) of the
first groove
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
C* PITCH ANGLE Center angle formed by the start points (tool
centers) of two adjacent grooves (positive or
negative value)
- 390 -
1.8 REAR END FACING BY MILLING
1.8.1 Rear End Facing
By setting bit 4 of parameter No. 27000 to 1, the input item "FACE

POSITION" is displayed on the figure menu for milling below. By
entering this data, rear end facing is enabled.
1. Arbitrary-figure (XY plane) - Start point : G1200

2. Hole position (XY plane) - Random points : G1210
3. Hole position (XY plane) - Linear points (same interval) : G1211
4. Hole position (XY plane) - Linear points (different interval) :
G1212
5. Hole position (XY plane) - Grid points : G1213
6. Hole position (XY plane) - Rectangle points : G1214
7. Hole position (XY plane) - Circle points : G1215
8. Hole position (XY plane) - Arc points (same interval): G1216
9. Hole position (XY plane) - Arc points (different interval) :
G1217
10. Fixed-figure (XY plane) - Rectangle : G1220
11. Fixed-figure (XY plane) - Circle : G1221
12. Fixed-figure (XY plane) - Track : G1222
13. Fixed-figure (XY plane) - Radial groove : G1223
14. Arbitrary-figure (XC plane) - Start point : G1500
15. Fixed-figure (XC plane) - Rectangle : G1520
16. Fixed-figure (XC plane) - Circle : G1521
17. Fixed-figure (XC plane) - Track : G1522
18. Fixed-figure (XC plane) - Radial groove : G1523
19. C-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane: G1570
20. X-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane : G1571
21. C-axis hole on the polar coordinate plane (circle points) : G1572
22. C-axis hole on the polar coordinate plane (random points) :
G1573
- 391 -
Example) C-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane: G1570
FACE POSIT
Data item Meaning
Z FACE POSITION [+FACE ]: References the figure below (+ end face).
[-FACE ]: References the figure below (- end face).
Reference position Reference position
(-) Depth Depth (-)
+Z +Z
(+) Height Height (+)
+ end face - end face
(-) Depth Depth (-)
+Z +Z
- end face + end face
- 392 -
1.9 ADDRESS SETTING OF ROTATION AXIS
1.9.1 Support for C-axis Machining with Rotation Axis
By setting bit 0 of parameter No. 27001 to 1, the input item

"ROTATION AXIS NAME" is displayed on the figure menu for
milling below. By entering this data, C-axis machining using a
rotation axis is enabled.
1. Rectangle on the polar coordinate plane: G1520

2. Circle on the polar coordinate plane : G1521
3. Track on the polar coordinate plane : G1522
4. Radial groove on the polar coordinate plane : G1523
5. C-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane: G1570
6. X-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane: G1571
7. C-axis hole on the polar coordinate plane (circle points) : G1572
8. C-axis hole on the polar coordinate plane (random points) :
G1573
9. C-axis groove on the cylindrical surface : G1670
10. X-axis groove on the cylindrical surface : G1671
11. C-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (circle points) : G1672
12. C-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (random points) : G1673
13. Arbitrary-figure on the end face : G1500
- 393 -
Example) C-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane: G1570
ROT. AXIS
Data item Meaning
Y ROTATION AXIS NAME When bit 1 of parameter No. 27001 #1 = 1
[C]: The rotation axis is the C-axis.
[A]: The rotation axis is the A-axis.
When bit 2 of parameter No. 27001 #2 = 1
[B]: The rotation axis is the B-axis.
When bit 3 of parameter No. 27001 #3 = 1
[E]: The rotation axis is the E-axis.
NOTE
This data item is enabled when the parameter
No.27001#0 = 1.
- 394 -
1.10 C-AXIS CLAMPING M CODE OUTPUT
1.10.1 Outline
C axis clamping and unclamping M codes are automatically output in

C axis cycles as followings, which position C axis in the cycle
motion.
* C axis represents a rotating axis around Z axis in this

specificatioms.
(1) Hole machining cycles
In hole machining cycles combined with following figures, C
axis clamping and unclamping M codes are automatically output.
a) C-axis hole on the polar coordinate plane (circle points)

: G1572
b) C-axis hole on the polar coordinate plane (random points)
: G1573
c) C-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (circle points)
: G1672
d) C-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (random points)
: G1673
(2) Grooving cycles

In grooving cycles combined with following figures, C axis
clamping and unclamping M codes are automatically output.
a) X-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane : G1571

b) Z-axis groove on the cylindrical surface : G1671
1.10.2 Value of M Code Output
M code set in following parameters are output

When zero is set, M code is not output.
(1) C axis clamping M code for main spindle

: Parameter No.27005
(2) C axis unclamping M code for main spindle
(3) C axis clamping M code for sub spindle
(4) C axis unclamping M code for sub spindle
- 395 -
1.10.3 Distinction between Main and Sub Spindle
When an axis name “C” is specified in figure command and no axis

name is specified, M code set in parameter No.27005 or 27006 for
main spindle is output.
When an axis name “A”, “B”, or “E” is specified in figure command,

M code set in parameter No.27011 or 27012 for sub spindle is output.
1.10.4 Position of M Code Output
(1) Hole machining cycle
G90
G17
Mb ........................................................................................... *1
G00 X(x1) C(c1) Z(I point)
G99
G81 Z(depth) R(R point) F(feed) Ma ........................................ *1
Mb
X(x2) C(c2) Ma ......................................................................... *1
Mb
X(x3) C(c3) Ma ......................................................................... *1
Mb
G80
G00 Z(I point)
*1 Ma means C axis clamping M code, Mb means C axis

unclamping one.
a, b should be set in parameters No.27005, No.27006,
No.27011 and No.27012.
When value of the parameter is zero, no M code is output.
(2) Grooving Cycle
a) X-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane : G1571
G1056J10.C2.F100.E100.Z2
C axis grooving cycle command
G1571B0.L-10.X40.P20.A0.C120.M2.Z1.Y1.
X-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane
In case above commands are specified,

C axis unclampin M code is output at the beginning of a
cycle,
C axis clamping M code is output before cutting motion,
and C axis unclamping M code is output after cutting
motion during a cycle
- 396 -
Mb .................................................................................. * 1
G17
G0X80.C0.
G0Z2.
Ma .................................................................................. * 1
G1Z-10.F100.
G1X40.F100.
G1Z2.F100.
Mb .................................................................................. * 1
G17
G0X80.C120.
G0Z2.
Ma .................................................................................. * 1
G1Z-10.F100.
G1X40.F100.
G1Z2.F100.
Mb .................................................................................. * 1

un clamping one.
No.27011 and No.27012.
When value of the parameter is zero, no M code is
output.
b) Z-axis groove on the cylindrical surface : G1671
G1056J10.C2.F100.E100.Z2.
C axis grooving command
G1671B50.L-10.Z-30.P20.A0.C120.M2.Y1.
Z-axis groove on the cylindrical surface
In case above commands are specified,

C axis unclampin M code is output at the beginning of a
cycle,
C axis clamping M code is output before cutting motion,
and C axis unclamping M code is output after cutting
motion during a cycle
Mb .................................................................................. * 1
G19
G0Z-30.C0.
G0X104.
Ma .................................................................................. * 1
G1X80.F100.
G1Z-50.F100.
G1X104.F100.
Mb .................................................................................. * 1
G19
G0Z-30.C120.
G0X104.
Ma .................................................................................. * 1
- 397 -
G1X80.F100.
G1Z-50.F100.
G1X104.F100.
Mb .................................................................................. * 1

un clamping one.
No.27011 and No.27012. When value of the parameter
is zero, no M code is output.
- 398 -
TURNOPEEZG44 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
2 TURNING
With Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, the cycles motions listed below are available
for turning.
Hole machining (workpiece rotation)

G1100 Center drilling
G1101 Drilling
Machining type block G1102 Tapping
G1103 Reaming
G1104 Boring
Turning
G1120 Outer surface roughing
G1121 Inner surface roughing
G1122 End face roughing
G1123 Outer surface semifinishing
Machining type block G1124 Inner surface semifinishing
G1125 End face semifinishing
G1126 Outer surface finishing
G1127 Inner surface finishing
G1128 End face finishing
G1450 Start point
G1451 Straight line
G1452 Arc (CW)
Turning figure block
G1453 Arc (CCW)
(ZX plane)
G1454 Chamfer
G1456 End
Turning groove
G1130 Outer surface roughing
G1131 Inner surface roughing
G1132 End face roughing
G1133 Outer surface roughing and finishing
Machining type block G1134 Inner surface roughing and finishing
G1135 End face roughing and finishing
G1136 Outer surface finishing
G1137 Inner surface finishing
G1138 End face finishing
G1470 Outer normal groove
G1471 Outer trapezoidal groove
Groove figure block G1472 Inner normal groove
(ZX plane) G1473 Inner trapezoidal groove
G1474 End face normal groove
G1475 End face trapezoidal groove
- 399 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES TURNOPEEZG44
Threading
G1140 Outer surface
G1141 Inner surface
G1460 General-purpose thread
G1461 Metric thread
Thread figure block
G1462 Unified thread
(ZX plane)
G1463 PT thread
G1464 PF thread
NOTE
1 When cycle motions are input with Doosan Infracore eZ
Guide i, sets of a machining type block and figure
blocks must be input in succession for all cycle
motions except turning hole machining.
For one machining type block, multiple figure
blocks can be input.
However, multiple sets of arbitrary figures can be
input, with one set including up to 50 figures
enclosed between a start point and end block.
2 For each item marked with [*] in the tables below, a
standard value is automatically set if no value is
input.
The screen displays [*] to the right of a data item.
3 In some of the input data items, the system sets the
last inputed data as an initial data. As to these input
data items, the mark of “(COPY)” was described.
- 400 -
NOTE
4 The motions go back to the start point where the
machining cycle started after completing the all
cycle motions.
(It is possible not to go back the satrt point when
the parameter No.27102#7 is set to 1.)
Remarks) Cycle retract motions

In case of No.27102#7=0, Retracting motions indicated as bloken lines
in the following drawing will be outputted. The order of motion axis
will be opposite to the approched motions
Retracting motion of a
machining cycle Position where the
machining cycle
started
Approaching motions of a
machining cycle
In case of carrying out plural figures machining by one G4 digit cycle, such
like grooving, this retracting motions will be available at the last figure
machining.
- 401 -
2.1 HOLE MACHINING (WORKPIECE ROTATION)
2.1.1 Machining Type Blocks for Hole Machining (Workpiece

Rotation)
NOTE
Hole machining (workpiece rotation) is performed
only at the center of a workpiece. So, unlike other
cycle motions, figure blocks cannot be specified.
Center drilling: G1100
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
C CLEARANCE Distance between the surface of a workpiece and
point R (radius value, positive value) (COPY)
P* DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of a hole (in seconds,
positive value) (COPY)
the Z-axis direction and then in the X-
axis direction.
axis direction. (initial value)
directions.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the surface of a workpiece
L CUT DEPTH Hole depth (radius value, negative value)
- 402 -
Drilling: G1101
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
Q* PECKING CUT DEPT Depth of cut per drilling operation (radius value,
positive value) (COPY) (Note)
K* GO PAST AMOUNT Length of the incomplete hole at the tip of the tool
P* DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of a hole (in seconds)
(COPY)
axis direction.
directions.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
NOTE
The system refers to the parameter No.5114 as the
the suitable value before machining.
- 403 -
Tapping: G1102
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
D THREAD LEAD Lead of a tapping tool (radius value, positive value)
(COPY)
axis direction.
directions.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
RIGID TAP
Data item Meaning
R TAP TYPE [FLOAT] : Specifies the float tap.
[RIGID] : Specifies the rigid tap. (Note)
-1
- 404 -
NOTE
1 When you use the rigid tap M code command
(No.5200#0=0), the system refers to the parameter
No.5210 or No.5212 as M code. Therefore, please
set No.5210 or No.5212 to the suitable value before
machining.
- 405 -
Reaming: G1103
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
axis direction.
[2 AXES]: From the current position to the
directions.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
- 406 -
Boring: G1104
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
axis direction.
directions.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
- 407 -
2.2 TURNING
2.2.1 Machining Type Blocks for Turning
Outer surface roughing: G1120
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
R NOSE RADIUS Tool nose radius of a roughing tool (positive value)
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Cutting edge angle of a roughing tool (positive value)
B NOSE ANGLE Tool angle of a roughing tool (positive value)
J IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a roughing tool
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-Z] : Cuts in the -Z direction.
[+Z] : Cuts in the +Z direction.
Remark) [+Z] is used for cutting in the reverse
direction or for machining with a
subspindle. (COPY)
Q CUT DEPTH Depth of each cut (radius value, positive value)
H RATE OF CUT DEPTH Change rate for the depth of cut. Specify a change
rate in steps of 1%. A second depth of cut and
subsequent ones are sequentially multiplied by a
specified change rate. The default is 100%, meaning
that the depth of cut remains unchanged. (1 to 200,
positive value)
C* X-AXIS FINISH AMT. Finishing allowance in the X-axis direction. The
- 408 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
D* Z-AXIS FINISH AMT. Finishing allowance in the Z-axis direction. The
F CUT DIRC.FEEDRATE Feedrate applicable when the tool cuts in the
workpiece radius direction (positive value)
E CUT DEPTH FEEDRATE Feedrate applicable when the tool cuts in the Z-axis
direction (positive value)
V CUT RISE FEEDRATE Feedrate applicable when the tool cuts up in the
direction of retraction from the workpiece (positive
value)
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
K 1ST OVERRIDE Feedrate override value for the first cut. Specify an
override value in steps of 1%. The default is 100%.
(1 - 200, positive value)
Remark) This data item is used, for example, to cut
the black coating of a cast workpiece.
W CUT RISE METHOD [SPEED]: The tool retracts by a distance specified
with ESCAPE AMOUNT in the XZ
direction immediately after cutting.
[CUT] : The tool retracts by a "retract" distance"
after cutting along the figure.
(COPY)
U ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface after each cut (radius value, positive value)
Remark) By referring to the parameter No. 27128,
the system sets the data as an initial value.
L X-AXIS CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start point
(approach point) in the X-axis direction (radius value,
positive value)
M Z-AXIS CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start point
(approach point) in the Z-axis direction (radius value,
positive value)
axis direction.
directions.
- 409 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
S CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut direction,
[-X] : Cuts in the –X direction.
[+X] : Cuts in the +X direction.
Remark) This data item is enable when the
parameter No.27100#0 = 1. (COPY)
X POCKET CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts a pocket. (initial value)
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut a pocket.
parameter No.27100#1 = 1.
Y OVERHANG CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts an overhang. (initial value)
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut an overhang.
- 410 -
• Tool path
<1> The tool moves to the position "cut-in start point + clearance (L,
M)" by rapid traverse.
<2> After cutting in in the X-axis direction at the feedrate (F)
specified for the cutting direction, the tool cuts in to the entered-
figure position where there is still a finishing allowance in the Z-
axis direction at the feedrate (E) specified for the cut-in
direction.
<3> If [SPEED] is selected, the tool immediately retracts by a return
clearance (U) in the X- and Z-axis direction. If [CUT] is selected,
the tool first cuts along the figure and then retracts by a return
clearance (U) in the X- and Z-axis direction.
<4> The tool moves to the cut-in start position in the Z-axis direction
by rapid traverse.
<5> Steps <2> to <4> are repeated until the lowest portion in the X-
axis direction is reached.
<6> If there is another pocket, the tool is positioned on the pocket,
and steps <2> to <4> are repeated.
<7> Once all portions are cut, the tool retracts to the position "cut-in
start position + clearance (L)" in the X-axis direction at the rapid
traverse rate.
NOTE
It is possible to specify "PART" and "BLANK" as
This "BLANK" can be used to enter an arbitrary
figure resembling a blank figure to be actually
machined, so any portion other than the blank
portion will not be cut. This way, optimum rough
turning can be realized.
- 411 -
Example of outer-surface machining
Start point
: Tool path for cutting

Clearance : Tool path for
rapid traverse
: Product figure
: Blank figure
- 412 -
Inner surface roughing: G1121
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Cutting edge angle of a roughing tool (positive
value)
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
Remark) [+Z] is used for cutting in the reverse
subspindle. (COPY)
positive value)
- 413 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
(COPY)
positive value)
positive value)
axis direction.
directions.
- 414 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
- 415 -
• Tool path
<2> After cutting in in the X-axis direction at the feedrate (F)
figure position where there is still a finishing allowance in the Z-
direction.
<4> The tool moves to the cut-in start position in the Z-axis direction
by rapid traverse.
<5> Steps <2> to <4> are repeated until the lowest portion in the X-
start position + clearance (M)" in the Z-axis direction at the
rapid traverse rate.
- 416 -
End face roughing: G1122
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Cutting edge angle of a roughing tool (positive
value)
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-X] : Cuts in the –X direction.
Remark) [+X] is used for cutting in the reverse
subspindle. (COPY)
positive value)
- 417 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
(COPY)
positive value)
positive value)
axis direction.
directions.
- 418 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
• Tool path
<2> After cutting in in the Z-axis direction at the feedrate (F)
figure position where there is still a finishing allowance in the X-
direction.
<4> The tool moves to the cut-in start position in the X-axis direction
by rapid traverse.
<5> Steps <2> to <4> are repeated until the lowest portion in the Z-
- 419 -
Outer surface semifinishing: G1123
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
I INPUT TYPE [INPUT] : Directly inputs the tool nose radius of a
tool used for semifinishing. (initial value)
[REF.] : Inputs the offset number of a tool used for
semifinishing to read the offset value.
[INPUT] is selected for INPUT TYPE.
T OFFSET NO. Offset number of a roughing tool (positive value)
Remark) This data item is indicated only when [REF.]
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
(COPY)
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate for semifinishing (positive value)
- 420 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
positive value)
positive value)
axis direction.
directions.
- 421 -
• Tool path
<2> The tool cuts along the entered figure on which the finishing
allowance is left uncut at the semifinishing feedrate until the
final figure is obtained.
traverse rate.
- 422 -
Inner surface semifinishing: G1124
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
(COPY)
- 423 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
positive value)
positive value)
axis direction.
directions.
- 424 -
• Tool path
- 425 -
End face semifinishing: G1125
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
- 426 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-X] : Cuts in the -X direction.
(COPY)
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
positive value)
positive value)
axis direction.
directions.
- 427 -
• Tool path
- 428 -
Outer surface finishing: G1126
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
- 429 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
(COPY)
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate for finishing (positive value)
positive value)
positive value)
axis direction.
directions.
- 430 -
• Tool path
<2> The tool cuts along the entered figure at the finishing feedrate
until the final figure is obtained.
traverse rate.
- 431 -
Inner surface finishing: G1127
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
- 432 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
(COPY)
positive value)
positive value)
axis direction.
directions.
- 433 -
• Tool path
- 434 -
End face finishing: G1128
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
tool used for semifinishing.
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-X] : Cuts in the -X direction.
(COPY)
positive value)
- 435 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
positive value)
axis direction.
directions.
• Tool path
- 436 -
2.2.2 Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Turning

When an arbitrary figure is input, a function such as the automatic
intersection calculation function can be used. For details, see Section 5.5,
"ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR TURNING (ZX PLANE)," in Part II.
- 437 -
2.3 TURNING GROOVING
2.3.1 Machining Type Blocks for Turning Grooving
Outer surface roughing: G1130
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
R NOSE RADIUS Tool nose radius of a grooving tool. (positive value)
B TOOL WIDTH Tool width of a grooving tool (radius value, positive
value)
J IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a grooving tool.
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
C* SIDE FINISH AMOUNT Finishing allowance for the side faces of a groove.
value)
D* BOTTOM FINISH AMT. Finishing allowance for the bottom of a groove. The
F FEED RATE Feedrate for cutting in the tool axis direction (positive
value)
W PECKING [NOTHIN] : Does not perform pecking in cutting for
grooving (initial value).
[PECKIN] : Performs pecking in cutting for
grooving.
Q PECKING CUT DEPTH Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per pecking
[PECKIN] is selected for PECKING.
- 438 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
U* ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface after each cut by pecking. (radius value,
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
L CLEARANCE Distance between the top surface of a groove and a
machining start point (approach point) in the Z-axis
direction (radius value, positive value)
P DWELL Dwell time applicable when the tool reaches the
bottom of a groove. (in seconds, positive value)
(COPY)
axis direction.
directions.
S CUT DEPTH FOR WIDTH Depth of each cut in the grooving tool width direction
V* ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface after each cut. The blank is regarded as 0.
A CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut direction,
- 439 -
• Tool path
<2> After moving to the center of the groove (in the Z-axis direction)
by rapid traverse, the tool cuts in in the X-axis direction at the
feedrate (F) specified for the cutting direction. If pecking is
specified, the tool cuts a specified pecking amount while
retracting in the +X-axis direction between pecking cycles.
<3> When the tool reaches the groove bottom (but the finishing
allowance) in the X-axis direction, the tool retracts in the +X-
axis direction, shifts by a cut-in amount through the width in the
-Z-axis direction, and then cuts in the X-axis direction.
<4> After step <3> is repeated until one groove wall is reached, the
tool cuts another wall.
<5> After all portions are cut, the tool moves to the position "cut-in
start position + clearance (L)" in the X-axis direction by rapid
traverse.
- 440 -
Inner surface roughing: G1131
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
R NOSE RADIUS Tool nose radius of a grooving tool. (positive
value)
value)
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
value)
grooving.
- 441 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
(COPY)
axis direction.
directions.
- 442 -
• Tool path
<2> After moving to the center of the groove (in the Z-axis direction)
by rapid traverse, the tool cuts in in the X-axis direction at the
retracting in the -X-axis direction between pecking cycles.
allowance) in the X-axis direction, the tool retracts in the -X-axis
direction, shifts by a cut-in amount through the width in the -Z-
axis direction, and then cuts in the X-axis direction.
start point + clearance (M)" in the Z-axis direction by rapid
traverse and is pulled out from the workpiece.
- 443 -
End face roughing: G1132
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
J* IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a grooving tool.
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
value)
grooving.
- 444 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
(COPY)
axis direction.
directions.
- 445 -
• Tool path
<2> After moving to the center of the groove (in the X-axis direction)
by rapid traverse, the tool cuts in in the -Z-axis direction at the
retracting in the +Z-axis direction between pecking cycles.
allowance) in the Z-axis direction, the tool retracts in the +Z-axis
direction, shifts by a cut-in amount through the width in the -X-
axis direction, and then cuts in the Z-axis direction.
start position + clearance (M)" in the Z-axis direction by rapid
traverse.
- 446 -
Outer surface roughing and finishing: G1133
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
value)
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
D* BOTTOM FINISH AMT. Finishing allowance for the bottom of a groove.
value)
F ROUGH FEEDRATE Feedrate for roughing in the tool axis direction
(positive value)
E FINISH FEEDRATE Feedrate for finishing (positive value)
W PECKING [NOTHIN] : Does not perform pecking in cutting
for grooving (initial value).
grooving.
- 447 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
specified change rate. The default is 100%,
meaning that the depth of cut remains unchanged.
(1 to 200, positive value) (COPY)
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
L CLEARANCE Distance between the top surface of a groove and
a machining start point (approach point) in the Z-
the system sets the data as an initial
value.
(COPY)
in the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. (initial value)
X-axis direction.
directions.
S CUT DEPTH FOR WIDTH Depth of each cut in the grooving tool width
direction (radius value, positive value) (COPY)
K CUT END POSITION [CENTER] : Cuts both of the right and left side
faces of a groove evenly in
finishing.
[CORNER] : Cuts one side face and the entire
bottom successively then cuts the
other side face only in finishing.
(COPY)
surface when finishing is completed (radius value,
positive value)
Remark1) This item is displayed only when
[CORNER] is selected as a cutting end
position. The default value is 0.
Remark2) By referring to the parameter No.
27177, the system sets the data as an
initial value.
- 448 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
• Tool path
Groove roughing and finishing are continued, using the same tool. See
respective descriptions about the tool path for details of roughing and
finishing.
- 449 -
Inner surface roughing and finishing: G1134
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
value)
J* IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a grooving tool.
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
value)
(positive value)
grooving.
- 450 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
value.
(COPY)
X-axis direction.
directions.
finishing.
(COPY)
positive value)
initial value.
- 451 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
• Tool path
finishing.
- 452 -
End face roughing and finishing: G1135
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
value)
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
value)
(positive value)
grooving.
- 453 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
value.
(COPY)
X-axis direction.
directions.
finishing.
(COPY)
positive value)
initial value.
- 454 -
• Tool path
finishing.
- 455 -
Outer surface finishing: G1136
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
F FEED RATE Feedrate for finishing in the tool axis direction
(positive value)
(COPY)
- 456 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
axis direction.
directions.
faces of a groove evenly in finishing.
(COPY)
V ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
positive value)
Remark2) By referring to the parameter No. 27177,
value.
- 457 -
• Tool path
Cutting end position [CENTER] Cutting end position [CORNER]
(L, M)" by rapid traverse.
<2> If [CENTER] is specified as the cutting end position, the tool
cuts in one of the groove walls and continues cutting to the
center (in the Z-axis direction) of the groove at the finishing
feedrate. After retracting in the X-axis direction, the tool
performs the same cutting operation for the other groove wall.
<3> If [CORNER] is specified as the cutting end point, the tool cuts
in to the bottom from the wall in the -Z-axis direction, and
retracts by a return clearance in the X- and Z-axis directions and
then in the X-axis direction. After this, the tool starts cutting
from the other groove wall and continues cutting to the edge of
the bottom, and then retracts by a return clearance in the X- and
Z-axis directions.
<4> The tool moves to the position "cut-in start point + clearance
(L)" in the X-axis direction by rapid traverse.
- 458 -
Inner surface finishing: G1137
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
(positive value)
(COPY)
- 459 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
axis direction.
directions.
(COPY)
positive value)
value.
- 460 -
• Tool path
center (in the Z-axis direction) of the groove at the finishing
feedrate. After retracting in the X-axis direction, the tool
in to the bottom from the wall in the -Z-axis direction, and
then in the X-axis direction. After this, the tool starts cutting
Z-axis directions.
<4> The tool retracts to the position "cut-in start point + clearance
(L)" in the X-axis direction.
(M)" in the Z-axis direction by rapid traverse and then is pulled
out from the workpiece.
- 461 -
End face finishing: G1138
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
value)
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
(positive value)
(COPY)
- 462 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
axis direction.
directions.
(COPY)
positive value)
value.
- 463 -
• Tool path
center (in the X-axis direction) of the groove at the finishing
feedrate. After retracting in the Z-axis direction, the tool
in to the bottom from the wall in the +X-axis direction, and
then in the Z-axis direction. After this, the tool starts cutting
Z-axis directions.
<4> The tool moves to the position "cut-in start point + clearance
(M)" in the Z-axis direction by rapid traverse.
- 464 -
2.3.2 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Turning Grooving
Outer normal groove: G1470 (ZX plane)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
U BASE POINT SETTING [+Z] : Sets the base point in the +Z direction.
(initial value)
[-Z] : Sets the base point in the -Z direction.
X BASE POINT (X) X coordinate of the reference position of a groove
Z BASE POINT (Z) Z coordinate of the reference position of a groove
P DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Depth direction,
[-X] : Depth is in the –X direction.
[+X] : Depth is in the +X direction.
L DEPTH Groove depth (radius value, positive value)
D WIDTH Groove width (radius value, positive value)
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
A CORNER TYPE-1 For corner (1) of the reference position
[NOTHIN] : Specifies neither chamfering nor
corner rounding (initial value).
[CHAMFR] : Specifies chamfering.
[ARC] : Specifies corner rounding.
B CORNER SIZE Chamfer amount or corner radius (radius value,
positive value)
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-1.
- 465 -
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
E CORNER TYPE-2 For corner (2)
F CORNER SIZE Chamfer amount or corner radius (radius value,
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-2.
I CORNER TYPE-3 For corner (3)
J CORNER SIZE Chamfer amount or corner radius (radius value,
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-3.
Q CORNER TYPE-4 For corner (4)
R CORNER SIZE Chamfer amount or corner radius (radius value,
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-4.
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
M* GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves of the same figure to be
machined. The blank is regarded as 1. (positive
value)
S PITCH Distance between the reference positions of two
adjacent grooves (radius value, positive value)
W* PITCH DIRECTION [-Z] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the -Z direction (initial value).
[+Z] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the +Z direction.
- 466 -
Outer trapezoidal groove: G1471 (ZX plane)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
(initial value)
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-1.
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-2.
- 467 -
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-3.
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-4.
BOTTOM INFO
Data item Meaning
H BOTTOM TYPE [WIDTH] : Specifies the difference between the
groove entry of each side face and
the width of the groove bottom (initial
value).
[ANGLE] : Specifies the angle of a side face of a
groove.
K* BOTTOM SIZE/ANGLE Difference between the groove entry of the side
face on the reference position side and the width
of the groove bottom when [WIDTH] is specified
(radius value, positive value).
Inclination angle of the side face on the reference
position side when [ANGLE] is specified (positive
value).
The blank is regarded as 0 for both.
V* BOTOM SIZE/ANGLE Difference between the groove entry of the side
face on the side opposite to the reference position
side and the width of the groove bottom when
[WIDTH] is specified (radius value, positive value).
Inclination angle of the side face on the side
opposite to the reference position side when
[ANGLE] is specified (positive value).
- 468 -
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
value)
- 469 -
Inner normal groove: G1472 (ZX plane)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
(initial value)
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-1.
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-2.
- 470 -
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-3.
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-4.
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
value)
- 471 -
Inner trapezoidal groove: G1473 (ZX plane)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
(initial value)
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-1.
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-2.
- 472 -
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-3.
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-4.
BOTTOM INFO
Data item Meaning
groove entry of each side face and the
width of the groove bottom (initial
value).
[ANGLE]: Specifies the angle of a side face of a
groove.
value).
- 473 -
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
value)
- 474 -
End face normal groove: G1474 (ZX plane)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
(initial value)
P DEPTH DIRECTION As to Z axis Depth direction,
[-Z] : Depth is in the –Z direction.
[+Z] : Depth is in the +Z direction.
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-1.
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-2.
- 475 -
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-3.
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-4.
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
value)
W* PITCH DIRECTION [-X] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the -X direction (initial value).
[+X] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the +X direction.
- 476 -
End face trapezoidal groove: G1475 (ZX plane)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
U BASE POINT SETTING [+X] : Sets the base point in the +X direction.
(initial value)
[-X] : Sets the base point in the -X direction.
P DEPTH DIRECTION As to Z axis Depth direction,
[-Z] : Depth is in the –Z direction.
[+Z] : Depth is in the +Z direction.
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-1.
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-2.
- 477 -
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-3.
positive value)
CORNER TYPE-4.
BOTTOM INFO
Data item Meaning
groove entry of each side face and the
width of the groove bottom (initial
value).
[ANGLE]: Specifies the angle of a side face of a
groove.
value).
- 478 -
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
value)
W* PITCH DIRECTION [-X] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the -X direction (initial value).
[+X] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the +X direction.
- 479 -
2.4 THREADING
2.4.1 Machining Type Blocks for Threading
External: G1140
Internal: G1141
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
R NOSE RADIUS Tool nose radius of a threading tool. (positive value)
A NOSE ANGLE Tool angle of a threading tool (positive value)
J IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a threading tool.
NOTE
‘TOOL COND.’
- 480 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
W CUTTING METHOD [SING.A] : Constant amount of cut, one-edge
cutting
[BOTH A] : Constant amount of cut, both-edge
cutting
[STAG.A] : Constant amount of cut, both-edge
zigzag thread cutting
[SING.D] : Constant depth of cut, one-edge cutting
[BOTH D] : Constant depth of cut, both-edge cutting
[STAG.D] : Constant depth of cut, both-edge zigzag
thread cutting
(COPY)
C* FINISH AMOUNT Finishing allowance for threading in the X-axis
direction. The blank is regarded as 0. (radius value,
positive value)
K* NUMBER OF FINISHING Number of finishing operations. (positive value)
(COPY)
S CUT TYPE [NUMBER] : Specifies threading by the number of
cuts.
[DEPTH] : Specifies threading by the first amount
of cut.
(COPY)
P CUT DEPTH NUMBER Number of cuts for rough threading (999 max.,
positive value)
Remark) The number of finishing cuts is not
included. In the case of both-edge zigzag
thread cutting, be sure to specify an even
number of cuts. If an odd number of cuts
are specified, only one additional both-edge
zigzag thread cutting operation is
performed. This data item is indicated only
when [NUMBER] is selected.
Q CUT DEPTH Depth of cut per rough threading operation (radius
Remark) The number of cuts is determined by the
depth of cut and the cutting method.
- 481 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
axis direction. (Initial value for external
thread)
axis direction. (Initial value for internal
thread)
directions.
D SURFACE CLEARANCE Distance between a thread crest and machining start
point (approach point) in the X-axis direction (radius
L ENTRANCE CLEARANCE Distance between a thread start point and machining
start point (approach point) in the Z-axis direction
M EXIT CLERANCE Distance between a thread end point and threading
operation end point in the Z-axis direction. (radius
Y CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut direction,
- 482 -
• Tool path
External-thread cutting Internal-thread cutting
<1> The tool moves to the position "thread start point + thread
surface clearance (D in the X-axis direction)" and position
thread entry clearance (L in the Z-axis direction) by rapid
traverse.
<2> Threading is performed using a specified cutting method. The
end point of threading in the Z-axis direction is the thread exit
clearance apart from the thread end point.
<3> If [NUMBER] is specified as a cut-in type, threading is
performed as many times as the [NUMBER] value. If [DEPTH]
is specified, this amount is used in the first cut-in and threading
is performed until the specified thread figure is obtained.
traverse rate.
- 483 -
- See the following expansions for details of the cutting methods.
[SING.A] : Constant amount of cut, one-edge cutting
d1=D
dn=
Dsqrt(n) H
[BOTH A] : Constant amount of cut, both-edge cutting
d1=D
dn=
Dsqrt(n) H
H=Height of thread crest, D=Amount of cut, u=Finishing allowance
[STAG.A] : Constant amount of cut, both-edge zigzag thread cutting
d1=D
dn-2
dn-1 dn
H
dn-2 = D sqrt(n-2)
dn-1 = (D(sqrt(n-2) + sqrt(n)))/2
dn = D sqrt(n)
When the amount of cut is smaller than the minimum amount of cut
(parameter No. 27145), the amount of cut is clamped to the minimum
amount of cut.
- 484 -
[SING.D] : Constant depth of cut, one-edge cutting
D
H
D
[BOTH D] : Constant depth of cut, both-edge cutting
[STAG.D] : Constant depth of cut, both-edge zigzag thread cutting
D
D
D
H
D
NOTE
Depending on the minimum amount of cut, the
specified number of cuts may be excessive. In such
a case, threading is performed by a number of cuts
less than the specified number of cuts.
The number of cuts actually done may differ from
the specified number of cuts due to a calculation
error.
- 485 -
2.4.2 Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Threading
General-purpose thread: G1460 (ZX plane)
Male screw)
Female screw)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
W THREAD TYPE [MALE] : To be selected when the external thread
is specified as threading type
[FEMALE] : To be selected when the internal thread
X START POINT (X) X coordinate of a thread start point
Z START POINT (Z) Z coordinate of a thread start point
L LEAD Thread lead (radius value, positive value)
H THREAD DEPTH Thread depth (radius value, positive value)
Remark) A thread depth is automatically calculated
by pressing [CALC] after inputting a lead.
A END POINT (X) X coordinate of a thread end point
B END POINT (Z) Z coordinate of a thread end point
NOTE
The thread depth of a general-purpose thread is
calculated from parameter No. 27150 (external) or
parameter No. 27151 (internal) and a thread lead.
- 486 -
Metric thread: G1461 (ZX plane)

A metric thread is cut. Only one straight thread is machined. Be sure to
set a tool angle of 60 degrees.
Male screw)
Female screw)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
D THREAD DIAMETER Thread diameter (positive value)
L LEAD Thread lead (radius value, positive value)
M LENGTH Thread length (radius value, positive value)
by pressing [CALC] after inputting a lead.
NOTE
The thread depth of a metric thread is calculated
from parameter No. 27152 (external) or parameter
No. 27153 (internal) and a thread lead.
- 487 -
Unified thread: G1462 (ZX plane)

A unified thread is cut. Only one straight thread is machined. For a
unified thread, the "number of thread crests/inch" is used instead of a
thread lead. Be sure to set a tool angle of 60 degrees.
Male screw)
Female screw)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
L THREAD NUMBER Number of thread crests per inch
by pressing [CALC] after inputting a thread
number.
- 488 -
NOTE
The thread depth of a unified thread is calculated
from parameter No. 27152 (external) or parameter
No. 27153 (internal) and a thread number.
PT thread: G1463 (tapered thread for tubes, ZX plane)

A PT thread (tapered thread for tubes) is cut. Only one tapered thread
(tapered by 1.7899 degrees) is machined. Be sure to set a tool angle of 55
degrees.
The taper figure of an external thread (male thread) is such that the end
face of a blank represents a minor diameter portion. The taper figure of an
internal thread (female thread) is such that the end face of a blank
represents a major diameter portion.
Male screw)
Female screw)
- 489 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
number.
NOTE
The thread depth of a PT thread is calculated from
parameter No. 27154 (external) or parameter No.
27155 (internal) and a thread number.
PF thread: G1464 (parallel thread for tubes, ZX plane)

A PF thread (parallel thread for tubes) is cut. Only one straight thread is
machined. Be sure to set a tool angle of 55 degrees.
Male screw)
- 490 -
Female screw)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
number.
NOTE
The thread depth of a PF thread is calculated from
parameter No. 27154 (external) or parameter No.
27155 (internal) and a thread number.
- 491 -
2.5 Rear End Facing by Turning
2.5.1 Rear End Facing
By setting bit 4 of parameter No. 27100 to 1, the input item "FACE

POSITION" is displayed on the following menu. By entering this data,
rear end facing is enabled.
1. Hole machining – Center drilling : G1100

2. Hole machining – Drilling : G1101
3. Hole machining – Tapping : G1102
4. Hole machining – Reaming : G1103
5. Hole machining – Boring : G1104
6. Turning – End face roughing : G1122
7. Turning – End face semifinishing : G1125
8. Turning – End face finishing : G1128
9. Turning groove – End face roughing : G1132
10. Turning groove – End face roughing and finishing : G1135
11. Turning groove – End face finishing : G1138
Example) Drilling : G1101
FACE POSIT
Data item Meaning
Y FACE POSITION [+FACE ]: References the figure below (+ end face).
[-FACE ]: References the figure below (- end face).
- 492 -
(-) Depth Depth (-)
+Z +Z
+ end face - end face
(-) Depth Depth (-)
+Z +Z
- end face + end face
- 493 -
3.SLANT FACE MACHINING (COORDINATE CONVERSION) CYCLE MACHINING TYPES TURNOPEEZG44
3 SLANT FACE MACHINING

(COORDINATE CONVERSION)
NOTE
To use slant face machining with Doosan Infracore eZ
Guide i, the option for the three-dimensional coordinate
conversion function is required.
For details, refer to the relevant manual issued by
the machine tool builder.
- 494 -
TURNOPEEZG44 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 3.SLANT FACE MACHINING (COORDINATE CONVERSION)
3.1 SUPPORTABLE MACHINE CONFIGURATION
With Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, slant face machining, which is a mixture of

table rotation and tool rotation, can be specified.
Those parameters that support a machine configuration used must be set
beforehand.
(1) Mixture type

This type of machining machines a slant face by workpiece
rotation and tool rotation.
Horizontal type
Tool
B
X
X’ Y
Z’
Z X
C
Workpiece
- 495 -
Vertical type
Y
X
C
Tool
Z B
Z’
X’
Workpiece
NOTE
It is assumed that the C-axis rotates about the Z-
axis, and the rotation center is on the Z-axis.
Moreover, it is assumed that the B-axis rotates
about the Y-axis, and the rotation center is on the
Y-axis.
- 496 -
3.2 SLANT FACE MACHINING COMMAND (COORDINATE

CONVERSION)
When slant face machining is performed with Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, a

slant face to be machined must be first specified with the coordinate
conversion command, then a machining program for milling to be
performed must be input.
Upon completion of slant face machining, coordinate conversion
cancellation must be specified.
NOTE
Slant face machining can be performed with the
following types of milling (all on the XY plane):
1. Hole machining
2. Facing
3. Contouring
4. Pocketing
5. Grooving
With Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, the G code commands listed below are
available to enable coordinate conversion for slant face machining.
Coordinate conversion
G1952 Direct origin specification (with the rotation
center on the Y-axis)
G1953 Indirect origin specification (with the rotation
center on the Y-axis)
Command
G1954 Direct origin specification (with the rotation
block
center on the Z-axis)
G1955 Indirect origin specification (with the rotation
center on the Z-axis)
G1959 Coordinate conversion cancel
- 497 -
NOTE
G code for coordinate conversion can be selected
from the "COORDINATE CONVERSION" tab on
the milling start command menu (displayed by
pressing [START] on the milling menu).
- 498 -
Direct origin specification (with the rotation center on the Y-axis): G1952
A machining surface rotates about the point (reference point) that serves
as the new workpiece origin of the slant face.
COORD CONVERSION
Data item Meaning
U NEW WORK ORIGIN X’ X coordinate of the workpiece origin of a slant face
V NEW WORK ORIGIN Y’ Y coordinate of the workpiece origin of a slant face
W NEW WORK ORIGIN Z’ Z coordinate of the workpiece origin of a slant face
R SLANT ANGLE Signed angle relative to the Z-axis. The CW
direction viewed from the plus direction of the
rotation axis is positive. (-90≤R≤90).
- 499 -
3.SLANT FACE MACHINING (COORDINATE CONVERSION) CYCLE MACHINING TYPES URNOPEEZG44
Indirect origin specification (with the rotation center on the Y-axis): G1953
A machining surface rotates about a specified reference point, and the
workpiece origin of a slant face, that is, a new machining surface, is to be
specified based on the distance from the reference point
(positive/negative value).
COORD CONVERSION
Data item Meaning
U REF. POINT X X coordinate of a reference point (workpiece
coordinate system before rotation)
W REF. POINT Z Z coordinate of a reference point (workpiece
I NEW WORK ORIGIN X’ X coordinate of the workpiece origin of a slant face
J NEW WORK ORIGIN Y’ Y coordinate of the workpiece origin of a slant face
K NEW WORK ORIGIN Z’ Z coordinate of the workpiece origin of a slant face
R SLANT ANGLE Signed angle relative to the Z-axis. The CW
direction viewed from the plus direction of the
rotation axis is positive. (-90≤R≤90).
- 500 -
Direct origin specification (with the rotation center on the Z-axis): G1954
The machining plane rotates about the new point (reference point)
that is to become the workpiece origin of the XY plane.
COORD CONVERSION
Data item Meaning
U REF. POINT X X coordinate of a new workpiece origin
V REF. POINT Y Y coordinate of a new workpiece origin
W REF. POINT Z Z coordinate of a new workpiece origin
R SLANT ANGLE Signed angle with respect to the X-axis. The CW
direction viewed from the plus rotation axis
direction is positive (-90 ≤ R ≤ 90).
- 501 -
Indirect origin specification (with the rotation center on the Z-axis): G1955
The machining plane rotates about a specified reference point. Define

the workpiece origin of the XY plane, which is a new machining
plane, by specifying the distance (positive/negative value) from the
reference point.
COORD CONVERSION
Data item Meaning
U REF. POINT X X coordinate of a reference point (workpiece
W REF. POINT Y Y coordinate of a reference point (workpiece
I NEW WORK ORIGIN X’ X coordinate of the workpiece origin of the slant
J NEW WORK ORIGIN Y’ Y coordinate of the workpiece origin of the slant
K NEW WORK ORIGIN Z’ Z coordinate of the workpiece origin of the slant
R SLANT ANGLE Signed angle with respect to the Z-axis. The CW
direction viewed from the plus rotation axis
direction is positive (-90 ≤ R ≤ 90).
- 502 -
Coordinate conversion cancel: G1959
After coordinate conversion is canceled, the tool moves to the entered

end point by rapid traverse. If no end point is specified, the tool will
not move.
CANCEL
Data item Meaning
X* END POINT X X coordinate to which the tool is to move by rapid
traverse after coordinate conversion is canceled. If
this data is omitted, the tool will not move.
Y* END POINT Y Y coordinate to which the tool is to move by rapid
Z* END POINT Z Z coordinate to which the tool is to move by rapid
- 503 -
IV. MULTI-PATH
LATHE FUNCTIONS
TURNOPEEZG44 MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 1.MULTI-PATH LATHE APPLICATION
1 MULTI-PATH LATHE APPLICATION

- The multi path lathe option is required in this function.
- This function corresponds to the following CNC control units.
2 CPU - 2path lathe CNC , 2CPU – 3path lathe CNC
NOTE
The SET-UP Guidance function or the Tool
Management function is unsupported in this
function.
- 507 -
1.MULTI-PATH LATHE APPLICATION MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS TURNOPEEZG44
1.1 PREPARATION
The following preparation is needed in order to use this multi-path

lathe application.
NOTE
You must set the CNC parameter in 8100#0=0
when you use [CHPATH] using in this multi-oath
lathe application.
1.1.1 Machine Configuration Setting

These parameters are set according to the machine configuration.
14702#1 0 : No sub-spindle is provided.

1 : A sub-spindle is provided.
14701#1 0 : Tool post 1 cannot be used with spindle 2.
1 : Tool post 1 can be used with spindle 2.
14701#2 0 : Tool post 1 is placed above spindle 1.
1 : Tool post 1 is placed under spindle 1.
27402#10 : Tool post 3 cannot be used with spindle 2.
14706 : Directions of the three basic axes of spindle 1

14706 : Directions of the three basic axes of spindle 2
16 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +Z, up =
+X
17 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -Z, up =
+X
18 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -Z, up =
-X
- 508 -
19 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +Z, up =

-X
27400#0 0 : Tool post is selection by the software key.

1: Tool post is selection by the PMC signal.
- 509 -
1.1.2 Set Icon for Selected Turret
The icon displayed when tool path-1 or path-2 are selected is set by
the parameter.
27410 : icon number when path-1 is selected.

l Icon number list
Icon
number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
icon
Icon
number 10 11 12 13 14 15
icon
Icon
number 20 21 22 23 24 25
icon
Icon
number 30 31 32 33 34 35
icon
- 510 -
1.2 OPERATIONS OF MULTI-PATH LATHE
1.2.1 Changing Screens for Each Path
On the Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i for multi-path lathe, screens and

operations are done on each path respectively.
On its screen, the icon for selected path will be displayed at the upper
right part.
1.2.1.1 Changing by a Soft-key
On the each screen, CHPATH soft-key will be displayed.
Press [CHPATH], the displayed turret will be changed.

In case of 2-path system : turret-1 > turret-2 > turret-1 > …
In case of 3-path system : turret-1 > turret-2 > turret-3 > turret-1 > …
1.2.1.2 Changing by a Switch on a Machine Operator’s Panel
Connected with the path selection signal (HEAD<G063#0>,

HEAD2<G062#7>), change the display of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i.
HEAD HEAD2 Displayed

(G63.0) (G62.7) Path number
0 0 1
1 0 2
0 1 3
NOTE
Select turret, display returns to a basic screen of
each mode when the system is changed
occasionally.
- 511 -
1.3 ANIMATION FOR MULTI-PATH LATHE
The tool path and animation for multi-path lathe are available.
NOTE
1 When machining simulation is started, it is
necessary to set MEM mode for all path.
2 Displaying is not done for the combination where
the parameter is set to the combination of the main
axis and the cutlery stand as invalidity.
1.3.1 Tool Path Drawing During Machining and Tool Path

Machining Simulation
In the tool path drawing during machining (tool path), machining
simulation (tool path), the turret selected now is drawn.
When the path (turret) is changed during drawing, the drawing starts
from halfway status.
When the mode of changed path (turret) is other of MEM mode, the
drawing will stop.
- 512 -
1.3.2 Machining Simulation (Animation)

In the machining simulation (animated), the Drawing for each turret is
executed simultaneously, regardless of selected turret.
NOTE
Only animation for the spindle selected latest
between both turrets is displayed. (The animation
for the other spindle is not displayed.)
- 513 -
1.4 MACHINING SIMULATION FOR EACH PATH
In the multi-path system of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, the machining

simulation is performed only at the selected path by the R signal.
In the multi-path system of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, the machining
simulation is performed only at the selected path by a R signal that is
set at the parameter No.27309 (The first figure is “bit” and the other
figure is the R signal number.).
For example, with 2 paths system
- At Path 1, the parameter No.27309=1001
- At Path 2, the parameter No.27309=2001
Then,
- At Path 1, if R100.1 is 1
- At Path 2, if R200.1 is 1
machining simulation is performed at each path. The status of the
signal of each path is displayed at a title bar of simulation window.
Green is the status for enable the simulation to be performed. Gray is
the status for disable.
Ex.1 With 2 paths system, the signal of Path 1 is 0 and the one of
Path 2 is 1.
Ex.2 With 3 paths system, the signal of Path 1 is 0 and the ones of
Path 2/3 are 1.
- 514 -
NOTE
1 If M code for waiting other paths is commanded, the
machining simulation is in pausing for performing of the
same M code at other paths. So, if this function is made
available in use of M code for waiting, it must be made
disabled by the management such as the M code is disabled
by using a signal of PMC for ignoring it.
2 This function needs the optional function Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i
Animated Drawing.
3 In drawing during machining, R signal that is set at the
parameter No. 27309 is disabled.
4 If the parameter No.27309 is not set at any paths, this
function is disabled.
5 R signal, which is set at the parameter No. 27309, is
available in converting into NC formatted program, too. The
NC statement converting function is available only at the path
in displaying. So, when the R signal at the path, which is the
object for NC statement converting, is off, the warning
message “TURN THIS PATH'S SIMULATE-SWITCH ON” is
displayed.
6 In the NC statement converting function, the status of the R
signal is not displayed.
7 Even if the R signal of a path is turned from “ON“ to “OFF” in
the machining simulation, the machining simulation is not
pausing but is performed at the path.
8 Even if the R signal of a path is turned from “ON“ to “OFF” in
the machining simulation, [SINGLE] and [PAUSE] are not
available at the path. In short, these softkeys are available at
the path when the R signal is on.
9 If [STOP] or the RESET is pressed in the machining
simulation, it stops at all paths for all status of the R signal.
10 If any paths are in machining, the machining simulation can
not be performed.
11 To perform the machining simulation, the mode must be
MEM at the selected path for displaying. If it is turned to
another path in the other mode than MEM in the machining
simulation, the machining simulation is stopped and the
animation window turns off.
- 515 -
1.5 OTHERS
NOTE
1 Guidance window for machining cycle data entering
screen are displayed following the specific
coordinate system (upper direction X+: right
direction Z+: parameter 14706=16).
2 The material is common with path-1 and path-2.
The registration of the material is possible from
path-1 and path-2. (When registered from both
path, the only latest is effective.)
- 516 -
TURNOPEEZG44 MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 2.SIMULTONEOUS ALL PATH DISPLAY / EDITING FUNCTION
2 SIMULTONEOUS ALL PATH DISPLAY /

EDITING FUNCTION
- 517 -
2.SIMULTONEOUS ALL PATH DISPLAY / EDITING FUNCTION MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS TURNOPEEZG44
2.1 OUTLINE
In the multi path lathe, simultaneous all path display and edit function.
Became available.
Supported machine construction is as follows.
l 2-Path 2-Spindle
l 3-Path 2-Spindle
In order to use this feature, the following option is necessary.
l Multi path lathe function for Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i.
- 518 -
2.2 DETAILS
2.2.1 How to Start
[MLTWIN] is displayed next to [CHPATH] in each basic mode.

(If the setting that [CHPATH] is not used is specified, the softkey is
arranged to the same position.)
When [MLTWIN] is pressed, the display mode is changed as follows.
All path display Single path display
In the case of 2-path
In the case of 3-path
2.2.2 How to Finish
Press [MLTWIN] again, and the display mode will be changed to

single display mode.
- 519 -
2.3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION
The screen composition of simultaneously for all path display and edit
function is explained.
2.3.1 Display Position of Each Path

l 2-Path
First path : left side
Second path : right side
l 3-Path
The display position of each path will be decided automatically
according to following parameter.
14701#1 : head 1 cannot be used in spindle 2 or can (0/1)
27401#0 : head 2 cannot be used in spindle 1 or not (0/1)
27402#0 : head 3 cannot be used in spindle 1 or not (0/1)
- 520 -
2.3.2 Status Display Part
The status display part display the status of each path.

This part is displayed in all operation mode.
Icon of displayed path.
Operation mode
MDI, MEM, RMT, EDIT, HND, JOG, TJOG, THND, INC, REF
Alarm status
ALM
Emargency stop status
EMG
Reset status
-RESET-
Automatic operation status
STOP, HOLT, STRT
Axis motion and dwelling status
MTN, DWL
Executing auxiliary functions
FIN
O : Program number (O number)

N : Sequence number (N number)
T : Modal T code commanded data
M : Modal M code commanded data
S : Modal S code commanded data
F : Modal F code commanded data
- 521 -
2.3.3 Current Position Display Part
This screen is displayed out of EDIT mode.
Using [ACTPOS], absolute position, relative position, machine

position, and distance to go in turn.
(In case of 2-path, actual spindle speed and actual feed rate are also
displayed.)
2.3.4 Program Display Part
This screen will be displayed in all operation mode.

(In case of EDIT mode, this part will be extended because current
position part is lost.)
- 522 -
2.4 HOW TO SELECT PATH
Select the target path using [CHPATH] or path selection signal. As

for the selected path, the title of position and program display part is
displayed in blue. (As for the not selected path, the title will be
displayed in light blue.)
For the selected path, a similar operation system to the normal screen
is supported.
(In case of the screen which is not supported all path display mode,
the single path display mode will be selected automatically.)
- 523 -
2.5 OTHERS
The screen which need full size, like animation, convert to nc

program, process list edit, chsize, and so on, will change to full screen
display automatically.
It is impossible to operate for the not selected path.
In 3-path, actual spindle speed and actual feed rate is not supported
because the display area is too small.
- 524 -
TURNOPEEZG44 MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 3.PROCESS LIST EDITING FUNCTION
3 PROCESS LIST EDITING FUNCTION

Available CNC types..
• 2 CPU 2 path lathe CNC
Lathe with 2 turrets and 2 spindles, and each turret can perform to
both of spindle#1 and spindle#2 respectively.
Lathe with 3 turrets and 2 spindles, turret#1 can perform to both
of spindle#1 and spindle#2, turret#2 can perform to spinlde#2,
and turret#3 can perform to spindle#1.
Lathe with 2 spindles, 1 turret can perform to both of spindle#1
and spindle#2.
NOTE
1 Process list editing is available only at EDIT mode.
Under background editing mode, it is not available.
2 When you use a process list editing function, you
need a lathe machining cycle optional function.
Furthermore, if you use [Add /] and [Del /] functions,
you need an optional block skip function.
- 525 -
3.PROCESS LIST EDITING FUNCTION MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS TURNOPEEZG44
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 Parameter
The following parameter is needed to be set.
l 14703#3 = 1 : Use the process list edit function
In case of using Add / function and Del / function,
l 14701#6 = 1: Use program check function for each spindle.
- 526 -
3.2 START AND END OPERATIONS
3.2.1 Start
Set CNC to EDIT mode, and press [<] or [>], following soft-keys will
appear.
Press this [EDTCEL], process table edit screen will appear.
If the consistency of G1992 and G1993 is lacked when the process

table edit function start, the process table edit function will not appear,
and line number and message of the warning will be shown at the
lower left.
Warning Message Description

Top G1992 is short (P=x/L=xxxx) G1993 appears without G1992.
G1993 is duplicate.(P=x/L=xxxx) G1993 is doubled because of no G1992 in the interval.
LAST G1993 is short. (P=x/L=xxxx) Program ends without the last G1993
G1992 is duplicate. (P=x/L=xxxx) G1992 is doubled because of no G1993 in the interval.
M CODE is duplicate. (P=x/L=xxxx) The same waiting M code is used again.
Waiting target is short. (P=x/L=xxxx) Waiting M code does not exist at waiting target with P.
Illegal waiting order.(P=x/L=xxxx) The order waiting M code appears is not correct..
No program. (P=x/L=xxxx) The program selected now does not exist.
No waiting M code. (P=x/L=xxxx) Waiting M code is lost at transfer.
Illegal P command. (P=x/L=xxxx) The value of P command is different even if the value of
waiting M code is the same.
Own path number is lost in the P command of waiting M
code
There is path number, which does not exist in the P
command of waiting M code.
Illegal S command. (P=x/L=xxxx) Spindle number is not correct.
- 527 -
3.2.2 End
Press [EDTPRG] soft-key, and the full screen size editor appears,
which also appears when [CHGSIZ] soft-key is pressed in the normal
EDIT mode.
Changing CNC mode, the screen change for the other mode.
- 528 -
3.3 DISPLAY CONTENTS
3.3.1 Cell
Each process is corresponded to the frame in the table which is called

a cell.
Only following information is displayed in this frame.
l Sequence number l comment
Moreover, there are following kinds of cells.
Kind Description Graphic

Cell where the process
Normal Cell
exists.
There is frame for display,
Input Impropriety
but the process does not
Cell
exist for it.
3.3.2 Current Cell
The target cell for the operation is shown. It is possible to move with
the cursor key. As for the selected cell, the background color is
displayed in yellow.
- 529 -
3.3.3 Spindle
First of all, each process is arranged according to the spindle.

The operator can see the process belongs to which spindle at a glance.
3.3.4 Turret
Each process is arranged further in the main axis according to the

turret.
It is easy to do the adjustment work as the process which belongs to
each main axis is allocated to which turret.
- 530 -
3.3.5 Waiting Line
The line that shows waiting exists is displayed.

As a result, waiting can be confirmed comprehensible.
3.3.6 Transfer
When transfer exists, that is displayed by blue character.

Transfer is arranged at the top and bottom.
- 531 -
3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS
The following operations can be done in each cell.
3.4.1 Basic Operations
A current cell can be moved up and down and right and left by
operating the cursor key.
Directing left at the Directing right at the

leftmost cell, current rightmost cell, current
cell moves on the cell moves on the
rightmost cell upper by leftmost cell lower by
one piece. one piece.
Operating page key, it is possible to scroll entire table up and down

by one page.
- 532 -
The range of the movement of the cursor is from the head to % about
each row.
- 533 -
3.5 EDITING OPEARTIONS
The following operations are available on each cell.
Operation Description
INSCEL Insert process to the upper part of the specified cell.
DELCEL Delete the specified cell.
CPYCEL Copy the specified cell to the specified position.
MOVCEL Move the specified cell to the specified position.
RENAME Modify the comment of the specified cell.
EDTPRG Edit the program including the specified cell.
STWAIT * Set the waiting to the specified cell.
CLWAIT * Release the specified waiting.
STTRNS * Set the transfer to the specified cell.
CLTRNS * Release the specified transfer.
ADD / * Add the optional block skip.
DEL / * Delete the optional block skip.
NOTE
Operations marked with * cannot be used on 1-path
lathe.
- 534 -
3.5.1 Insertion of a Cell
l Function
• Add a process.
• Add the process to the upper side.
• In NC program,
Process start block : G1992 Sx (xxxx)
Process end block : G1993
These codes are inserted automatically.
l Basic operation
1. Move cursor to the cell to be inserted.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP
% %
2. Press [INSCEL] soft-key.

TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL The dialog for the process name input
PROC NAME MIDDLE
N20 FINE N20 TAP is displayed.
% %
Input MIDDLE as an example.
3. Press OK, and the process will be inserted.

TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
Cursor moves to the new cell.
MIDDLE N20 TAP
N20 FINE %
(When cancel is pressed, return to
% previous state.)
l Others
• In case of having waiting in the lower, for not breaking the
waiting line, modify the height of the cell of other row that
have the waiting to twice.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2 TURRET 1 TURRET 2

N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP N20 TAP Height of
% % Insert N20 FINE cell
% %
becomes
twice.
- 535 -
• If the new cell is inserted on the cell having the waiting, the
waiting do not move to the new cell. (Transfer is also similar.)

N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS Leave
N30 FINE N30 TAP Insert N20 TRANS N20 TRANS transfer
% % N30 FINE N30 TAP as it is.
% %
• Even if current cell is input impropriety one, insertion of the

cell is possible. After insertion, the entire table is displayed
again, as the result, there are some case where overwriting is
executed.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2 TURRET 1 TURRET 2 As the

N10 ROUGH CAN’T INPUT N10 ROUGH result,
N20 MIDDLE N10 DRILL
overwrite on
the input
N30 FINE N20 TAP Insert N30 FINE N20 TAP impropriety
% % % % cell.
3.5.2 Deletion of a Cell
l Function
• Delete the process at the current cursor.
• In NC program,
Process start block : G1992 Sx (xxxx)
(Normal block)
Process end block : G1993
These blocks are deleted automatically.
l Basic operation
1. Move cursor to the cell to be deleted.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP
% %
- 536 -
2. Press [DELCEL] soft-key.

TURRET 1 TURRET 2 “ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL DELETE IT ?” is displayed in the message
N20 FINE N20 TAP display part.
% %
Press [YES] or [NO].
3. Press [YES], and the process will be deleted.

TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
The cursor position is left as it is.
% N20 TAP
(In case of “NO”, returns to former
%
state.)
l Others
• In case of having waiting in the lower line, for not breaking the
waiting line by adjusting after deletion, modify the height of
the cell that have the waiting to twice.

N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL N10 ROUGH N20 TAP Height
N20 FINE N20 TAP N20 FINE of cell
% %
Delete becomes
% %
twice.
• There is the cell that cannot be deleted.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH Input impropriety cell
N30 FINE N20 TAP
% % % cell
• When the cell that have waiting, the waiting is released.

(Transfer as well)
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL Release the
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS N30 FINE N20 TRANS partner of
Delete transfer,
N30 FINE N30 TAP % N30 TAP
% % % too.
(When one of the waiting member among the 3-path is deleted,

the rest waiting will not be released.)
- 537 -
3.5.3 Copying of a Cell
l Function
• Copy the process
• In NC program,
Start process block : G1992 Sx (xxxx)
End process block : G1993
The blocks between above two blocks and comment in the
G1992 block arc copied automatically.
l Basic Operation
1. Move the cursor to the source cell.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP
% %
2. Press [CPYCEL] soft-key.

TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
*N20 FINE N20 TAP Add “*” to the top of the source cell.
% %
3. Move cursor to the destination cell.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL Moreover background color of the source
*N20 FINE N20 TAP cell become green.
% % Press [CPYCEL] or [CANCEL].
4. Press [CELCPY], overwrite copy will be done if destination

process is vacant.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 FINE
(When cancel is pressed, return to
N20 FINE N20 TAP
previous state.)
% %
- 538 -
l Others
• When the destination process is not vacant, it is possible to
select overwrite, insert, and cancel.

N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL N10 ROUGH FINE Insert
&
*N20 FINE N20 TAP Select N20 FINE N10 DRILL
copy
% % Insert % N20 TAP
%
• There is the cell that cannot be specified as source and

destination.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N30 FINE N20 TAP
% % % cell
• The waiting and transfer will not be copied.

N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL N10 ROUGH N20 TRANS Transfer
*N20 TRANS N20 TRANS N20 TRANS N20 TRANS will not
N30 FINE N30 TAP Copy be copied.
N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % % %
- 539 -
3.5.4 Moving of a Cell
l Function
• Move the process (The source cell is removed.)
• In NC program,
The blocks between above two blocks and comment in the
G1992 block are moved automatically.
l Basic Operation
1. Move the cursor to the source cell.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP
% %
2. Press [CPYCEL].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
*N20 FINE N20 TAP Add “*” to the top of the source cell.
% %
3. Move cursor to the destination cell.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL Moreover background color of the
*N20 FINE N20 TAP source cell become green.
% % Press [CPYCEL] or [CANCEL].
4. Press [CELMOV], overwrite move will be done if destination

process is vacant.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 FINE
% N20 TAP (When cancel is pressed, return to
% previous state.)
- 540 -
l Others
• When the destination process is not vacant, it is possible to
select overwrite, insert, and cancel.
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL N10 ROUGH FINE Insert
&
*N20 FINE N20 TAP Select % N10 DRILL
move
% % Insert N20 TAP
%
• There is the cell that cannot be specified as source and

destination.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N30 FINE N20 TAP
% % % cell
• The waiting and transfer will not be moved.

N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL N10 ROUGH N10 TRANS Transfer
*N20 TRANS N20 TRANS N30 FINE N20 TRANS will not
N30 FINE N30 TAP Move % N30 TAP
be
moved.
% % %
• It is possible to move to input impropriety cell just in case

between the same line and turret.
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
N10 ROUGH *N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % % %
Move
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL Moving to
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS input
N30 FINE N30 TAP
impropriety
cell is
% % % %
done.
- 541 -
• It is possible to move to input impropriety cell just in case that

any cell in the same line and turret is input impropriety one.
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
N10 ROUGH CAN’T INPUT CAN’T INPUT
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
N30 FINE *N30 TAP
% % % %
Moving
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
Moving to
N10 ROUGH N30 TAP
input
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS impropriety
N30 FINE % cell is done.
% % %
- 542 -
3.5.5 Modification of Process Name
l Function
• Modify the process name.
• In NC program,
Modify comment in that block.
When clear the process name, delete comment with a round
bracket.
l Basic Operation
1. Move the cursor to the cell to be modified.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP
% %
2. Press [RENAME].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL The dialog for the process name input
PROC NAME MIDDLE is displayed. Input MIDDLE as an
N20 FINE N20 TAP
example.
% %
3. Press OK, and the process name will be modified.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 MIDDLE N20 TAP (When cancel is pressed, return to
% % previous state.)
l Others
• There is some cell whose name cannot be modified.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N30 FINE N20 TAP
% % % cell
- 543 -
3.5.6 Program Edit
l Function
• Edit the process.
• The NC Program with current cell is opened in all screen mode,
and the cursor is set to the head of the process with current
cell.
l Basic Operation
1. Move the cursor to the cell to be edited.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP
% %
2. Press [EDTPRG].
;
N10 G1992 S1 (ROUGH); The cursor of the edit screen
: automatically moves to the start
: position of the process.
G1993;
;
3. Do the edit work.

;
N10 G1992 S1 (ROUGH); The Edit work is done with usual
: edit screen. (all screen display by
G1993; the size substitution)
N20 G1992 S1 (FINE);
:
G00X0.Z0.; The following process can be
: similarly edited because of a usual
G1993; edit screen.
4. Press [EDWORK].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
The process edited on a usual edit screen
N20 FINE N20 TAP
becomes a current cell.
% %
- 544 -
l Others
• When select head of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i according to tool post
selection signal, it is necessary to set tool post selection signal
to the head that the target cell belongs to in advance.
• When edit work is started on the input impropriety cell, the
next effective process in the same turret will be opened.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2 ;
N10 ROUGH CAN’T EDIT N10 G1992 S1 (DRILL);
:
EDTPRG :
N30 FINE N20 TAP
G1993;
% % ;
- 545 -
3.5.7 Assign of Waiting
l Function
• Set the waiting between the process.
• In NC program,
Mxxx (Pxx) will be set to one or both of these blocks.
l Basic Operation
1. Press [STWAIT]. (Cursor position pretermission)
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP The software key array changes into
% % set waiting mode.
2. Move cursor to the source waiting, and press [SELECT].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
*N20 FINE N20 TAP Add “*” to the top of the selected cell.
% %
3. Move cursor to the destination waiting, and press [SELECT].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
Moreover background color of the
source-waiting cell become green.
*N20 FINE N20 TAP
% % Press any one of [SETTOP], [SETEND],
and [STBOTH].
4. Press [SET-].
• When [SETTOP] is pressed
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH (When finished normally, selected state will
be released automatically.)
N20 FINE N10 DRILL
% N20 TAP
%
- 546 -
• When [SETEND] is pressed
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL (When finished normally, selected state will
N20 FINE be released automatically.)
% N20 TAP
%
• When [STBOTH] is pressed
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N20 FINE N10 DRILL be released automatically.)
% N20 TAP
%
5. Press [RETURN], and release set waiting mode.

l Others
• There is some cell that cannot be specified as source and
destination waiting.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N30 FINE N20 TAP
% % % cell
• When the waiting has already been set, the waiting cannot be
set.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
*N20 WAIT N20 WAIT
N30 FINE N30 TAP Waiting
% % Operation
• In case of shortage of waiting M code, the waiting cannot be

set.
• It is possible to set the waiting just between upper parts or
lower parts.
- 547 -
• It is impossible to set waiting across other waiting.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
*N30 FINE N30 TAP
Waiting
% %
Operation
• It is impossible to set waiting between the process in the same
path.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
*N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
*N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % Waiting
Operation
- 548 -
3.5.8 Release of Waiting
l Function
• Release the waiting between the process.
• In NC program,
Mxxx (Pxx) will be deleted from one or both of these blocks.
l Basic Operation
1. Press [CLWAIT]. (Cursor position pretermission)
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL The software key array changes into
N20 FINE N20 TAP
release waiting mode.
% %
2. Move cursor to the cell that have waiting.

TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP Press any one of [CLTOP], [CLEND],
% % and [CLBOTH].
3. Press [CL-].
• When [CLTOP] is pressed
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
(The opposite waiting will also be
N20 FINE N20 TAP
released.)
% %
• When [CLEND] is pressed

TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP
% % released.)
• When [CLBOTH] is pressed
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP
released.)
% %
- 549 -
4. Press [RETURN], and release waiting mode.
l Others
• The transfer cannot be operated by release waiting.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
Release
N30 FINE N30 TAP
Waiting
% % Operation
- 550 -
3.5.9 Assign of Transfer
l Function
• Set the transfer between the process.
• In NC program,
Q0 Mxxx (Pxx) will be set to above block,
Mxxx (Pxx) will be set to above block.
l Basic Operation
1. Press [STTRNS]. (Cursor position pretermission)
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
The software key array changes into
N20 FINE N20 TAP
set waiting mode.
% %
2. Move cursor to the source transfer, and press [SELECT].

TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
*N20 FINE N20 TAP Add “*” to the top of the selected
% % cell.
3. Move cursor to the destination transfer, and press [SELECT].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2 Add “*” to the top of the selected

cell.
Moreover background color of the
*N20 FINE N20 TAP source waiting cell become green.
% % Press either [STTRNS] or
[CANCEL].
4. Press [STTRNS].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N20 FINE N10 DRILL be released automatically.)
% N20 TAP
%
5. Press [RETURN], and release set transfer mode.
- 551 -
l Others
• There is some cell that cannot be specified as source and
destination transfer.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N30 FINE N20 TAP
% % % cell
• When the waiting or transfer has already been set, the transfer
cannot be set.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
*N20 WAIT N20 WAIT
N30 FINE N30 TAP Transfer
% % Operation
• In case of shortage of waiting M code, the waiting cannot be

set.
• It is possible to set the transfer just between the cells that have
no waiting.
• It is impossible to set waiting across other waiting and transfer.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
*N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % Waiting
Operation
• It is impossible to set transfer between the process in the same

path.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
*N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
*N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % Transfer
Operation
- 552 -
3.5.10 Release Transfer
l Function
• Release the transfer between the process.
• In NC program,
Q0 Mxxx (Pxx) will be deleted from above block.
Mxxx (Pxx) will be deleted from above block.
l Basic Operation
1. Press [CLTRNS]. (Cursor position pretermission)
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS The software key array changes into
N30 FINE N30 TAP release transfer mode.
% %
2. Move cursor to the cell that have transfer.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS Press either [CLTRNS] or [CANCEL].
N30 FINE N30 TAP
% %
3. Press [CLTRANS].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
N30 FINE N30 TAP (The opposite transfer will also be
% % released.)
4. Press [RETURN], and release transfer mode.
- 553 -
l Others
• The waiting cannot be operated by release transfer.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS Release
N30 FINE N30 TAP Transfer
% %
Operation
- 554 -
3.5.11 Addition of Optional Block Skip for Each Path Program Check
l Function
• In NC program,
Add any one of “/7”, “/8”, and “9” to the top of each block
between above two blocks.
/7 : process belong to spindle-1. (except transfer process)
/8 : process belong to spindle-2. (except transfer process)
/9 : transfer process
l Basic Operation
Press [ADD /].
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % % %
Adding of optional block skip
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % % %
l Others
• Additional processing is not done for the block which has
G1992 and G1993.
G1992 S1; G1992 S1;

T0101; /7 T0101;
G00 X0. Z0.; /7 G00 X0. Z0.;
M01; /7 M01;
G1993; G1993;
- 555 -
• If “/” exist, “/” will be converted to “/1” in the additional

processing of optional block skip (/7, /8, /9)
G1992 S1; G1992 S1;

/ T0101; /7 /1 T0101;
/ G00 X0. Z0.; /7 /1 G00 X0. Z0.;
/ M01; /7 /1 M01;
G1993; G1993;
• If any one of “/7”, “/8”, and “/9” has already exists at the top
of the target block, exchange it instead of addting.
G1992 S1; G1992 S1;

/8 T0101; /7 T0101;
/8 G00 X0. Z0.; /7 G00 X0. Z0.;
/8 M01; /7 M01;
G1993; G1993;
- 556 -
3.5.12 Deletion of Optional Block Skip for Each Path Program Check
l Function
• In NC program,
Delete “/7”, “/8”, and “/9” at the top of each block between
above two blocks.
l Basic Operation
1. Press [DEL /].
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % % %
Deleting of optional block skip
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % % %
l Others
• Deletion processing is not done for the block which has G1992
and G1993.
G1992 S1; G1992 S1;

/7 T0101; T0101;
/7 G00 X0. Z0.; G00 X0. Z0.;
/7 M01; M01;
G1993; G1993;
- 557 -
3.6 DEALING OF THE PART PROGRAM WITH UNFITTED TO

PROCESS LIST FORM
1. The following screen will appear when NC program that is not
fitted to process list edit function is opened.
Press [YES], and process list edit function screen will appear.
NC program will be modified as follows.

TURRET 1 TURRET 2
O0200 O0200
G1992 S1 (NONECELL); Add G1992 S1 (NONECELL);
(PROC01 : SP-1) (PROC01 : SP-1)
(PROC02 : TRANS) (PROC02 : TRANS)
(PROC03 : SP-2) (PROC03 : SP-2)
G1993; Add G1993;
% %
- 558 -
2. And then, add (sum of all process – 1) piece cell by inserting cell
operation.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
O0200 O0200
G1992 S1 (PROC1); G1992 S1 (PROC1);
(PROC01 : SP-1) (PROC01 : SP-1)
(PROC03 : SP-2) (PROC03 : SP-2)
G1993; G1993;
G1992 S1 (PROC2); Add G1992 S1 (PROC2);
G1993; G1993;
G1992 S2 (PROC3); Add G1992 S2 (PROC3);
G1993; G1993;
% %
3. Moreover press [EDTPRG], move the G1993 and G1992 blocks

between of processes using cut and paste in the normal edit
screen.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
O0200 O0200
G1992 S1 (PROC1); G1992 S1 (PROC1);
(PROC01 : SP-1) (PROC01 : SP-1)
G1993; Move G1993;
G1992 S1 (PROC2); G1992 S1 (PROC2);
G1993; Move G1993;
G1992 S2 (PROC3); G1992 S2 (PROC3);
(PROC03 : SP-2) (PROC03 : SP-2)
G1993; G1993;
% %
4. Press [EDWORK] again, and set transfer.

TURRET 1 TURRET 2
O0200 O0200
G1992 S1 (PROC1); G1992 S1 (PROC1);
(PROC01 : SP-1) (PROC01 : SP-1)
G1993; G1993;
G1992 S1 Q0 M200 (PROC2); Change G1992 S1 Q0 M200 (PROC2);
G1993 M201; G1993 M201;
Change
G1992 S2 (PROC3); G1992 S2 (PROC3);
(PROC03 : SP-2) (PROC03 : SP-2)
G1993; G1993;
% %
5. Finish transition work.
- 559 -
3.7 FORMAT
Start Process : G1992

Sx : Select spindle
S1 : Spindle-1, S2 : Spindle-2
Qx : Attribute
Q0 : Transfer
Mx : Waiting M code
NC parameter from 8110 to 8111
Px : Waiting partner
Combination of existing path number
Finish process : G1993

Mx : waiting M code
NC parameter from 8110 to 8111
Px : waiting partner
Combination of existing path number
- 560 -
3.8 OTHERS
• Only the combination instruction of a comprehensible path

number is supported about P command of waiting M code.
• Waiting M code is recognized just in the same block for the
process beginning word and the process end word.
• This function is not supported in the background mode.
• As to moving cell and copying cell, the cell content is operated as
it is.
• “/7”, “/8”, and “/9” in the combination of “/” and figure for
optional block skip are reserved for “add /” function and “DEL /”
function. Therefore those word should not be used in the user
program freely.
- 561 -
V. TOOL
MANAGEMENT
FUNCTION
TURNOPEEZG44 TOOL MANAGEMENT 1.ASSOCIATING TOOL NUMBERS WITH OFFSET NUMBERS
1 ASSOCIATING TOOL NUMBERS WITH

OFFSET NUMBERS
NOTE
To use tool management functions with Doosan Infracore
eZ Guide i, you require tool management function
options.
For details, refer to the manual issued by the
On the screen for associating a tool number with a offset number, set
the number of the tool that will use a offset number. When registered
on this screen, the tool number is registered in the tool management
data table, together with the offset number and the tool type.
This screen is effective only if bit 0 (ORT) of parameter No. 14823 is
1.
- 565 -
1.ASSOCIATING TOOL NUMBERS WITH OFFSET NUMBERS TOOL MANAGEMENT TURNOPEEZG44
1.1 SELECTING THE SCREEN FOR ASSOCIATING A TOOL

NUMBER WITH A OFFSET NUMBER
<1> Press [>] on the initial screen of each mode to display the soft
keys shown below, then press [SETING]:
<2> The following screen appears.
<3> From this screen, select “SETTING OF OFFSET NO. AND

TOOL NO.”, and the screen for associating a tool number with a
tool offset number appears.
- 566 -
1.2 SCREEN DISPLAY ITEMS
Display items
OFS NO.:
You can only view offset numbers, and cannot set new ones.
The range of available offset numbers depends on the setting of
parameter No. 14824.
TOOL NO:
To register a new tool number in an empty tool number field,
enter a new number and press the INPUT key.
To invalidate an existing tool number, enter 0.
NOTE
When a tool number is entered, the associated
offset number is set in the “offset number” item of
the data having that tool number in the tool
management data table.
If the tool management data table does not contain
data having that tool number, the system searches
for tool management data having no tool number,
and the offset number associated with the entered
tool number is set in that tool management data.
If a tool number is deleted (0 is entered), all of the
tool management data having that tool number is
deleted.
- 567 -
1.ASSOCIATING TOOL NUMBERS WITH OFFSET NUMBERS TOOL MANAGEMENT TURNOPEEZG44
TYPE:
To select the desired one, press the corresponding soft key.
Soft keys
[CLOSE]:
Closes the window.
[CHCURS]:
Switches the system between cursor modes.
- 568 -
1.3 DISABLE WARNING MESSAGE
WRONG VALUE OF PARAMETER NO. 14824 :

Displayed if the value of parameter No. l4824 is outside the
range of 1 to 999 and “SETTING OF OFFSET NO. AND TOOL
NO.” is selected from the [SETING] menu.
INVALID INPUT :
Displayed if a tool number outside the valid range is entered.
TOOL NUMBER ALREADY EXISTS :

Displayed if the same tool number as that entered has already
been set.
TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA ACCESS ERROR :

Displayed if the system fails to read or write tool and offset
numbers.
- 569 -
2.VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES TOOL MANAGEMENT TURNOPEEZG44
2 VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET

VALUES
In addition to the conventional tool offset setting screen, a screen is
available which allows you to view and set tool offset values using
tool numbers and offset types.
This screen is effective only if bit 1 (TOD) of parameter No. 14823 is
1.
- 570 -
TURNOPEEZG44 TOOL MANAGEMENT 2.VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES
2.1 SELECTING THE TOOL NUMBER-BY-TOOL NUMBER

TOOL OFFSET SETTING SCREEN
keys shown below:
<2> From this screen, press [T-OFS], and the tool offset setting
screen appears.
<3> Moving the cursor to the “T:GEO-TOL” tab causes the

“Turning geometric offset screen (on a tool number by tool
number basis)” to appear.
<4> Moving the cursor to the “T:WER-TOL” tab causes the

“Turning wear offset screen (on a tool number by tool number
basis)” to appear.
<5> Moving the cursor to “M:OFS-TOL” tab causes the “Milling

offset screen (on a tool number by tool number basis)” to
appear.
NOTE
If the “T:GEOM”, “T:WEAR”, and “M:OFFSET” tabs
are selected, their respective conventional “T:Tool
geometric offset”, “T:Tool wear offset”, and “M tool
wear offset” screens appear.
- 571 -
(1) Turning geometric offset screen (on a tool

number by tool number basis)
- Display items
TOOL NO.:
The tool numbers in the tool management data table are
displayed.
You cannot set new ones from this screen.
TYPE:
Offset types are displayed.
Values ranging from 1 to the “number of offset types” set in
parameter No. 14825 are displayed sequentially.
If the setting of parameter No. 143825 is 0, nothing is displayed
in the offset type column.
X-AXIS, Z-AXIS, Y-AXIS, RADIUS, VIRT. TIP:

The offset number corresponding to each combination of tool
number and offset type is determined, and the offset values of
the offset number are displayed.
The settings are made in the data for the offset number
determined with the combination of tool number and offset type.
Valid data range:

Depends on the setting of the tool offset (described later).
Data to be referenced:
Tool offset data
- Soft keys
[CLOSE]:
Closes the window.
[CHCURS]:
- 572 -
(2) Turning wear offset screen (on a tool number

by tool number basis)
The display items are the same as those on the “Turning geometric
offset screen (on a tool number by tool number basis)”.
(3) Milling offset screen (on a tool number by tool

number basis)
The display items are the same as those on the “Turning geometric
offset screen (on a tool number by tool number basis)”.
- 573 -
2.3 TOOL OFFSET
A value of up to six digits (not including '-' and '.') can be set. For tool
offset in T mode, if the “7-digit tool offset input” option is effective, a
value of up to seven digits can be set.
The valid number of digits in the fractional part depends on the
settings of the NC.
- 574 -
2.4 NOTES
NOTE
If bit 1 (TOF) of parameter No. 143823 is 0, the tool
number-by-tool number offset value setting screen
does not appear.
Screens that appear differently depending on

whether options are provided
“Tool geometric and wear offset” (lathe systems (standard models and
complex machining functions)), “tool offset memory type B”, and
“tool offset memory type C” (machining systems) are optional
functions. If these options are not provided, screens appear as shown
below.
- Screen that appears when “Set tool offset” is

selected
- Turning offset screen (on a tool number by tool

number basis)
- Milling offset screen (on a tool number by tool

number basis)
(If “tool offset memory type B” is provided (machining systems))
- 575 -
(If “tool offset memory type B” and “tool offset memory type C” are
not provided (machining systems) and “tool geometric and wear
offset” is not provided (complex machines))
“Y-axis offset” is an optional function. If this option is not provided,

screens appear as shown below.
- Turning geometric offset screen (on a tool number

by tool number basis)
- Turning wear offset screen (on a tool number by

tool number basis)
NOTE
1 On machining center CNCs, the turning tool offset
setting screen does not appear.
2 For lathe CNCs (standard models), the milling tool
offset setting screen does not appear.
- 576 -
2.5 DISABLE WARNING MESSAGE
WRONG VALUE OF PARAMETER No. 14823 :

Displayed if the value of parameter No. l4823 is outside the
range of 1 to 999 and the tool number-by-tool number tool offset
setting screen is selected. No data is displayed on the screen.

Displayed if the system fails to read or write tool and offset
numbers.
- 577 -
3.VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA TOOL MANAGEMENT TURNOPEEZG44
3 VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL

MANAGEMENT DATA
This screen is effective only if bit 3 (TMG) of parameter No. 14823 is
1.
- 578 -
TURNOPEEZG44 TOOL MANAGEMENT 3.VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA
3.1 SELECTING THE TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA SETTING

SCREEN
<3> From this screen, select “TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA”, and

the tool management data setting screen appears.
- 579 -
3.2 MAGAZINE DATA SCREENS (MAGAZINE 1 TO 4)
3.2.1 Screen Display Items
The tool number, type, group number, and offset number

corresponding to each pot are displayed.
You can change tool numbers, types, and group numbers.
Display items
POT:
Pot numbers are displayed.
You cannot set new ones from the screen.
NOTE
On the individual magazine data screens, as many
pots as the “number of data items” set in
parameters Nos. 13222, 13227, 13232, and 13237
are displayed, beginning with the “start pot number”
set in NC parameters Nos. 13223, 13228, 13233,
and 13238.
TOOL NO.:
To register a new tool number in an empty tool number field,
enter a new number and press the INPUT key.
TOOL KIND:
The “tool type” corresponding to each tool number, as
determined from the tool management data table, is displayed.
- 580 -
GROUP:
The “group number” corresponding to each tool number, as
To set a new one, enter a value.
OFFSET NO.:
The “offset number” corresponding to each tool number, as
You cannot change offset numbers from this screen.
Soft keys
[CLOSE]:
Closes the window.
[CHCURS]:
3.2.2 Displayed Warning Messages
MAGAZINE MANAGEMENT DATA ACCESS ERROR :

Displayed if the system fails to normally read or write the data
corresponding to the pot numbers in the magazine management
data table.

Displayed if the system fails to read or write tool management
data such as tool numbers, types, and group numbers.
INVALID INPUT :
Displayed if the entered value is outside the valid range.
- 581 -
3.3 SPINDLE AND STANDBY POSITION TOOL DISPLAY

SCREEN
3.3.1 Screen Display Items
This screen displays the tools at spindle positions and at subpots

(standby positions).
The number of displayed spindle positions and the number of

displayed standby positions vary depending on the settings of
Parameter No. 13250 (number of effective spindles)
Parameter No. 13251 (number of effective standby positions)
If the setting of parameter No. 13250 is 4 (maximum) and that of
parameter No. 13251 is 4 (maximum), the screen appears as shown
below.
Display items
TOOL NO.:
To change the tool number at a spindle or standby position,
move the cursor to that number, enter a new value, and press
[INPUT].
- 582 -
TOOL KIND:
The “tool type” corresponding to each tool number, as
GROUP:
The “group number” corresponding to each tool number, as
To set a new one, enter a value.
OFFSET NO.:
The “offset number” corresponding to each tool number, as
You cannot change offset numbers from this screen.
Explanation of soft keys

[CLOSE]:
Closes the window.
[CHCURS]:
3.3.2 Displayed Warning Messages
MAGAZINE MANAGEMENT DATA ACCESS ERROR :

Displayed if the system fails to normally read or write spindle or
standby position data from the magazine management data table.

data such as tool numbers, types, and group numbers.
INVALID INPUT :
Displayed if the entered tool number is outside the valid range.
- 583 -
4.VIEWING AND SETTING LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA TOOL MANAGEMENT TURNOPEEZG44
4 VIEWING AND SETTING LIFE

MANAGEMENT DATA
This screen is effective only if bit 4 (TLF) of parameter No. 14823 is
1.
- 584 -
TURNOPEEZG44 TOOL MANAGEMENT 4.VIEWING AND SETTING LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA
4.1 SELECTING THE LIFE ,ANAGEMENT DATA SETTING

SCREEN
<3> From this screen, select “TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

DATA”, and the life management data setting screen appears.
- 585 -
Display items
PRIORITY:
In the first column for each tool, the value indicating the priority
of the tool is displayed.
By positioning the cursor on this item and entering a new value,
you can change the priority of that tool (described in detail
later).
As many values as the number of tools in the group plus one are
displayed so that you can add a new tool.
GROUP:
The group numbers in the tool management data table are
displayed.
COUNT:
The count types (time or number of times of use) in the tool
management data table are displayed.
For each group, the life count type (time or number of times of
use) can be specified.
To specify the desired type, press the corresponding soft key.
TOOL NO.:
The tool numbers with the same group number are displayed.
The numbers are displayed in the order in which the tools will be
used.
You can register a tool number with the group.
To register a tool, move the cursor at the bottom (blank portion)
of the tool number column for that group and press [REGIST] or
press INPUT. On the contrary, if you want to delete an existing
tool, move the cursor to the number of that tool and press
[DELETE].
- 586 -
LIFE:
The life of each tool, as determined from the tool management
data table, is displayed.
You can set the life of each tool.
By pressing [GRPALL] after entering a value, you can set the
same life for all the tools in the group.
In the first row for each group, the sum of the lives of the tools
registered with that group is displayed.
REST LIFE:
The rest of the life of each tool, as determined from the tool
management data table, is displayed.
By reconfiguring data, you can increase the rest of the life.
In the first row for each group, the sum of the rests of the lives of
the tools registered with that group is displayed.
NOTICE LIFE:
The announced life of each tool, as determined from the tool
management data table, is displayed.
You can set the announced life of each tool (rest of life after
which an announcement signal is issued).
By pressing [GRPALL] after entering a value, you can set the
same announced life for all the tools in the group.
In the first row for each group, the rest of life after which the life
state of that group changes to “announced” is displayed.
You can also set the announced life of each group.
STATE:
The state of each tool, as determined from the tool management
data table (invalid, present, absent, in use, skipped (tool
damaged)), is displayed.
In the first row for each group, the life state of that group (not
announced or announced) is displayed.
- 587 -
4.3 CHANGING TOOL PRIORITY
You can change the priority of the tools in a group.
Procedure for changing priority:

<1> Position the cursor on the priority value in the first column for
the desired tool and enter a new value.
<2> Press [ORDER] or press INPUT, and the priority of the tool
changes to the new value. Those tools that have priority values
greater than the entered new value before the change are
assigned their previous values plus one, respectively.
- 588 -
4.4 DISPLAY LIFE VALUE OF TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

DATA SCREEN
When the tool life data is changed with operating program, the tool
life data is updated on the tool life management data screen.
4.4.1 Operation
<1> Press [SETTING].

<2> Select “TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA” from the menu
screen.
(The case count type is “COUNT”)
(The case count type is “TIME”)
- 589 -
<4> If the tool life data is changed with operating program, the
displayed life data is updated.
(The case count type is “COUNT”)
(The case count type is “TIME”)
- 590 -
4.5 GROUP NUMBER LIST DISPLAY
A list of the life states of groups can be displayed. Groups can be

sorted in the order of number or life state.
Pressing [GRPLST] when the life management data screen is

displayed displays the following screen:
In the "PREVIOUS NOTICE" column, "NOTICED" is displayed only

for those groups with the Previous Notice Flag set. In the "STATE"
column, "OVER" is displayed for a group when the life states of all
tools belonging to the group are "OVER", "SKIP", and/or "NO-
NMG".
- 591 -
Display of groups sorted in the order of number or

life state
When [S SORT] is pressed on the group number list screen, the group
numbers are displayed in the life state/previous notice order.
NOTE
When group numbers are displayed in the order of
life state, the groups are displayed in the following
order:
<1> Groups for which "OVER" is displayed in the
"STATE" column
<2> Groups for which "NOTICED" is displayed in
the "PREVIOUS NOTICE" column
<3> Groups other than <1> and <2>
Pressing [N SORT] displays groups sorted by group number.
Group selection
Place the cursor over a group number to be selected, then press
[SELECT]. The life management data screen of the selected group
number appears.
- 592 -
4.6 DISPLAY OF GROUP NUMBER LIST
On the group number list, the state of the group which is not managed
is displayed as “NO-MNG”
The life of the group of which life state is over can be restored on the
group number list.
4.6.1 Display Life States of Group
On the tool life management data screen, pressing [GRPLST] displays

the following screen.
When the states of the all tools, which belong to same group, are not
managed, the group life state is displayed as “NO-MNG”.
And the life state of the group, which is not “NO-MNG” and does not
include “ENABLE” or “USING” tool, is displayed as “OVER”
Form this screen, pressing [S SORT] displays the following screen.
- 593 -
The group which state is no managed is displayed at the bottom of the

list as following.
4.6.2 Restore Group Life
On the tool life management data screen, pressing [G FILL] displays

the following screen.
Move the cursor to the group of which state is “NO-MNG”, and press
[G FILL]. And the life states of the tools, which belong to the group,
change to “ENABLE”, and the rest life value becomes same as the
life value.
And the group notice life state changes “UN-NOTICE”.
The tool life state which is “NO-MNG” or “SKIP” is not updated
when [G FILL] is pressed.
- 594 -
- 595 -
4.7 DISPLAYED WARNING MESSAGES
“TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA ACCESS ERROR”:

data such as tool numbers and group numbers.
“INVALID INPUT”:
Displayed if the entered value is outside the valid range.
“GROUP LIFE STATE IS NOT 'OVER'.”

When [G FILL] is pressed on the tool life management data
screen, this warning is displayed if the group state of the current
cursor position is not “OVER”.
- 596 -
4.8 SETTING THE LIFE NOTICE FLAG
To display the life state ("NOTICED" or "UN-NOTICE") of a group

on the life management data screen, the "Previous Notice Flag" of
tool management data needs to be set with the PMC.
The Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i system displays "NOTICED" as the state of

a group when the "Previous Notice Flag" is set to the state described
below.
If bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 = 0

When the "Previous Notice Flag" of one of the tools that belong
to a group is set to "NOTICED"
If bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 = 1
When the "Previous Notice Flags" of all tools that belong to a
group are set to "NOTICED"
Method of modifying the PMC ladder program

Modify the ladder program so that the tool management data
"Previous Notice Flag" of the tool being used is set to 1
("NOTICED") when the NC outputs a tool life arrival notice signal.
For the "Previous Notice Flag" of tool management data, bit 7 of
customization item 0 is used.
Item Bit Meaning Description of data

Previous Notice 0:UN-NOTICE
7
Flag 1:NOTICED
6
5
Customization item
4
0
3
2
1
0
- 597 -
5.TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA LIST SCREEN TOOL MANAGEMENT TURNOPEEZG44
5 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA LIST

SCREEN
The tool life state of all tools can be displayed on the tool life
management data list screen.
- 598 -
TURNOPEEZG44 TOOL MANAGEMENT 5.TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA LIST SCREEN
5.1 SELECTING THE LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA LIST

SCREEN
<1> Press [SETTING], and the following screen appears.
This item is displayed when the parameter No.14823#5 is ’1’.
- 599 -
5.2 LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA LIST SCREEN
<1> From "BASIC" tab screen on SETTINGS menu, select “TOOL

LIFE DATA LIST”,and the following screen appears.
• Tool life state for all tools are displayed as a list form.
• Group number is displayed at the left end.
• On this screen, you can change the priority of the tools which are
belong to the same group with cursor pointed tool.
<2> Move the cursor to “TYPE”, and the following screen appears.
• On this screen, you can change the count type of the tools which
are belong to the same group with cursor pointed tool.
- 600 -
TURNOPEEZG44 TOOL MANAGEMENT 5.TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA LIST SCREEN
<3> Move the cursor to “TOOL NO.”, and the following screen
appears.
• On this screen, you can change the tool number of which is

pointed by the cursor.
<4> Move the cursor to “LIFE”, and the following screen appears.
• On this screen, you can change the tool life value of which is
- 601 -
<5> Move the cursor to “STATE”, and the following screen appears.
• On this screen, you can change the tool life state of which is
<6> Pressing [GRPLST] displays the list of the life states of groups.
Place the cursor over a group number to be selected, then press
[SELECT]. The life management data list screen appears and
the cursor displays on the top tool of the selected group.
<7> When the tool life data is changed with operating program, the
tool life data is updated on the tool life management data list
screen.
- 602 -
TURNOPEEZG44 TOOL MANAGEMENT 6.MODAL DISPLAY OF OFFSET TYPES
6 MODAL DISPLAY OF OFFSET TYPES

Two tool offset number specification methods are available: the
conventional method in which a offset number independent of a tool
number is directly specified, and the method in which a offset type
associated with a tool number is specified. With the latter, when a
offset type is specified, the offset type is displayed at the modal
information display position as long as the offset type remains
effective.
- 603 -
6.MODAL DISPLAY OF OFFSET TYPES TOOL MANAGEMENT TURNOPEEZG44
• Screen that appears when a offset number is directly specified

(on the lathe)
This screen is the same as the conventional one.
• Screen that appears when a offset type is specified (on the lathe)
If bit 7 (STS) of parameter No. 14823 is 1 and the offset type is

displayed, the offset type is displayed after 'T-' in the status
display section.
• Screen that appears when a offset number is directly specified

(on the milling machine)
This screen is the same as the conventional one.
• Screen that appears when a offset type is specified (on the

milling machine)
If bit 7 (STS) of parameter No. 14823 is 1 and the offset type is

displayed, the offset type is displayed after 'D-' and 'H-' in the
status display section.
- 604 -
TURNOPEEZG44 TOOL MANAGEMENT 6.MODAL DISPLAY OF OFFSET TYPES
6.2 DISPLAYED OFFSET TYPES (SET BY THE MACHINE

TOOL BUILDER)
In the status display section, offset types are displayed by referencing

the following variables:
#90248, D code offset type on the milling machine

#90249, offset type on the lathe and H code offset type on the milling
machine
When specifying a tool offset number, the machine tool builder is

required to set a offset type in variables #90248 and #90249 in the
called macro program, using T, D, and H codes.
If directly specifying a offset number, instead of specifying a offset
type, the machine tool builder is required to set the above variables to
null.
- 605 -
7.DISPLAY TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA OF CNC STANDARD SCREEN TOOL MANAGEMENT TURNOPEEZG44
7 DISPLAY TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA

OF CNC STANDARD SCREEN
By pressing the soft key displayed on the Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i screen,
it is possible to change the screen to the tool management data table
on the NC side.
In order to use this feature, it is necessary to set the parameter
No.14823.
- 606 -
TURNOPEEZG44 TOOL MANAGEMENT 7.DISPLAY TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA OF CNC STANDARD SCREEN
7.1 OPERATION
<1> At the case of the parameter TLD(No.14823#6) setting '1' ,the

following [TL-MNG] is displayed on the base screen in the each
mode.
(Example) EDIT mode
<2> Pressing [TL-MNG] displays the following tool management

data screen.
(Magazine management table screen)
(Tool management data table screen)
- 607 -
7.DISPLAY TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA OF CNC STANDARD SCREEN TOOL MANAGEMENT TURNOPEEZG44
NOTE
Either “Magazine management table screen” or
“Tool management data table screen” is displayed.
The screen previously displayed is appeared.
<3> On this screen, if the function keys for startup Doosan Infracore
eZ Guide i are pressed, the screen returns to the Doosan Infracore
eZ Guide i base screen.
- 608 -
TURNOPEEZG44 TOOL MANAGEMENT 8.OTHERS
8 OTHERS
- 609 -
8.OTHERS TOOL MANAGEMENT TURNOPEEZG44
8.1 RETURN TO MENU SCREEN
It is possible to return to the menu screen from tool management

screen. And it is possible to return to the base screen as before by
parameter setting.
8.1.1 Return to SETTINGS Menu Screen
<1> Press [SETTING]
<2> From “BASIC” menu screen, select “TOOL LIFE DATA”,and

the following screen appears.
<3> Pressing [RETURN] displays the following menu screen. The

cursor is displayed on the position of previous selected screen
(in this case “TOOL LIFE DATA”)
- 610 -
TURNOPEEZG44 TOOL MANAGEMENT 8.OTHERS
NOTE
“SETTING OF OFFSET AND TOOL NO.”,”TOOL
MANAGEMENT DATA”, and “TOOL LIFE DATA
LIST” are the same as "TOOL LIFE DATA"
When the parameter No. 14850#2 is ‘1’, [CLOSE] is displayed

instead of [RETURN]. Pressing [CLOSE] returns to the base screen
as before.
- 611 -
8.OTHERS TOOL MANAGEMENT TURNOPEEZG44
8.2 INHIBITION OF EDITING TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA AT

CNC STANDARD SCREEN
On the tool management data screen of NC side, it is possible to

inhabit to edit the tool management data.
8.2.1 Operations
In the case of the parameter No.14851#7 on, when [EDIT] is pressed

on the tool management data screen, the following waning is
displayed. And the tool management data cannot be altered at NC
screen.
“WRITE PROTECTED”
- 612 -
VI. EXAMPLE OF
PROGRAMMING
OPERATION
TURNOPEEZG44 EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING 1.EXPLANATORY NOTES
1 EXPLANATORY NOTES
WARNING
All data described in this Part such as parameter,
offset data and part program cannot be used for
actual machining. Actual data varies from one
machine model to another. Refer to the applicable
manual supplied by the respective machine tool
builders for details.
If the set data does not match the characteristic of
a specific machine, the tool may bump against the
workpiece, and the machine may be forced to
perform unnatural machining, possibly causing
damage to the tool and/or machine, and even
injuries.
The part program made by using Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i has a form of
ISO-code program with G-code and so on.
You must enter the program used for such as tool changing, tool
offset, spindle rotation, approaching and releasing in the form of ISO-
code program.
In addition to those actions, you can enter the part program for
complicated machining motions, which are usually difficult to make
by ISO-code form, as a “Cycle machining” by using menu
programming method. This cycle machining is made in form of a
block including G-4digits and necessary data items.
In the following explanations, the contents of a square frame mean the
actual operations, and each operation are described as follows.
[NEWPRG] : Push a soft-key

12345 : Enter numeric data
INPUT : Push an INPUT key
↓↑→← : Push a CURSOR key
ßÝ : Push a PAGE key
(CREATE NEW PROG) : Name of Window or Data item
<START> : Name of Tab
<<1.CYLINDER>> : Menu item
- 615 -
2.LATHE EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING TURNOPEEZG44
2 LATHE
Example) Outer Roughing/Finishing, C-axis drilling
Workpiece : Round bar (φ100x80)
1st Process : Outer roughing by General purpose tool
for roughing (T0101)
2nd Process : Outer finishing by General purpose tool
for finishing (T0202)
3rd Process : C-axis end face drilling by Drill (T0303)
R3
80°
R3
60° C2
φ100 φ60 φ35 φ31 φ22
20
2
30
50
80
- 616 -
TURNOPEEZG44 EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING 2.LATHE
2.1 SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA
WARNING
1 Operation of tool offset setting varies from one
machine model to another. So operations
described in this section may differ from those ion
actual machine.
As to the actual operation of tool offset setting on
the actual machine, refer to the applicable manual
supplied by the respective machine tool builders for
details.
injuries.
2 As to the operations on a machine described in this
chapter, refer to the applicable manual supplied by
the respective machine tool builders for details.
If the operation does not match the characteristic of
injuries.
- 617 -
2.1.1 Setting of Z-axis Offset Data
(1) Set a standard workpiece on a chuck of lathe. After then, for

safety, take measure to keep fully safety such as closing the
machine door.
(2) Execute the machine reference point return of X-and Z-axis.
(3) Output T-code in MDI mode, and select the tool for measuring.
(4) Make a spindle rotate by fully safety speed.
(5) Cut surface A of the following drawing in manual mode with a
actual tool.
+X
Chuck
Surface B
α Surface A
+Z
Work zero point
(6) Release the tool in X-axis direction only, without moving Z-axis.
(7) Stop the spindle.
(8) Measure distance β from the zero point in the workpiece
coordinate system to surface A.
Operate as follows on the Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i screen.
[T-OFS]
(TOOL OFFSET)
<GEOMETRY OFFSET>
[CHCURS]
(ITEM <--> will be displayed on the right upper part of the window)
→
<<Z-AXIS>>
↓
<<Offset number for the used tool>>
[MEASUR]
(CALCULATE OFFSET(MEASURE))
β INPUT (Z WORK COORD.TARGET)
Check the result of calculation displayed in the (RESULT)
[INPUT]
(GEOMTERY OFFSET)
- 618 -
- 619 -
2.1.2 Setting of X-axis Offset Data
Continuously after setting of Z-axis offset data, set the X-axis offset
data as follows.
(2) Cut surface B of the following drawing in manual mode with a
actual tool.
(3) Release the tool in Z-axis direction only, without moving X-axis.
(4) Measure the diameter α of surface B. Set this value as the
measured value for X-axis in the desired offset No.
(TOOL OFFSET)
<GEOMETRY OFFSET>
←
<<X-AXIS>>
↓
<<Offset number for the used tool>>
[MEASUR]
α INPUT (X WORK COORD.TARGET)
[INPUT]
(GEOMTERY OFFSET)
Repeat the above procedure of Z-axis and X-axis offset data

measurement operations for necessary tools.
NOTE
1 Always measure the axis of diameter specification
in terms of diameter value.
2 When the measured value is input as the geometry
offset value by [MEASUR], the corresponding wear
offset value is set o.
3 Wear offset data is used for offsetting the error
measured on the machined product or worn down
amount of a tool.
Refer to the applicable manual supplied by the
respective machine tool builders for details.
- 620 -
2.2 SETTING OF WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT DATA
After setting the geometry offset data for necessary tools, set the work
zero point on the actual workpiece used for machining.
On the lathe, the rotating center line of a workpiece is usually set to
work zero point of X-axis. So, the work zero point of X-axis need not
be set again for new workpiece.
For Z-axis work zero point,, you must set again for new workpiece
when you change to new one.
In this section, operations for setting the workpiece end surface to the
work zero point are described.
(1) Set the actually machined workpiece on a chuck of lathe. After
then, for safety, take measure to keep fully safety such as
closing the machine door.
(2) Execute the machine reference point return of X-and Z-axis.
(3) Output T-code in MDI mode, and select the tool for measuring.
(5) Cut surface A of the following drawing in manual mode with a
actual tool.
+X
Chuck
Surface A
+Z
Work zero point
(6) Release the tool in X-axis direction only, without moving Z-axis.
(7) Stop the spindle.
(8) Define the end surface amount β .
- 621 -
Operate as follows on the Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i screen.
[WK SET]
(WORK CORRDINATE SYSTEM)
<WORKPIECE ORIGIN>
(TAB <--> will be displayed on the right upper part of the window)
→
<WORKPIECE SHIFT>
[CHCURS]
→
<<Z>>
[MEASUR]
β INPUT (WORK COORD.TARGET)
[INPUT]
(WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM)
As the result of the above operations, confirm that the absolute

coordinate of the Z-axis is changed to the value of entered β value.
- 622 -
2.3 PREPARING OF THE FIXED FORM SENTENCE MENU
As to the fixed form sentence, machine tool builder usually sets the
suitable menu for specified respective machine. But, you can enter his
own menu on the Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i screen by yourself.
2.3.1 Entering the Fixed Form Sentence for Turning Machining
Enter the fixed form sentence menu which will be called by the soft-
key [FIXFRM] in the soft-key group for turning machining.
[SETTING]
(SETTING)
<BASIC>
↓
<<2.REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR TURNING>>
[SELECT]
(REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR TURNING)
<FORM1>
[NEW]
(CREATE NEW FIXED FORM SENTENCE)
<SENTENCE NAME : >
START PROCEDURE INPUT
<REGISTERED SENTENCE : >
G28 U0 W0 ; T? ; G99 G96 S? ; M03 ; G00 X120. Z20. ;
[INSERT]
[CLOSE]
- 623 -
2.3.2 Entering of the Fixed Form Sentence for Milling Machining
key [FIXFRM] in the soft-key group for milling machining.
Enter data for the program for milling starting procedure and program
end procedure.
[SETTING]
(SETTING)
<BASIC>
↓
<<1.REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING>>
[SELECT]
(REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING)
<FORM1>
[NEW]
<SENTENCE NAME : >
C-AXIS MILLING START INPUT
M21. ; T? ; G98 G97 ; M03 S? ; G00 X120. Z20. ;
[INSERT]
→
<FORM5>
[NEW]
<SENTENCE NAME : >
PROGRAM END INPUT
M05. ; G00 X200. ; G28 U0 W0 ; M02 ;
[INSERT]
[CLOSE]
- 624 -
2.4 SETTING OF TOOL DATA
Set the necessary tool data. These tool data are used for displaying
tool form of animation and calculation of cutting angle in the cycle
machining.
T0101 : General purpose roughing tool
T0202 : General purpose finishing tool
T0303 : Drilling tool
Display “TOOL OFFSET” window by [T-OFS]
GEOMETRY OFFSET
NO. X-AXIS Z-AXIS RADIUS VIRT.TIP
001 -200.000 -300.000 0.800 3
002 -210.000 -310.000 0.400 3
003 -220.000 -330.000 3.000 0
NOTE
1 The above offset data are just an example, and they
cannot be used for actual machining.
2 The above offset number 003 is used for drilling tool,
and if you use it for animation, you must set the
radius amount of the drill to radius offset data.
Display “TOOL DATA” tab by pushing cursor key →

TOOL DATA
NO. TOOL SET CUT AN NOS AN
001 GENERAL 1 90.0 80.0
002 GENERAL 1 90.0 80.0
003 DRILL 2 140.0
- 625 -
2.5 CREATING OF PART PROGRAM
In the Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i , background editing can be used, but in

this section, part program creating operations are described by using
foreground editing.
2.5.1 Creating New Part Program
Create a new part program of O1234.

1. In case of creating a new part program directly
Select EDIT mode by using a mode-selecting switch on a machine-operating panel

[NEWPRG]
(CREATE NEW PROGRAM)
1234 [CREATE] (NEW PROGRAM NO.)
2. In case of creating a new part program on the program list window

[O-LIST]
(OPEN PROGRAM)
[NEW]
Select the newly entered program by ↓
[OPEN]
- 626 -
2.5.2 Operations of “START” Menu
By pushing [START] in the soft-key menu for turning machining, the

window “INSERT STARTING COMMAND FOR TURNING” with
the following tabs is displayed.
<START> : Fixed form sentence menu used for the top of
part program or each machining process.
<BLANK> : Blank form menu, which is necessary for
animation.
2.5.2.1 Entering blank form data
By selecting a tab <BLANK> by cursor key, blank form menu is

displayed.
(INSERT STARTING COMMAND FOR TURNING)
<BLANK>
↓
<<2.CYLINDER BLANK FIGURE>>
[SELECT]
Enter blank form data as a round bar.

(CYLINDER BLANK)
100 INPUT (DIAMETER)
80 INPUT (LENGTH)
0 INPUT (WORK ORIGIN)
[INSERT]
- 627 -
2.5.3 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for

Turning Machining
2.5.3.1 Entering in ISO-code form directly
It is difficult to define the action of tool changing, spindle rotation,

approaching and releasing generally because there are many
difference depending on machine configuration. So, using ISO-code
form program can realize more flexible and safety part program.
G28 U0 W0 ; INSERT (Reference point return)

T0101 ; INSERT (Tool change)
G99 G96 S150 ; INSERT (Surface speed constant control, mm/rev mode)
M03 ; INSERT (Spindle rotation)
G00 X120. Z20. ; INSERT (Approaching)
2.5.3.2 Entering by fixed form sentence menu
ISO-code form part program can be entered from the fixed form
sentence menu. But, in such a case, proper fixed form sentence must
be prepared in advance.
(Soft-key group for Turning cycle menu)
[START]
<START>
↓
<<1.START PROCEDURE>>
[INSERT]
NOTE
There may be a case that undefined value is
entered by “?” in the fixed form sentence menu, so
in this case, you need to replace the “?” by proper
value can be used in actual machining.
Place the cursor to the address with “?”, enter
numeric data, then push “ALTER”.
After altering the data, return the cursor to the EOB
at the end of the program.
- 628 -
2.5.4 Entering Outer Roughing Process
2.5.4.1 Entering outer roughing cycle block
Enter the 1st process : outer roughing by a general purpose roughing

tool (T0101).
Enter machining type, cutting condition and so on.
[CYCLE]
→
<TURNING>
↓
<<1.TURNING(OUTER ROUGH)>>
[SELECT]
(TURNING(OUTER ROUGH) - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
[-Z] (CUTTING DIRECTION)
2 INPUT (CUT DEPTH)
INPUT (RATE OF CUT DEPTH %)
.5 INPUT (X-AXIS FINISH AMT.)
.5 INPUT (Z-AXIS FINISH AMT.)
.3 INPUT (CUT DIRC. FEEDRATE)
.5 INPUT (CUT DEPTH FEEDRATE)
.5 INPUT (CUT RISE FEEDRATE)
[INSERT]
- 629 -
NOTE
1 In the cycle machining data menu window, all data
excepting cutting condition data are set
automatically. However, the data entered at
previously entered cycle of same kind are copied,
so you must enter the data if you have not entered
the same kind of cycle.
2 In the cycle machining data menu window, 2 tabs,
<CUT COND.> and <DETAIL>, are displayed.
In the <CUT COND.>, all data must be set. In the
<DETAIL>, all data are automatically set, so check
those data and modify them if necessary only
- 630 -
2.5.4.2 Entering figure for outer roughing
By inserting the outer roughing cycle machining block, the window of

free form entering is displayed, so enter the final figure of machining.
(ZX PLANE TURNING FIGURE - INSERT)
(START POINT - INSERT)
31 INPUT (START POINT DX)
0 INPUT (START POINT Z)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[L-UP] (LINE DIRECTION)
35 INPUT (END POINT DX)
INPUT (END POINT Z)
45 INPUT (ANGLE)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[LEFT] (LINE DIRECTION)
[OK]
[CR]
(CORNER R - INSERT)
3 INPUT (CORNER RADIUS)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
-30 INPUT (END POINT Z)
60 INPUT (ANGLE)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[OK]
[CR]
(CORNER R - INSERT)
3 INPUT (CORNER RADIUS)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
-50 INPUT (END POINT Z)
80 INPUT (ANGLE)
[OK]
After entering all the part figures for machining target, enter blank
figure. When you use a preformed workpiece such like an cast iron,
the most suitable cutting path can be made by entering the blank
figure of the preformed workpiece.
- 631 -
In this programming example, round bar workpiece is used. So, enter

the blank figure as follows.
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[RIGHT] (LINE DIRECTION)
0 INPUT (END POINT Z)
→
<ATTRIBUTE>
[BLANK] (ELEMENT TYPE)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[DOWN] (LINE DIRECTION)
[OK]
Part figures are displayed in blue line, blank figures are displayed in
green line, and the currently selected figure is displayed in yellow
line.
Check the entered part figures and blank figures are correct by
comparing with the blue print, then register them as figure blocks into
CNC memory finally.
- 632 -
Figure blocks can be registered into the current part program directly,
and also can be registered as another sub program.
Registered figure blocks can be used also for finishing, so in this
example, register them as a sub program.
[CREATE]
(METHOD OF FREE FIGURE CREATION)
↓
<CREATE AS SUB PROGRAM>
8100 INPUT (SUBPRO NO.)
OUTER TURNING (FIGURE NAME)
[OK]
NOTE
Registered sub program can be displayed in a figure
menu tab, “SUBPROGRAM”.
In this case, set the parameters No14720 to 14723 in
advance.
For this example, set those parameters as follow.
No.14720=8000 (Minimum program number of sub
programs displayed in the turning
machining sub program menu)
No.14721=8499 (Maximum program number of sub
programs displayed in the turning
programs displayed in the milling
- 633 -
2.5.5 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotation Blocks for

Outer Finishing in ISO-code Form
Before starting the 2nd process of outer finishing, change tool to the
finishing tool (T0202), spindle rotation, and other necessary blocks in
ISO-code form with G-code and so on.

G99 G96 S300 ; INSERT (Surface speed constant control, mm/rev mode)
M03 ; INSERT (Spindle rotation)
Otherwise, you can enter them from the fixed form sentence menu.
[START]
<START>
↓
<<1.START PROCEDURE>>
[INSERT]
NOTE
- 634 -
2.5.6 Entering Outer Finishing Cycle Machining Process
Enter the 2nd process : outer finishing by a general purpose finishing

tool (T0202).
[CYCLE]
→
<TURNING>
↓
↓
<<7.TURNING(OUTER FINISH)>>
[SELECT]
(TURNING(OUTER FINISH) - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
[-Z] (CUTTING DIRECTION)
.1 INPUT (FEEDRATE)
[INSERT]
NOTE
2 When you select the cycle machining type form
cycle machining menu, instead of selecting by the
cursor, you can use direct inputting of item number
and INPUT. (In this case, enter 7 INPUT)
- 635 -
2.5.6.1 Entering figure for outer finishing
By inserting the outer finishing cycle machining block, the window

for free form entering is displayed, so enter the final figure of
machining. But, the former registered figure blocks for roughing can
be used, so push [CANCEL] and go back to the turning figure menu
window, then select from the sub program menu.
[CANCEL]
(INSERT TURNING FIGURE)
→
<SUBPROGRAM>
↓
<<08100: OUTER TURNING>>
[SELECT]
2.5.6.2 Entering releasing motion blocks in ISO-code form
After outer finishing, return the tool to safety area before the next C-
axis drilling process.
Enter these motion blocks in form of ISO-code with such as G-code.
G00 X200. ; INSERT (Releasing motion)

M05 ; INSERT (Spindle stop)
- 636 -
2.5.7 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for C-

axis Drilling
Enter blocks of tool changing, C-axis mode changing spindle rotation

approaching and releasing for C-axis drilling. You can enter these
blocks using ISO-code form.
M21. ; INSERT (Change to C-axis mode)

G98 G97 ; INSERT (mm/min mode)
M03 S800 ; INSERT (Spindle rotation)
(Soft-key group for Milling cycle menu)
[START]
<START>
↓
<<2.C-AXIS MILLING START>>
[INSERT]
NOTE
- 637 -
2.5.8 Entering C-axis Drilling Process
2.5.8.1 Entering C-axis drilling cycle block
Enter the 3rd process : C-axis end face drilling by the drilling tool
(T0303).
[CYCLE]
<HOLE MACH.>
↓
<<2.DRILLING>>
[SELECT]
(DRILLING - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
5 INPUT (PECKING CUT DEPTH)
INPUT (REF.PT.MODE)
10 INPUT (I POINT)
-20 INPUT (CUT DEPTH)
2 INPUT (GO PAST AMOUNT)
2 INPUT (CLEARANCE)
100 INPUT (FEEDRATE)
.5 INPUT (DWELL TIME)
[INSERT]
NOTE
In the cycle machining data menu window, all data
- 638 -
2.5.8.2 Entering hole position block
By inserting the drilling cycle block, the window of hole position

menu is displayed, so select the “Arc point” item.
(INSERT MILLING FIGURE)
<HOLE POSI.>
↓
↓
<<17.C-AXIS HOLE ON FACE (ARC POINTS)>>
[SELECT]
(XC-C AXIS HOLE (ARC POINTS) - INSERT)
<POS./SIZE>
0 INPUT (BASE POSITION)
11 INPUT (X AXIS POS.(RAD.))
0 INPUT (START ANGLE)
→
<REPEAT>
90 INPUT (PITCH ANGLE)
4 INPUT (NUMBER OF HOLE)
[INSERT]
- 639 -
2.5.9 Operations in the “END” Menu
All necessary machining program have been entered, so enter end

procedure.
Enter blocks for spindle stop, releasing and end M-code in ISO-code
form with G-code and son on.
M05. ; INSERT (Spindle stop)

G00 X200. ; INSERT (Releasing motion)
M02 ; INSERT (End M-code)
[END]
<END>
↓
<<1.PROGRAM END>>
[INSERT]
NOTE
- 640 -
2.6 CHECKING OF THE PART PROGRAM
You can check the entered part program by animation.
2.6.1 Checking by Animation
Select MEM mode by using a mode-selecting switch on a machine-operating panel

[SIMLAT]
(SIMULATE - ANIMATE)
[REWIND]
[START]
NOTE
After checking by animation, in order to do other
operation, you must close the animation window by
pushing [GRPOFF] always.
- 641 -
3.MACHINING CENTER EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING TURNOPEEZG44
3 MACHINING CENTER
Example) Outer wall contouring, Pocketing, Drilling
Workpiece : 90x130x30
1st Process : Outer wall contouring by Flat endmill
(T01)
2nd Process : Pocket roughing by Flat endmill (T01)
3rd Process : Pocket finishing by Flat endmill (T02)
4th Process : Drilling by Drill tool (T03)
φ4
R30
R15
70 80
15
30
35
55
110
120
10
20
- 642 -
TURNOPEEZG44 EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING 3.MACHINING CENTER
3.1 SETTING OF TOOL LENGTH OFFSET DATA
WARNING
1 Operation of tool offset setting varies from one
machine model to another. So operations
described in this section may differ from those ion
actual machine.
As to the actual operation of tool offset setting on
the actual machine, refer to the applicable manual
supplied by the respective machine tool builders for
details.
injuries.
2 As to the operations on a machine described in this
chapter, refer to the applicable manual supplied by
the respective machine tool builders for details.
If the operation does not match the characteristic of
injuries.
Assume that the Z=0 position of the work coordinate is the surface of
the workpiece, while the Z=0 position of the machine coordinate is
the machine origin.
By setting the distance between these 2 points to the tool length offset
data, work coordinate of Z-axis can be defined.
Tool length is different between each tool for the actual machining, so
set the offset data respectively.
The tool length offset value is the relative coordinate value of Z-axis
at the point where the tool tip is touched to the surface of the
workpiece.
(1) Select the tool used for actual machining by switch on the
machine operator’s panel.
(2) Execute the machine reference point return of Z-axis.
(3) Press [ACTPOS] and make the relative coordinate data display.
(4) Press [PRESET], then push [ALL 0], and press [ALTER], then
the relative coordinate value of all axes are reset to 0. But, the Z-
axis coordinate only is used for measuring.
(5) Press [T-OFS] and make the tool offset widow open.
- 643 -
(6) Make the tool tip touch at the surface of the workpiece by JOG or
Manual handwheel. Then, the distance from the machine origin is
displayed as the Z-axis relative coordinate value.
(7) Select the tool length compensation column of the tool used for
measuring by moving the cursor by cursor key.
(8) Pressing [INP.C.] displays the window of INPUT RELATIVE
COORD. window, then move the cursor to the Z-axis.
(9) Pressing [INPUT] makes the Z-axis relative coordinate value

enter as the tool offset length data.
Z=0 (Machine coordinate)
The tool used

for actual
machining This distance is set as the tool
length offset value
Z=0 (Work coordinate)
Workpiece
- 644 -
NOTE
There is a case such as using a sensor called base
master instead of touching the tool to the workpiece
surface, so into details and actual operations, refer
to the manual made by machine tool builder.
- 645 -
3.2 SETTING OF WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM DATA
After setting the geometry offset data for necessary tools, set the work
zero point on the actual workpiece used for machining.
In order to carry out the actual machining by using the part program
made on the work coordinate, set the distance between machine
coordinate and work coordinate to the work coordinate system as the
workpiece origin value.
In this section, operations, of which setting the center of the
workpiece (90x130) as the work origin of X/Y/Z-axis by using
standard too with the radius 5mm, are described.
And, G54 is used as the work coordinate system.
(1) Select the standard tool by using the switch on the machine
operator’s panel. There is a case of using special tool such as the
centering lever as the standard tool for easy operations and high
precision accuracy, so refer to the manual made by machine tool
builder for actual operations.
(2) After then, for safety, take measure to keep fully safety such as
closing the machine door.
(3) Select the manual handwheel mode on the machine operator’s
panel, and make the standard tool touch to the right side of the
workpiece (A-position in the drawing) by referencing the
following drawing. At this time, make a spindle rotate by fully
safety speed if necessary, then you can avoid over-cutting by
stopping the tool moving at the position the tool begins cutting.
As to actual operations, refer to the manual made by the machine
tool builder.
Y Standard tool
45 65
5 A
Y-axis
direction
B 5 X-axis direction 90mm
130mm
(4) Pressing [WK SET] displays the window of the work coordinate
system.
(5) Select the G54 X-axis data by moving the cursor. When other tab
is displayed in the window, the cursor motion type might be the
tab transition type, so press [CHCURS] for changing to item
transition type of cursor.
- 646 -
(6) Pressing [MEASUR] displays the window of offset calculating.
(7) When the tool touches to the right side of the workpiece, the X-
axis position should be X=70.0mm, 65mm of the right side
position + 5mm of the tool radius, so enter 70.0 to the target work
coordinate value. Then, the calculation result value is displayed at
the RESULT column, so confirm the result is correct.
(8) Pressing [INPUT] sets the above calculated value to the
workpiece origin offset data.
(9) Release the tool from the workpiece once, and set the Y-axis
workpiece origin offset data by similar operations of (3) to (8). In
this case, touch the point B in the drawing and the entering target
value is Y=50.0mm.
- 647 -
3.3 PREPARING OF THE FIXED FORM SENTENCE MENU
As to the fixed form sentence, machine tool builder usually sets the
suitable menu for specified respective machine. But, you can enter his
own menu on the Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i screen by yourself.
3.3.1 Entering the Fixed Form Sentence for Milling
key [FIXFRM] in the soft-key group for milling.
Enter programs for START and END.
[SETTING]
(SETTING)
<BASIC>
↓
<<1. REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING>>
[SELECT]
(REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING)
<FORM 1>
[NEW]
(CRATE NEW FIXED FORM SENTENCE)
<REGISTERED NAME : >
MILLING START INPUT
G28 G91 Z0. ; G28 X0. Y0. ; T? M06 ; D? ; M03 S? ; G00 G90 G54 X0. Y0.; G43
X100. H? ;
[ADD]
→
<FORM5>
[NEW]
<REGISTERED NAME : >
PROGRAM END INPUT
M05. ; G00 G90 Z100. ; G28 G91 Z0, ; M06 T0 ;M30 ;
[ADD]
[TO MNU]
- 648 -
3.4 SETTING OF THE TOOL DATA
Set the necessary tool data. These tool data are used for displaying
tool form of animation and calculation of cutting angle in the cycle
machining.
The tool length offset data were already set in section 3.1.
T01 : Flat endmill for roughing
T02 : Flat endmill for finishing
T03 : Drill
Display “TOOL OFFSET” window by [T-OFS]
TOOL OFFSET
NO. TOOL LENGTH. COMP. CUTTER COMPENSATOIN
GEOMETRY WEAR GEOMETRY WEAR
001 measured value 0.000 4.000 0.000
002 measured value 0.000 3.000 0.000
003 measured value 0.000 2.000 0.000
NOTE
1 The above offset data are just an example, and they
cannot be used for actual machining.
2 The above offset number 003 is used for drilling tool,
and if you use it for animation, you must set the
radius amount of the drill to radius offset data.
3 There is a case that the above offset screen might
not be displayed depending on the attached optional
function. Into details, refer to the manual made by
Display “TOOL DATA” tab by cursor key →

TOOL DATA
NO. TOOL SET
001 F END 1
002 F END 1
003 DRILL 1 140.0
- 649 -
- 650 -
3.5 CREATING OF PART PROGRAM
In the Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i , background editing can be used, but in

this section, part program creating operations are described by using
foreground editing.
3.5.1 Creating New Part Program
Create a new part program of O1234.

1. In case of creating a new part program directly
[NEWPRG]
2. In case of creating a new part program on the program list window

[O-LIST]
(OPEN PROGRAM)
[NEW]
Select the newly entered program by ↓
[OPEN]
- 651 -
3.5.2 Operations of “START” Menu
By pushing [START] in the soft-key menu for milling, the window

“INSERT STARTING COMMAND FOR MILLING” with the
following tabs is displayed.
<START> : Fixed form sentence menu used for the top
of part program or each machining process.
<COORD CONV> : Coordinate conversion menu, which is
necessary for the machine on the inclined
surface, this is not used in this section.
<BLANK> : Blank form menu, which is necessary for
animation.
3.5.2.1 Entering blank form data
By selecting a tab <BLANK> by cursor key, blank form menu is

displayed.
(INSERT STARTING COMMAND FOR MILLING)
<BLANK>
↓
<<1. RECTANGULAR BLANK FIGURE>>
[SELECT]
Enter blank form data as a round bar.

(RECTANGULAR BLANK FIGURE - INSERT)
130 INPUT (WIDTH)
90 INPUT (LENGTH)
30 INPUT (HEIGHT)
65 INPUT (WORK ORIGIN X)
45 INPUT (WORK ORIGIN Y)
0 INPUT (WORK PROGIN Z)
[INSERT]
- 652 -
3.5.3 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating blocks for

Roughing Flat Endmill
It is difficult to define the action of tool changing, spindle rotation,

approaching and releasing generally because there are many
difference depending on machine configuration. So, using ISO-code
form program can realize more flexible and safety part program.
G28 G91 Z0. ; INSERT (Z-axis reference point return)

G28 G91 X0. Y0. ; INSERT (X/Y-axis reference point return)
T01 M06 ; INSERT (Tool change)
D1 ; INSERT (Selecting tool data)
G00 G90 G54 X0. Y0. ; INSERT (X/Y-axis approaching)
G43 X100. H1 ; INSERT (Z-axis approaching)
(Soft-key group for milling cycle menu)
[START]
<START>
↓
<<3.MILLING START>>
[INSERT]
NOTE
- 653 -
3.5.4 Entering Outer Wall Contouring Process
3.5.4.1 Entering outer wall contouring (rough) cycle block
Enter the 1st process : outer wall contouring process by the roughing
flat endmill (T01).
(Soft-key menu for milling cycle menu)
[CYCLE]
(INSERT MILLING CYCLE)
→
<CONTOURING>
↓
<<1.OUTER WALL CONTOURING(ROUGH)>>
[SELECT]
(OUTER WALL CONTOURING(ROUGH) - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
20 INPUT (BOTTOM THICKNESS)
5 INPUT (SIDE THICKNESS)
3 INPUT (CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS)
10 INPUT (CUT DEPTH OF AXIS)
0 INPUT (SIDE FINISH AMOUNT)
0 INPUT (BOTTOM FINISH AMOUNT)
500 INPUT (FEED RATE - SING.CUT)
300 INPUT (FEED RATE - BOTH CUT)
200 INPUT (FEED RATE - AXIS)
[INSERT]
- 654 -
NOTE
previously entered cycle of same kind are copied, so
you must enter the data if you have not entered the
same kind of cycle.
3.5.4.2 Entering figure for outer wall contouring (rough)
By inserting the cycle machining block, the window of contouring

figure menu is displayed, so select the XY-SQUARE CONVEX
<CONT. FIG.>
<<1.XY-SQUARE CONVEX>>
[SELECT]
(XY-SQUARE - INSERT)
<POS./SIZE>
[CONVEX] (FIGURE TYPE)
-20 INPUT (HEIGHT/DEPTH)
0 INPUT (CENTER POINT (X))
0 INPUT (CENTER POINT (Y))
120 INPUT (LENGTH FOR X AXIS)
80 INPUT (LENGTH FOR Y AXIS)
[INSERT]
- 655 -
3.5.5 Entering Pocket Roughing Process
3.5.5.1 Entering pocket roughing cycle block
Enter the 2nd process : pocket roughing by a roughing flat endmill

(T01).
Since same tool with the 1st process is used, tool changing blocks are
not necessary.
[CYCLE]
→
<POCKETING>
↓
<<1.POCKETING(ROUGH)>>
[SELECT]
(POCKETING(ROUGH) - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
INPUT (BOTTOM THICKNESS)
INPUT (SIDE THICKNESS)
10 INPUT (CUT DEPTH OF AXIS)
0.5 INPUT (SIDE FINISH AMOUNT)
0.5 INPUT (BOTTOM FINISH AMOUNT)
300 INPUT (FED RATE - BOTH CUT)
[INSERT]
- 656 -
NOTE
same kind of cycle.
- 657 -
3.5.5.2 Entering figure for pocket roughing
By inserting the cycle machining block, the window of pocketing

figure menu, so select the XY-FREE CONCAVE FIGURE.
<POCKET FIG>
↓
<<4.XY-FREE CONCAVE FIGURE>>
[SELECT]
(XY PLANE FREE FIGURE - INSERT)
INPUT (FIGURE TYPE)
-50 INPUT (START POINT X)
0 INPUT (START POINT Y)
-10 INPUT (HEIGHT/DEPTH)
[OK]
[ARC ]
(ARC (CW) - INSERT)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
INPUT (RADIUS)
-35 INPUT (CENTER POINT CX)
0 INPUT (CENTER POINT CY)
INPUT (LAST CONNECTION)
[TANGNT] (NEXT CONNECTION)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[R-UP] (LINE DIRECTION)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
INPUT (ANGLE)
[OK]
[ARC ]
(ARC (CW) - INSERT)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
30 INPUT (RADIUS)
0 INPUT (CENTER POINT CX)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[R-DOWN] (KINE DIRECTION)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
INPUT (ANGLE)
[OK]
- 658 -
[ARC ]
(ARC (CW) - INSERT)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
15 INPUT (RADIUS)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[L-DOWN] (LINE DIRECTION)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
INPUT (ANGLE)
[OK]
[ARC ]
(ARC (CW) - INSERT)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
30 INPUT (RADIUS)
[OK]
[LINBE]
(LINE - INSERT)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
INPUT (ANGLE)
[OK]
[ARC ]
(ARC (CW) - INSERT)
-50 INPUT (END POINT X)
0 INPUT (END POINT Y)
15 INPUT (RADIUS)
-35 INPUT (CENTER POINT CX)
INPUT (NEXT CONNECTION)
[OK]
- 659 -
Figure blocks can be registered into the current part program directly,
and also can be registered as another sub program.
Registered figure blocks can be used also for finishing, so in this
example, register them as a sub program.

[CREATE]
↓
<CREATE AS SUB PROGRAM>
8200 INPUT (SUBPRO NO.)
POCKET FIGURE (FIGURE NAME)
[ISLAND]
- 660 -
There is an island in a pocket, so enter island figure continuously.

INPUT (FIGURE TYPE)
-15 INPUT (START POINT X)
-7.5 INPUT (START POINT Y)
-10 INPUT (HEIGHT / DEPTH)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[UP] (LINE DIRETION)
7.5 INPUT (END POINT Y)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[RIGHT] (LINE DIRECTION)
15 INPUT (END POINT X)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[DOWN] (LINE DIRECTION)
-7.5 INPUT (END POINT Y)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
-15 INPUT (END POINT X)
[OK]
- 661 -
Entered figure blocks were already defined to make as a subprogram,

so check the contents of them and create it as a subprogram by
pressing [OK]

[CREATE]
[OK]
NOTE
Registered sub program can be displayed in a figure
menu tab, “SUBPROGRAM”.
In this case, set the parameters No14720 to 14723 in
advance.
For this example, set those parameters as follow.
- 662 -
3.5.6 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for

Finishing Flat Endmill
Before starting the 3rd process of pocket finishing, change tool to the
finishing tool (T02), spindle rotation, and other necessary blocks in
ISO-code form with G-code and so on.

sentence menu. The already prepared fixed form sentence as
3.MILLING START was made with entering undefined data as “?”,
so it can be used also for finishing.

[START]
<START>
↓
<<3.MILLING START>>
[INSERT]
NOTE
- 663 -
3.5.7 Entering Pocket Bottom and Side Finishing Process
3.5.7.1 Entering pocket bottom finishing cycle block
Enter 3rd process : pocket bottom finishing process by the finishing

flat endmill (T02).
[CYCLE]
→
<POCKETING>
↓
<<2.POCKETING (BOTTOM FINISH)>>
[SELECT]
(POCKETING (BOTTOM FINISH) - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
INPUT (BOTTOM THICKNESS)
0.5 INPUT (SIDE FINISH AMOUNT)
INPUT (BOTTOM FINISH AMT.)
200 INPUT (FEED RATE - BOTH.CUT)
[INSERT]
- 664 -
NOTE
same kind of cycle.
3.5.7.2 Entering figure for pocket bottom finishing
By inserting the cycle block, the window of pocketing figure is

displayed, so enter the figure for finishing. But, the former registered
figure blocks for roughing can be used, so select from the subprogram
menu.
→
<SUBPROGRAM>
↓
<<08200: POCKET FIGURE>>
[SELECT]
- 665 -
3.5.7.3 Entering figure for pocket side finishing
Enter 3rd process : pocket side finishing process by the finishing flat
endmill (T03).
[CYCLE]
→
<POCKETING>
↓
<<3.POCKETING (SIDE FINISH)>>
[SELECT]
(POCKETING (SIDE FINISH) - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
INPUT (SIDE FINISH AMOUNT)
INPUT (BOTTOM FINISH AMT.)
200 INPUT (FEED RATE - BOTH.CUT)
[INSERT]
NOTE
same kind of cycle.
- 666 -
3.5.7.4 Entering figure for pocket side finishing
By inserting the cycle block, the window of pocketing figure is

displayed, so enter the figure for finishing. But, the former registered
figure blocks for roughing can be used, so select from the subprogram
menu.
→
<SUBPROGRAM>
↓
<<08200: POCKET FIGURE>>
[SELECT]
3.5.8 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for Drill
Enter blocks for tool changing, spindle rotation and others for drilling.

- 667 -
sentence menu. The already prepared fixed form sentence as
3.MILLING START was made with entering undefined data as “?”,
so it can be used also for finishing.

[START]
<START>
↓
<<3.MILLING START>>
[INSERT]
NOTE
3.5.9 Entering Drilling Process
3.5.9.1 Entering drilling cycle block
Enter 4th process : Drilling by drill (T03).

[CYCLE]
<HOLE MACH.>
↓
<<2.DRILLING>>
[SELECT]
(DRILLING - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
INPUT (MACHINING TYPE)
INPUT (REF.PT.MODE)
100 INPUT (I POINT)
-20 INPUT (CUT DEPTH)
2 INPUT (GO PAST AMOUNT)
5 INPUT (CLEARANCE)
100 INPUT (FEED RATE)
[INSERT]
- 668 -
NOTE
same kind of cycle.
2 When you select the cycle machining type form
cycle machining menu, instead of selecting by the
cursor, you can use direct inputting of item number
and INPUT. (In this case, enter 2 INPUT)
3.5.9.2 Entering hole position block
By inserting the drilling cycle block, the window of hole position

menu is displayed, so select the “YY-RECTANGLE POINTS” item.
<HOLE POSI.>
↓
↓
<<5.XY-RECTANGLE POINTS>>
[SELECT]
(XY-RECTANGLE POINTS - INSERT)
<HOLE POSIT>
-55 INPUT (START POINT (X))
-35 INPUT (START POINT (Y))
110 INPUT (LENGTH FOR X AXIS)
70 INPUT (LENGTH FOR Y AXIS)
3 INPUT (NUMBER FOR X AXIS)
3 INPUT (NUMBER FOR Y AXIS)
0 INPUT (ANGLE FOR A AXIS)
90 INPUT (ANGLE FOR Y AXIS)
[INSERT]
- 669 -
3.5.10 Operations in the “END” Menu
All necessary machining program have been entered, so enter end

procedure.
Enter blocks for spindle stop, releasing and end M-code in ISO-code
form with G-code and son on.
M05. ; INSERT (Spindle stop)

G00 G90 Z100.. ; INSERT (Releasing motion)
G28 G91 Z0. ; INSERT (Reference point return)
M06 T0 ; INSERT (Tool changing)
M30 ; INSERT (End M-code)
[END]
<END>
↓
<<1.END OF PROGRAM>>
[INSERT]
- 670 -
NOTE
- 671 -
3.6 CHECKING OF THE PART PROGRAM
You can check the entered part program by animation.
3.6.1 Checking by Animation
Select MEM mode by using a mode-selecting switch on a machine-operating panel

[SIMLAT]
(SIMULATE - ANIMATE)
[REWIND]
[START]
NOTE
After checking by animation, in order to do other
operation, you must close the animation window by
pushing [GRPOFF] always.
- 672 -
APPENDIX
TURNOPEEZG44 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS
A PARAMETERS
WARNING
Be sure to use the parameters set by the machine
tool builder.
If you change the setting of a parameter, the
machining program may not work correctly.
If the machining program does not work correctly,
the tool may bump against the workpiece, and the
machine may be forced to perform unnatural
machining, possibly causing damage to the tool
and/or machine, and even injuries.
- 675 -
A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX TURNOPEEZG44
A.1 REQUIRED PARAMETERS
A.1.1 Parameters Required for Basic Options
To use Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, be sure to set the following parameters:
(1) No.8701#4 = 1
Read of “vacant” P code macro variables is enabled.
(2) No.3201#6 = 1
Program registration does not end with M end codes (M02, M30,
and M99).
(3) No.8650#0 = 1
When the reset key is pressed, C-EXE passes a key code to an
application program.
(4) No.8701#6 = 1
When the TV check is set to ON, edit operations are not
regarded as errors.
(5) No.3112#0 (SGD) = 0
This parameter enables or disables servo waveform display.
When this parameter is set to 1, other graphic functions become
unavailable.
(6) No.3103#3 = 1
In the FS160i and NC systems connected to a personal computer
(with an Ethernet board or HSSB board), NC software reads the
[HELP] key and changes screens even when a C-EXE screen is
being displayed.
To suppress this, set bit 3 of parameter No. 3103 to 1. The NC
software will then ignore any press of the [HELP] key while a C-
EXE screen is being displayed.
(7) No.9000#0 = 0
This parameter is for debugging machining macro program.
And if this parameter is set to 1, Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i does not work
correctly.
(8) No.3106#6 = 1
The function of C language executor refers to this parameter. If
this parameter is set to 1, Slant face machining does not work
correctly.
(The system checks this parameter in the case that three-
dimensional coordinate conversion is available.)
(9) No.8650#1 = 1
During display of the screen of C language executor, Alarm
screen is not changed when the alarm occurs.
- 676 -
A.1.2 Parameters Required for Machining Simulation
To perform machining simulation, be sure to set the following

parameters:
(1) No.14706≠0
Directions of the three basic axes of spindle 1
Conditions)
- One-path T series, M series, and CNCs for complex
machining
- Two-path T series
1) For path 1, always set this parameter.
2) For path 2
When bit 0 (SME) of parameter No. 27401 is set to 1
- Three-path T series
1) For path 1, always set this parameter.
2) For path 2
When bit 0 (SME) of parameter No. 27401 is set to 1
3) For path 3
When bit 0 (TME) of parameter No. 27402 is set to 1
(2) No.14707≠0
Directions of the three basic axes of spindle 2
Conditions)
When bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No. 14702 is set to 1 (A sub-
spindle is provided.) :
- For the one-path T series, always set this parameter.
- For the two-path T series:
1) For path 1
When bit 1 (FSE) of parameter No. 14701 is set to 1
2) For path 2
When bit 1 (SSE) of parameter No. 27401 is set to 1
- For the three-path T series:
1) For path 1
When bit 1 (FSE) of parameter No. 14701 is set to 1
2) For path 2
When bit 1 (SSE) of parameter No. 27401 is set to 1
3) For path 3
When bit 1 (TSE) of parameter No. 27402 is set to 1
- 677 -
A.2 BASIC PARAMETERS
A.2.1 Settings for the Color Palette for Screen Display (No.2)
These parameters set the colors used to display screen components.

Color setting data for a screen display color number* (1 to 16)
- Specify color setting data with a 6-digit number in the format of
“xxyyzz”.
(xx:Value for red, yy:Value for green, zz:Value for blue)
- The valid data range of each color value is 0 to 63. A value
greater than 63 is interpreted as 63.
- For a number with less than six digits, all the unspecified digits
are interpreted as high-order ones and are all assumed 0.
14480 DSPCOL17
DSPCOL17 : Color of the special character for search function in the program
display window on the base screen.
If the value is 0, the color of the special character is red (630000).
- 678 -
A.2.2 Parameters for Operations in General
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14700 MGI CS2 CS1 PW D
PWD 0: When the power is turned on, the system is not switched to the
manual guide screen.
1: When the power is turned on, the system is switched to the manual
guide screen.
CS1= 0, CS2 = 0 : When the power is turned on, the custom screen is not displayed.
CS1= 1, CS2 = 0 : When the power is turned on, Custom Screen 1 (AUX) is displayed.
CS1= 0, CS2 = 1 : When the power is turned on, Custom Screen 3 (MCR) is displayed.
CS1= 1, CS2 = 1 : When the power is turned on, Custom Screen 2 (MENU) is displayed.
MGI 0: Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i is enabled.
1: Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i is disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14701 PCK CLP2 CLP1 FSP FMP FSE
FSE 0 : Tool post 1 cannot be used with spindle 2.

1: Tool post 1 can be used with spindle 2.
NOTE
FSE is available in the case of No.14702 SUB(#1)
= 1 only.
FMP=0, FSP=0
FMP 0 : Tool post 1 is placed above spindle 1.

1: Tool post 1 is placed under spindle 1.
1 2
FSP 0 : Tool post 1 is placed above spindle 2.

1: Tool post 1 is placed under spindle 2.
FMP=1, FSP=1
NOTE
FSP is available in the case of No.14702 SUB(#1)
= 1 and No.14701 FSE(#1) = 1 only.
CLP1= 0, CLP2 = 0 : The size of the clipboard is set to 1024 bytes.

CLP1= 1, CLP 2 = 1 : The size of the clipboard is set to 8192 bytes.
PCK 0 : The soft-key [ADD /] and [DEL /] are not displayed.
1: The soft-key [ADD /] and [DEL /] are displayed.
- 679 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14702 SFA SFB SFC SFD SR1 SP1 SUB M T1
MT1 0: Vertical.
1: Horizontal (chuck located on the left side).
SUB 0 : No sub-spindle is provided.
1: A sub-spindle is provided.
SP1 0 : The position of the sub-spindle on tool post 1 when C = 0 is the same
as that of the main spindle on tool post 1.
1: The position of the sub-spindle on tool post 1 when C = 0 is 180°
different from the position of the main spindle on tool post 1.
SR1 0: The positive direction of the C-axis of the sub-spindle on tool post 1
is the same as that of the main spindle on tool post 1.
1: The positive direction of the C-axis of the sub-spindle on tool post 1
is the reverse of that of the main spindle on tool post 1.
SFD 0: Normal rotation is assumed if G266#5 (SFRD)=0 and G266#4
(SRVD)=1
Reverse rotation is assumed if G266#5 (SFRD)=1 and G266#4
(SRVD)=0
1: Normal rotation is assumed if G266#5 (SFRD)=1 and G266#4
(SRVD)=0
Reverse rotation is assumed if G266#5 (SFRD)=0 and G266#4
(SRVD)=1
SFC 0: Normal rotation is assumed if G204#5 (SFRC)=0 and G204#4
(SRVC)=1
Reverse rotation is assumed if G204#5 (SFRC)=1 and G204#4
(SRVC)=0
1: Normal rotation is assumed if G204#5 (SFRC)=1 and G204#4
(SRVC)=0
Reverse rotation is assumed if G204#5 (SFRC)=0 and G204#4
(SRVC)=1
SFB 0: Normal rotation is assumed if G074#5 (SFRB)=0 and G074#4
(SRVB)=1
Reverse rotation is assumed if G074#5 (SFRB)=1 and G074#4
(SRVB)=0
1: Normal rotation is assumed if G074#5 (SFRB)=1 and G074#4
(SRVB)=0
Reverse rotation is assumed if G074#5 (SFRB)=0 and G074#4
(SRVB)=1
SFA 0: Normal rotation is assumed if G070#5 (SFRA)=0 and G070#4
(SRVA)=1
Reverse rotation is assumed if G070#5 (SFRA)=1 and G070#4
(SRVA)=0
1: Normal rotation is assumed if G070#5 (SFRA)=1 and G070#4
(SRVA)=0
Reverse rotation is assumed if G070#5 (SFRA)=0 and G070#4
(SRVA)=1
- 680 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14703 G62 NCC TAB LST GDM SFN FDS
FDS 0: During feed per revolution, actual feedrate is displayed as that of feed
per minute on the base screen.
1: During feed per revolution, actual feedrate is displayed as that of feed
per revolution on the base screen. (Refer to “3. All in one screen”.)
SFN 0: In lower part of the soft keys, shortcut numbers are not displayed.
1: In lower part of the soft keys, shortcut numbers are displayed.
GDM 0: When the CNC is a CNC for complex machining, just one guidance
message is displayed according to the T or M mode.
1: When the CNC is a CNC for complex machining, guidance messages
for the T and M modes are both displayed regardless of the mode set.
(Refer to “3. All in one screen”.)
LST 0: The soft-key [EDTCEL] is not displayed in Multi-path lathe function.
1: The soft-key [EDTCEL] is displayed in Multi-path lathe function.
TAB 0 : On the multiple-tab screen, the cursor does not automatically move to
the next tab when [INPUT] is pressed in the lowermost edit box.
1: On the multiple-tab screen, the cursor automatically moves to the next
tab when [INPUT] is pressed in the lowermost edit box.
NCC 0: In NC statement conversion, 4-digit G code cycle machining
commands before expansion are output as comments.
1: In NC statement conversion, 4-digit G code cycle machining
commands before expansion are not output as comments.
G62 0: The capability of allowing the G62.4 signal to make the screen
display visible or invisible is disabled.
1: The capability of allowing the G62.4 signal to make the screen
display visible or invisible is enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14704 DXC DZX DXY IJK LDM SLM PW O PTO
PTO 0 : During operation, data entry is prohibited on the tool offset setting
screen.
1: During operation, data entry is not prohibited on the tool offset setting
screen.
PWO 0 : During operation, data entry is prohibited on the workpiece origin
offset setting screen.
1: During operation, data entry is not prohibited on the workpiece origin
offset setting screen.
SLM 0: The spindle load meter is displayed.
1: The spindle load meter is not displayed.
LDM 0 : The servo load meter is displayed.
1: The servo load meter is not displayed.
IJK 0 : The arc command in a contour program is output in IJK format.
1: The arc command in a contour program is output in R format.
Remark) contour program : Refer to “Entering Contour Programs”.
- 681 -
DXY 0: The X coordinate in the XY plane contour program is output as a

radius value.
1: The X coordinate in the XY plane contour program is output as a
diameter value.
DZX 0: The X coordinate in the ZX plane contour program is output as a
radius value.
1: The X coordinate in the ZX plane contour program is output as a
diameter value.
DXC 0: The X coordinate in the XC plane contour program is output as a
radius value.
1: The X coordinate in the XC plane contour program is output as a
diameter value.
NOTE
When Diameter programming is used in the lathe,
please be sure to set DXY, DZX and DXC to 1.
(The above case is the parameter No.1006 #3(DIA)
= 1.)
- 682 -
A.2.3 Parameters for the Axial Configuration of the Machine
These parameters set the axial configuration of the machine. (Used

in machining simulation.)
14706 DRCTS1
(FANUC standard settings = 20 or 16)
DRCTS 1 : Number of Work coordinate for main spindle
16 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +Z, up = +X

17 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -Z, up = +X
18 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -Z, up = -X
19 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +Z, up = -X
20 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +X, up = +Z
X Z Z Z
X
Z Z X X X
16 17 18 19 20
FANUC standard settings = 20 :

Vertical machining center/vertical lathe
FANUC standard settings = 16 :
Horizontal machining center/horizontal lathe
14707 DRCTS2
(FANUC standard settings = 0 : Not use)
DRCTS 2 : Number of Work coordinate for sub spindle if existing
16 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +Z, up = +X

17 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -Z, up = +X
18 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -Z, up = -X
19 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +Z, up = -X
20 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +X, up = +Z
- 683 -
A.2.4 Settings for Spindle Status Display
These parameters set spindle status display on the base screen.
14710 AST
(FANUC standard settings = 0)
AST 0: When a CNC unit for complex machining is used, actual spindle
speed/spindle load ratio/spindle status display on the base screen is
not automatically switched in turning mode.
≠0 : Spindle number: When a CNC unit for complex machining is used,
actual spindle speed/spindle load ratio/spindle status display on the
base screen is automatically switched to the display for a specified
spindle number in turning mode.
14711 ASM
ASM 0: When a CNC unit for complex machining is used, actual spindle
speed/spindle load ratio/spindle status display on the base screen is
not automatically switched in milling mode.
≠0 : Spindle number: When a CNC unit for complex machining is used,
actual spindle speed/spindle load ratio/spindle status display on the
base screen is automatically switched to the display for a specified
spindle number in milling mode.
- 684 -
A.2.5 Setting for the Display Language
This parameter sets the display language on the Doosan Infracore eZ

Guide i screen.
14712 M SGLANG
MSGLANG 0: The setting of parameter No. 3102 is assumed.
1: English
2: Japanese
3: German
4: French
5: Italian
6: Spanish
- 685 -
A.2.6 Settings for Graphic Display
These parameters set graphic display.
14713 GRPSCALE
GRPSCALE : Scaling unit for graphic enlargement and reduction.
Scaling unit = 64/GRPSCALE
(Valid data range: 0 to 255. If 0 is set, 64 is assumed.)
14714 GRPMOVEH
GRPMOVEH : Graphic horizontal movement unit (dots)
(Valid data range: 0 to 255. If 0 is set, 64 dots is assumed.)
14715 GRPM OVEV

GRPMOVEV : Graphic vertical movement unit (dots)
(Valid data range: 0 to 255. If 0 is set, 35 dots is assumed.)
14716 GRPROTA
GRPROTA : Graphic rotation direction movement unit (angle)
(Valid data range: 0 to 255. If 0 is set, 10 degrees is assumed.)
- 686 -
A.2.7 Settings for Machining Simulation Axes
These parameters set machining simulation.
14717 SM LCNO
SMLCNO : Rotate (Cs) axis number
Valid data range: from 0 to the number of controlled axes
NOTE
1 In case of one Cs axis of main spindle, please be
sure to set No.14717 only. If no Cs axis or
Animation option, it is unnecessary to set.
2 In case of two Cs axis with main and sub spindle,
please be sure to set No.27301, No.27302 and
No.27312 #0. And No.14717 is used as working
number for Cs axis, as follows.
3 When 27312#0 = 1, No. 14717 is rewritten to the
value of No.27301 or No.27302 by a spindle
selection command (G1998). Therefore, in the
case of No.27312 #0=1, please be sure to specify
Spindle selection command (G1998) before Milling
cycles.
4 As to Apindle selection command (G1998), please
refer to “9.5 Setting of data for Animation”.
14718 SM LRTNO
SMLRTNO : Rotate (Cs) axis number, which tilts tool head or table
Valid data range: from 0 to the number of controlled axes
NOTE
No.14718 is used in Simulation or Turning cycles.
Therfore, if the machine has a rotate axis which tilts
tool head or table, please sure to set this
parameter.
If no such axis or animation option, it is not
necessary to set.
- 687 -
A.2.8 Settings for Subprogram Selection Screens
These parameters set the registration start/end numbers of subprogram

selection screens.
14720 TFIGSNO
TFIGSNO : Registration start number of the turning subprogram selection screen.
14721 TFIGENO
TFIGENO : Registration end number of the turning subprogram selection screen.
14722 M FIGSNO
MFIGSNO : Registration start number of the milling subprogram selection screen.
14723 M FIGENO
MFIGENO : Registration end number of the milling subprogram selection screen.
- 688 -
A.2.9 Settings for the Color Palette for Screen Display
These parameters set the colors used to display screen components.

Color setting data for a screen display color number* (1 to 16)
“xxyyzz”.
14724 DSPCOL1
DSPCOL1 : Color of the cursor in the program display section on the base screen.
14725 DSPCOL2
DSPCOL2 : Used to display alarms in the system title display section.
14726 DSPCOL3
DSPCOL3 : Used to display the mode and line number in the system title display
section.
14727 DSPCOL4
DSPCOL4 : Used to display the background of the alarm indication and the load
meter.
14728 DSPCOL5
DSPCOL5 : Used to display the background of the title in the status display
section, soft key characters, item name characters, and the scroll box
of the scroll bar.
14729 DSPCOL6
DSPCOL6 : Used to display the serial numbers of selection screens.
14730 DSPCOL7
DSPCOL7 : Used to display the background of the system title display section.
14731 DSPCOL8
DSPCOL8 : Used to display characters in the title section.
- 689 -
14732 DSPCOL9
DSPCOL9 : Used to display the mode on the base screen and the material
elements of arbitrary figures.
14733 DSPCOL10
DSPCOL10 : Used to display frames.
14734 DSPCOL11
DSPCOL11 : Used to display cells that cannot be edited by the process list edit
function.
14735 DSPCOL12
DSPCOL12 : Used to display the background of the status display section.
14736 DSPCOL13
DSPCOL13 : Used to display the bar of the load meter.
14737 DSPCOL14
DSPCOL14 : Used to display the background of the cursor mode.
14738 DSPCOL15
DSPCOL15 : Used to display window shadows.
14739 DSPCOL16
DSPCOL16 : Used to display the background of the base screen.
If these parameters are set to 0, the following values are used as their
respective initial values.
No.14724 = 636300 Yellow

No.14725 = 630000 Red
No.14726 = 003200 Green
No.14727 = 636300 Yellow
No.14728 = 000063 Blue
No.14729 = 420042 Purple (pinkish)
No.14730 = 323260 Light ultramarine
No.14731 = 636363 White
No.14732 = 163616 Bright green
No.14733 = 000000 Black
No.14734 = 121212 Very dark gray
No.14735 = 484848 Bright gray
No.14736 = 006363 Bright, light blue
- 690 -
No.14737 = 20203C Light ultramarine

No.14738 = 242424 Dark gray
No.14739 = 404040 Rather bright gray
- 691 -
A.2.10 Settings for the Color Palette for Icon Display
These parameters set the color palette colors used to display icons.
Color setting data for an ICOCOL* screen display color number* (1
to 16)
“xxyyzz”.
14740 ICOCOL1
14741 ICOCOL2
14742 ICOCOL3
14743 ICOCOL4
14744 ICOCOL5
14745 ICOCOL6
14746 ICOCOL7
14747 ICOCOL8
14748 ICOCOL9
14749 ICOCOL10
14750 ICOCOL11
14751 ICOCOL12
14752 ICOCOL13
14753 ICOCOL14
14754 ICOCOL15
14755 ICOCOL16
- 692 -
No.14740 = 630000 Red

No.14741 = 003200 Green
No.14742 = 636300 Yellow
No.14743 = 000063 Blue
No.14744 = 420042 Purple
No.14745 = 480040 Dark pink
No.14746 = 636363 White
No.14747 = 163616 Bright green
No.14748 = 000000 Black
No.14749 = 006060 Bright, light blue
No.14751 = 006363 Bright blue
No.14752 = 320000 Dark red
No.14753 = 242424 Dark gray
No.14755 = 000000 Black
- 693 -
A.2.11 Settings for the Color Palette for Guide Display
These parameters set the colors used to display guides.

Color setting data for a GIDCOL* screen display color* (1 to 16)
“xxyyzz”.
14756 GIDCOL1
GIDCOL 1 : Material color.
14757 GIDCOL2
GIDCOL2 : Material frame color.
14758 GIDCOL3
GIDCOL3 : Tool color.
14759 GIDCOL4
GIDCOL4 : Tool frame color.
14760 GIDCOL5
GIDCOL5 : Tool path (cutting feed).
14761 GIDCOL6
GIDCOL6 : Tool path (rapid traverse).
14762 GIDCOL7
GIDCOL7 : Dimensional line.
14763 GIDCOL8
GIDCOL8 : Character color (unselected character).
14764 GIDCOL9
GIDCOL9 : Character color (selected character).
- 694 -
14765 GIDCOL10
GIDCOL10 : Portion to be cut.
14766 GIDCOL11
GIDCOL11 : Finishing allowance.
14767 GIDCOL12
GIDCOL12 : Reserved.
14768 GIDCOL13
GIDCOL13 : Reserved.
14769 GIDCOL14
GIDCOL14 : Explanation of measurement (static sentence)
14770 GIDCOL15
GIDCOL15 : Explanation of measurement (dynamic sentence)
14771 GIDCOL16
GIDCOL16 : Background color.
No.14756 = 003200 Green

No.14757 = 000063 Blue
No.14758 = 000063 Blue
No.14759 = 006060 Light blue
No.14760 = 006060 Light blue
No.14761 = 600000 Red
No.14762 = 000063 Blue
No.14763 = 000063 Blue
No.14764 = 636300 Yellow
No.14767 = 000000 Black (reserved)
No.14768 = 000000 Black (reserved)
No.14769 = 636363 White
No.14770 = 006060 Light blue
No.14771 = 242424 Dark gray
- 695 -
A.2.12 Settings for Tool Path Drawing Colors
These parameters set the tool path drawing colors.

“xxyyzz”.
14773 DATA
DATA : Color of blank figure during tool path drawing.

If the value is set to 0, Green is used as the respective initial values
(003200).
- 696 -
A.2.13 Settings for Machining Simulation Animation Colors
These parameters set machining simulation animation colors.

“xxyyzz”.
14777 ANMCOL1
ANMCOL1 : Color of part figures during animation.
14778 ANMCOL2
ANMCOL2 : Color of material cut-off portions during animation.
14779 ANMCOL3
ANMCOL3 : Color of the tool during animation.
14780 ANMCOL4
ANMCOL4 : Color of the coordinate axes during animation.
14781 ANMCOL5
ANMCOL5 : Color of the background during tool path plotting.
If these parameters are set to 0, their standard colors are assumed.
- 697 -
A.2.14 Settings for Path Colors During Tool Path Plotting
These parameters set the path colors used during tool path plotting.
“xxyyzz”.
14785 PATHCOL1
PATHCOL1 : Color of the path of a rapid traverse tool.
14786 PATHCOL2
PATHCOL2 : Color of the path of a cutting feed tool.
14787 PATHCOL3
PATHCOL3 : Color of the path of a threading tool.
If these parameters are set to 0, their standard colors are assumed.
- 698 -
A.2.15 Settings for the Allocation of Startup Function Keys
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14794 GRP MES SYS OFS PRG POS
POS 0: The manual guide does not start when function key <1> is pressed.
1: The manual guide starts when function key <1> is pressed.
PRG 0: The manual guide does not start when function key <2> is pressed.
OFS 0: The manual guide does not start when function key <3> is pressed.
SYS 0: The manual guide does not start when function key <4> is pressed.
MES 0: The manual guide does not start when function key <5> is pressed.
GRP 0: The manual guide does not start when function key <6> is pressed.
<1> <2> <3>
POS PROG OFFSET
SETTING
SYSTEM MESAGE GRAPH
<4> <5> <6>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14795 PS3 PS2 PS1 FPT CS3 CS2 CS1
CS1 0: The manual guide does not start on Custom Screen 1 (AUX) when
function key <1> is pressed.
1: The manual guide starts on Custom Screen 1 (AUX) when function
key <1> is pressed.
NOTE
If the conversational macro screen is not provided,
bit 5 of parameter No. 8652 (CMEC1) must be set
to 1.
CS2 0: The manual guide does not start on Custom Screen 3 (MCR) when
1: The manual guide starts on Custom Screen 3 (MCR) when function
key <1> is pressed.
- 699 -
NOTE
to 1.
CS3 0: The manual guide does not start on Custom Screen 2 (MENU) when
1: The manual guide starts on Custom Screen 2 (MENU) when function
key <1> is pressed.
NOTE
to 1.
FPT 0: The manual guide does not start when function key <2> is pressed.
NOTE
Bit 4 of parameter No. 8652 (CMECF) must be set
to 1.
<1>
CUSTOM
FAPT
<2>
PS1=0, PS2=0, PS3=0 : The maximum memory size is set to 250K byte.
PS1=1, PS2=0, PS3=0 : The maximum memory size is set to 500K byte.
PS1=0, PS2=1, PS3=0 : The maximum memory size is set to 1M byte.
NOTE
PS1, PS2 and PS3 are set in the 1 path parameter
only.
- 700 -
A.2.16 Settings for Current Position Display
14799 DS1AXS
DS1AXS 0 : The first controlled axis is displayed in display area 1.

≠0 : Number of the controlled axis to be displayed in display area 1.
14800 DS2AXS
DS2AXS 0 : The second controlled axis is displayed in display area 2.

14801 DS3AXS
DS3AXS 0 : The third controlled axis is displayed in display area 3.

14802 DS4AXS
DS4AXS 0 : The fourth controlled axis is displayed in display area 4.

14803 DS5AXS
DS5AXS 0 : The fifth controlled axis is displayed in display area 5.

14804 DS6AXS
DS6AXS 0 : The sixth controlled axis is displayed in display area 6.

14805 DS7AXS
DS7AXS 0 : The seventh controlled axis is displayed in display area 7.

14806 DS8AXS
DS8AXS 0 : The eighth controlled axis is displayed in display area 8.

- 701 -
A.2.17 Settings for F Load Meter Compensation
Parameters Nos. 14815 to 14822 are independent ones for respective

paths.
These parameters are used to compensate a CNC controlled axis to
which load is applied constantly, such as a vertical axis, for that load,
using the load meter.
14815 ELOFS1
ELOFS1 : Value of the load current of the first CNC controlled axis in the
steady status, as converted into a digital value (-6554 to +6554).
14816 ELOFS2
ELOFS2 : Value of the load current of the second CNC controlled axis in the
14817 ELOFS3
ELOFS3 : Value of the load current of the third CNC controlled axis in the
14818 ELOFS4
ELOFS4 : Value of the load current of the fourth CNC controlled axis in the
14819 ELOFS5
ELOFS5 : Value of the load current of the fifth CNC controlled axis in the
14820 ELOFS6
ELOFS6 : Value of the load current of the sixth CNC controlled axis in the
14821 ELOFS7
ELOFS7 : Value of the load current of the seventh CNC controlled axis in the
14822 ELOFS8
ELOFS8 : Value of the load current of the eighth CNC controlled axis in the
- 702 -
A.2.18 Settings for Tool Management Functions
These parameters are for the settings for tool management functions.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14823 STS TLD LIA LIF TMG MSR TOF ORT
ORT 0: The screen for associating a tool number with a compensation number
is not displayed.
1: The screen is displayed.
TOF 0 : The per-tool-number tool offset setting screen is not displayed.
MSR 0 : The compensation type, tool number, and group number input fields
are not displayed on the measurement screen.
1: The fields are displayed.
TMG 0 : The tool management data setting screen is not displayed.
LIF 0 : The tool life management data setting screen is not displayed.
LIA 0 : The screen of Tool Life Data List is not displayed.
1: The screen of Tool Life Data List is displayed.
TLD 0 : The soft-key for changing screen from Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i to Tool
Management Data Table is not displayed.
1: The soft-key for changing screen from Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i to Tool
Management Data Table is displayed.
STS 0: When a compensation type is specified, the compensation type is not
displayed in the status display area.
1: The type is displayed.
14824 OFSRELTL
OFSRELTL : Start compensation number (0 to 999) to be associated with a tool

number.
14825 OFSTYPNO
OFSTYPO : Number of compensation types (0 to 9)
- 703 -
A.2.19 Settings for Arbitrary Figures
These parameters are for the settings for arbitrary shapes.
14840 DSPCRDZX
DSPCRDZX : Drawing coordinates when an arbitrary ZX figure is programmed.

=0 Same effect as that of setting 5.
=1 Plan view, horizontal axis = +X, vertical axis = +Z
=5 Plan view, horizontal axis = +Z, vertical axis = +X
Z X
X Z
1 5
14841 DSPCRDZC
DSPCRDZC : Drawing coordinates when an arbitrary ZC figure is programmed.

=1 Plan view, horizontal axis = +C, vertical axis = +Z
=6 Plan view, horizontal axis = +Z, vertical axis = -C
Z Z
C C
1 6
14842 DSPCRDYZ
DSPCRDYZ : Drawing coordinates when an arbitrary YZ figure is programmed.

=1 Plan view, horizontal axis = + Y, vertical axis = +Z
=6 Plan view, horizontal axis = +Z, vertical axis = -Y
Z Z
Y Y
1 6
- 704 -
A.2.20 Settings for Operations in General (All common path)
These parameters are for the settings for operations in general.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14850
#0 0: In the tool offset window, the tab of [TOOL DATA] is displayed.

1: In the tool offset window, the tab of [TOOL DATA] is not displayed.
NOTE
#0 is necessary to order the optional function of
Milling Cycles or Turning Cycles.
#1 0: In the work-piece coordinate system window and tool offset window,

[CURSOR] can not be changed.
1: In the work-piece coordinate system window and tool offset window,
[CURSOR] can be changed into [TAB→].
#2 0: The soft-key [RETURN] is displayed on Tool Management Data

screen and Manual Measurement screen.
1: The soft-key [CLOSE] is displayed on Tool Management Data screen
and Manual Measurement screen.
#4 0: The soft-key [M CODE] is displayed on the basic screen.

1: The soft-key [M CODE] is not displayed on the basic screen
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14851
#0 0: Corner element between a blank element and a part element is created

in the normal direction at creating free figure.
1: Corner element between a blank element and a part element is created
in the opposite direction at creating free figure.
#7 0: Not inhibit to edit the tool management data at NC screen.

1: Inhibit to edit the tool management data at NC screen
- 705 -
A.2.21 Settings for Operations in General (Each path)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14855
#0 0: In the tool offset window, Y-axis offset data is displayed.

1: In the tool offset window, Y-axis offset is not displayed.
NOTE
This parameter #0 is necessary to order the
optional function of Y-axis offset data display
- 706 -
A.2.22 Settings for Operations in General (All common path)
14860 DATA
DATA : Special character for search function in the program display window
on the base screen.
Please set the decimal number of ASCII.
If the value is 0, the special character is assumed to be “?”.
- 707 -
A.3 PARAMETERS FOR MILLING CYCLE MACHINING
A.3.1 Parameters for Milling Cycles in General
These parameters are for the settings for milling cycles in general.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27000 MC6 MC5 MC4 MC3 MC2 MC1 MC0
MC0 0: In ZC plane cycle output, G02/G03 are not inverted.

1: In ZC plane cycle output, G02/G03 are inverted.
MC1 0: The hole machining menu has hole machining items for M.
Remark) Refer to “1.1 Hole Machining by Milling”.
1: The hole machining menu has hole machining items for T.
Remark) Refer to “1.2 Hole Machining by Turning”.
MC2 0: In XC plane cycle output, G12.1/G13.1 are not output.
1: In XC plane cycle output, G12.1/G13.1 are output.
Remark) Refer to the paragraph of XC plane figure of Facing,
Contouring, Pocketing or Grooving.
MC3 0: In ZC plane cycle output, G07.1 is not output.
1: In ZC plane cycle output, G07.1 is output.
Remark) Refer to the paragraph of ZC plane figure of Facing,
Contouring, Pocketing or Grooving.
MC4 0: In cycle input screens, the tab of [FACE POSIT] for end face position
is not displayed.
1: In cycle input screens, the tab of [FACE POSIT] for end face position
is displayed.
Remark) Refer to “1.8 Rear End Facing by Milling”.
MC5 0: In the soft-key of [START],[CYCLE],[END] and [FIGURE], the
icons for Milling are displayed.
1: In the soft-key of [START],[CYCLE],[END] and [FIGURE], the
icons for Turning are displayed.
MC6 0: In [START] menu screens, the tab of [COORD CONV] is displayed.
1: In [START] menu screens, the tab of [COORD CONV] is not
displayed.
Remark) Refer to “3. Slant Face Machining (coordinate conversion)”.
- 708 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27001 P3 P2 P1 P0
P0 0: The tab of [ROT. AXIS] for rotation axis names are not displayed.
1: The tab of [ROT. AXIS] for rotation axis names are displayed.
P1 0 : Invalid
1: Rotation axis name selection soft keys [C] and [A] are used.
(It is necessary to set P0 to 1.)
P2 0: Invalid
1: Rotation axis name selection soft keys [C] and [B] are used.
P3 0: Invalid
1: Rotation axis name selection soft keys [C] and [E] are used.
Remark) Refer to “1.9 Address Setting of Rotation Axis”.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27002 ESC MDL TLG
TLG 0: In Milling cycle menu, the tab of [TOOL COND.] is not displayed.
1: In Milling cycle menu, the tab of [TOOL COND.] is displayed.
MDL 0 : In Milling cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the
modal will be returned to the state of beginning cycle.
1: In Milling cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the
modal will not be returned to the state of beginning cycle.
ESC 0 : In Milling cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the tool
will go back to the point where machining cycle started.
1: In Milling cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the tool
will not go back to the point where machining cycle started.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27003 ML1 ML0
By setting this parameter, the optimum cycle menus can be displayed

on the screen. Please set 1 bit only according to the machine
configuration.
ML0 1: Machining center X/Y/Z-axis

ML1 1: Machining center X/Y/Z/C/B-axis (B-axis : Tool tilting axis)
Remarks) If both of ML0 and ML1 are set, ML1 takes priority.
- 709 -
NOTE
1 When the parameter No.27003 is set, please sure
to push [F] key on NOW LOADING screen after
Power ON. The necessary parameters are set
automatically. (When the necessary parameters
are set, the message of “NOW SETTING
PARAMETERS” is displayed on the left side of
NOW LOADING screen.)
2 By setting the parameter No.27003, the following
parameters related to display are set
autoimatically.
No.14702#1 No.27000#1 No.27000#4 No.27100#4 No.27000#6 No.27001#0,#1 No.27004#0 No.27004#1

Spindl select Hole select Face pos-M Face pos-T Coord conv Rot. axis nam Menu 1 Menu 2
No.27003 #0=1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
No.27003 #1=1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27004 MM1 MM0
If the machine configuration does not meet the parameter No.27003,

this parameter is used to display the optimum menu on the screen.
MM0 1 : The following menus are displayed.

• Hole Machining (G1000 to G1006) or (G1110 to G1114)
• Facing (G1020 to G1021)
• Contouring (G1030 to G1033)
• Pocketing (G1040 to G1043)
• Grooving (G1050 to G1053)
• XY-plane : Free figure (G1200 to G1206)
• XY-plane : Hole position (G1210 to G1217)
• XY-plane : Fixed form figure (G1220 to G1223)
MM1 1 : The following menus are displayed.

• Hole Machining (G1000 → G1006) or (G1110 → G1114)
• Facing (G1020 → G1021)
• Contouring (G1030 → G1033)
• Pocketing (G1040 → G1043)
• Grooving (G1050 → G1053)
• C-axis Grooving (G1056)
• XC-plane : Free figure (G1500 → G1506)
• XC-plane : Fixed form figure (G1520 → G1523)
• XC-plane : C-axis figure (G1570 → G1573)
• ZC-plane : Free figure (G1600 → G1606)
• ZC-plane : C-axis figure (G1670 → G1673)
- 710 -
NOTE
1 When these parameter are all 0, the all milling
cycle menu are displayed on the screen
2 When the parameter No.27003 is set, this
parameter are initialize at the power ON and
pushing “F” key.
27005 CLMPM
CLMPM 0: M code for Main spindle C-axis clamping is not output.

≠0 : M code for Main spindle C-axis clamping.
(Path-specific parameter)
Remark) refer to “1.10 C-axis Clamping M code Output”.
27006 UCLMPM
UCLMPM 0: M code for Main spindle C-axis unclamping is not output.

≠0 : M code for Main spindle C-axis unclamping.
27007 CFCODM
CFCODM : Feedrate to replace all rapid traverse feedrate during C-axis

machining for feed per minute.
If 0 is set, the feedrate is assumed 2000 (mm/min) or 78.7 (inch/min) .
Unit of data:
For metric input (0000#2=0) : 1(mm/min)
For inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.01(inch/min)
NOTE
In XC plane, Polar coordinate interpolation is used.
That is, it is impossible to use G0 command.
Therefore, No.27007 is used instead of rapid
traverse.
27008 CFCODR
CFCOD : Feedrate to replace all rapid traverse feedrate during C-axis

machining for feed per revolution.
If 0 is set, the feedrate is assumed 2 (mm/min) or 0.0787 (inch/min).
- 711 -
Unit of data:
For metric input (0000#2=0) : 0.0001(mm/rev)
For inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.000001(inch/rev)
NOTE
In XC plane, Polar coordinate interpolation is used.
That is, it is impossible to use G0 command.
Therefore, No.27008 is used instead of rapid
traverse.
27009 CLERCLMP
CLERCLMP : Minimum Clump value of the clearance for Milling cycles.
Unit of data:
27010 APESCLMP
APESCLMP : Minimum Clump value of Radius or Distance of Approach or Escape

for Milling cycles.
Unit of data:
27011 CLMPMS
CLMPMS 0: M code for Sub spindle C-axis clamping is not output.

≠0 : M code for Sub spindle C-axis clamping.
27012 UCLMPMS
UCLMPMS 0: M code for Sub spindle C-axis unclamping is not output.

≠0 : M code for Sub spindle C-axis unclamping.
- 712 -
A.3.2 Parameters for Facing Cycles
These parameters are for the settings for facing cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27030 FC0
FC0 0 : The input data item of [PATH MOVE METHOD] and [PATH
MOVE FEED RATE] are displayed on Facing cycle menu.
1: The input data item of [PATH MOVE METHOD] and [PATH
MOVE FEED RATE] are not displayed on Facing cycle menu.
- 713 -
A.3.3 Parameters for Contouring Cycles
These parameters are for the settings for contouring cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27040 CN6 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1 CN0
CN0 0: During in-feed in Roughing, the tool moves by retracting to the height
of the top workpiece surface plus the clearance.
1: During in-feed in Roughing, the tool moves by retracting to the height
of the machining surface plus the clearance.
CN1 0: In Roughing, the tool moves at a hollow by retracting to the height of
the top workpiece surface plus the clearance.
1: In Roughing, the tool moves at a hollow by retracting to the height of
the machining surface plus the clearance.
CN2 0: In Roughing, the tool moves at an opening by retracting to the height
of the top workpiece surface plus the clearance..
1: In Roughing, the tool moves at an opening by retracting to the height
CN3 0: In side finishing, NC does not perform cutter compensation.
1: In side finishing, NC performs cutter compensation.
Remark) Tool path is not calculated with Cutter compensation in
inside, but G41 or G42 is outputted directly.
CN4 0: The system performs an interference check.
1: The system does not perform an interference check.
CN6 0: In Roughing, when the cutting start point is equal to the end point, the
tool cuts directly without escape to the radius direction.
1: In Roughing, when the cutting start point is equal to the end point, the
tool cuts with escape to the radius direction.
27045 COFSW
COFSW : Offset method for side finishing and chamfering in contouring.

=0 : Corner cut interpolation.
=1 : Circular interpolation.
=2 : Extended straight line.
0 1 2
- 714 -
27046 CM VFR
CMVFR : Feedrate during movement in the cutter radius direction in contouring.

For feed per minute.
If 0 is set, the feedrate is assumed Rapid traverse feedrate.
Unit of data:
Remark) Feedrate during movement in the cutter radius direction is

‘Frm’ as the following illustration.
27047 CM VFT
CMVFT : Feedrate during movement in the tool axis direction in contouring

for feed per minute.
Unit of data:
Remark) Feedrate during movement in the tool axis direction is ‘Ftm’

as the above illustration.
27048 CVOVL
CVOVL : Amount of overlapping for an approach/escape during contouring.
Unit of data :
For metric input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
For inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
CVOVL
- 715 -
27049 CM VFR
CMVFR : Feedrate during movement in the cutter radius direction in contouring

for feed per revolution.
Unit of data:
Remark) Refer to No.27046.
27050 CM VFT
CMVFT : Feedrate during movement in the tool axis direction in contouring

Unit of data:
- 716 -
A.3.4 Parameters for Pocketing Cycles
These parameters are for the settings for pocketing cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27060 PR7 PR6 PR5 PR4 PR3 PR2 PR2 PR0
PR0 0: Machining starts on the inside during roughing and bottom finishing.
1: Machining starts on the outside during roughing and bottom finishing.
PR1 0: The top of an island is not machined during roughing and bottom
finishing.
1: Machining is performed by controlling the depth of cut during
roughing and bottom finishing.
PR1 = 0 PR1 = 1
PR2 0: Method of interpolation during roughing and bottom finishing

(interpolation of elements with arcs).
1: Method of interpolation during roughing and bottom finishing
(interpolation of elements by extending them).
PR2 = 0 PR2 = 1
PR3 0: Method of machining portions left uncut during roughing and bottom
finishing (no machining of portions left uncut).
1: Method of machining portions left uncut during roughing and bottom
finishing (machining of portions left uncut).
UNCUT
- 717 -
PR4 0: The tool moves by retracting to the height of the top workpiece
surface plus the clearance at an opening during roughing and bottom
finishing.
1: The tool moves by retracting to the height of the machining surface
plus the clearance at an opening during roughing and bottom
finishing.
PR5 0: Paths for all material elements are created with an island reference
during roughing and bottom finishing.
1: Paths for all material elements are created with a pocket reference
PR5 = 0 PR5 = 1
PR6 0: The tool moves by retracting to the height of the top workpiece
surface plus the clearance during movement in the tool axis direction
1: The tool moves by retracting to the height of the machining surface
plus the clearance during movement in the tool axis direction during
roughing and bottom finishing.
PR7 0: The input data item of [START PT.(1ST AXIS)] and [START PT.(2ND
AXIS)] are not displayed on the Pocketing cycle menu..
1: The input data item of [START PT.(1ST AXIS)] and [START PT.(2ND
AXIS)] are displayed on the Pocketing cycle menu..
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27061 PF4 PF3 PF2 PF1 PF0
PF0 0: During in-feed in side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves by
retracting to the height of the top workpiece surface plus the
clearance.
1: During in-feed in side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves by
retracting to the height of the machining surface plus the clearance.
PF1 0: In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at a hollow by
clearance.
1: In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at a hollow by
- 718 -
PF2 0: In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at an opening by

clearance.
1: In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at an opening by
PF3 0: In side finishing, NC does not perform cutter compensation.
PF4 0: The system performs an interference check.
27065 POFSW
POFSW : Offset method for side finishing and chamfering in pocketing.

=0: Corner cut interpolation.
=1: Circular interpolation.
=2: Extended straight line.
0 1 2
27066 PKTFR
PKTFR : Feedrate during movement in the cutter radius direction in in-feed for
feed per minute.
Unit of data:

- 719 -
27067 PKTFT
PKTFT : Feedrate during movement in the tool axis direction in in-feed for
feed per minute.
Unit of data:

27068 PKOVL
PKOVL : Amount of overlapping for an approach/escape during side finishing

and chamfering.
Unit of data :
PKOVL
27069 OPNCR
OPNCR : Clearance for an open portion in pocketing

(When OPNCR = 0)
For metric input (0000#2=0), the clearance for the open portion
is assumed to be 3 mm.
For inch input (0000#2=1), the clearance for the open portion is
assumed to be 0.3 inch.
Unit of data :
OPNCR
- 720 -
27070 PKTFR
PKTFR : Feedrate during movement in the cutter radius direction in in-feed for
feed per revolution.
Unit of data:
27071 PKTFT
PKTFT : Feedrate during movement in the tool axis direction in in-feed for
Unit of data:
- 721 -
A.3.5 Parameters for Grooving Cycles
These parameters are for the settings for grooving cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27080 GR2 GR1 GR0
GR0 0: During roughing and bottom finishing, in-feed in the cutter radius
direction is performed with a uniform depth of cut.
(A uniform depth is the calculated depth automatically.)
1: During roughing and bottom finishing, in-feed in the cutter radius
direction is performed with [CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS].
GR1 0: During roughing and bottom finishing, in-feed in the tool axis
direction is performed with a uniform depth of cut.
(A uniform depth is the calculated depth automatically.)
1: During roughing and bottom finishing, in-feed in the tool axis
direction is performed with [CUT DEPTH OF AXIS].
GR2 0: During roughing and bottom finishing, tool retracts to the top
workpiece surface plus the clearance..
1: During roughing and bottom finishing, the tool retracts to the position
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27081 GF4 GF3 GF2 GF1 GF0
GF0 0: During in-feed in side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves by
clearance.
1: During in-feed in side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves by
GF1 0: In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at a hollow by
clearance.
1: In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at a hollow by
GF2 0: In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at an opening by
clearance.
1: In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at an opening by
GF3 0: In side finishing, NC does not perform cutter compensation.
GF4 0: The system performs an interference check.
- 722 -
27085 GOFSW
GOFSW : Offset method for groove finishing paths.

=0: Corner cut interpolation.
=1: Circular interpolation.
=2: Extended straight line.
0 1 2
27086 GM VFR
GMVFR : Feedrate during movement in the cutter radius direction in grooving

for feed per minute.
Unit of data:

27087 GM VFT
GMVFT : Feedrate during movement in the tool axis direction in contouring for
feed per minute.
Unit of data:

- 723 -
27088 GVOVL
GVOVL : Amount of overlapping for an approach/escape during side finishing

and chamfering.
Unit of data :
GVOVL
27089 GM VFR
GMVFR : Feedrate during movement in the cutter radius direction in grooving

Unit of data:
27090 GM VFT
GMVFT : Feedrate during movement in the tool axis direction in contouring for
Unit of data:
- 724 -
A.4 PARAMETERS FOR TURNING CYCLE OPTIONS
A.4.1 Parameters Common to Turning Cycles
These parameters are used for settings common to Turning cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27100 TC4 TC1 TC0
TC0 0 : The input item of [CUT DEPTH DIRECTION] is not displayed.

1: The input item of [CUT DEPTH DIRECTION] is displayed.
TC1 0 : The input item of [POCKET CUTTING] and [OVERHANG
CUTTING] are not displayed.
1: The input item of [POCKET CUTTING] and [OVERHANG
CUTTING] are displayed.
TC4 0: The tab of [FACE POSIT] for end face position is not displayed.
1: The tab of [FACE POSIT] for end face position is displayed.
Remark) Refer to “2.5 Rear End Facing by Turning”.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27102 ESC MDL TLG
TLG 0 : In Turning cycle menu, the tab of [TOOL COND.] is not displayed.
1: In Turning cycle menu, the tab of [TOOL COND.] is displayed.
MDL 0: In Turning cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the
modal will be returned to the state of beginning cycle.
1: In Turning cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the
modal will not be returned to the state of beginning cycle.
ESC 0 : In Turning cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the tool
will go back to the point where machining cycle started.
1: In Turning cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the tool
will not go back to the point where machining cycle started.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27103 LT7 LT3 LT2 LT1 LT0
By setting this parameter, the optimum cycle menus can be displayed

on the screen. Please set 1 bit only according to the machine
configuration.
LT0 1: Lathe - X/Z-axis

LT1 1: Lathe - X/Z/C-axis
LT2 1: Lathe - X/Z/C/Y-axis
LT3 1: Lathe -X/Z/C/Y/B-axis (B-axis : Tool tilting axis)
- 725 -
Remarks) If over two of LT0 to LT3 are set, larger number bit takes
priority.
LT7 1 : Lathe - Lathe with sub spindle
Remarks) This LT7 is used together with LT0 to LT3.
NOTE
1 When the parameter No.27103 is set, please sure
to push [F] key on NOW LOADING screen after
Power ON. The necessary parameters are set
automatically. (When the necessary parameters
are set, the message of “NOW SETTING
PARAMETERS” is displayed on the left side of
NOW LOADING screen.)
2 By setting the parameter No.27103, the following
parameters related to display are set
autoimatically.
No.14702#1 No.27000#1 No.27000#4 No.27100#4 No.27000#6 No.27001#0,#1 No.27004#0 No.27004#1

Spindl select Hole select Face pos-M Face pos-T Coord conv Rot. axis nam Menu 1 Menu 2
No.27103 #0=1
No.27103 #7=0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
No.27103 #1=1
No.27103 #7=0
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
No.27103 #2=1
No.27103 #7=0
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
No.27103 #3=1
No.27103 #7=0
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
No.27103 #0=1
No.27103 #7=1
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
No.27103 #1=1
No.27103 #7=1
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
No.27103 #2=1
No.27103 #7=1
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
No.27103 #3=1
No.27103 #7=1
1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
- 726 -
A.4.2 Parameters for Turning Cycle Machining
These parameters are for the settings for turning cycles.
27125 PTANG
PTANG : Cutting edge protection angle. PTANG
Unit of data : 1 deg
27126 DCLMP
DCLMP : clamping value of ‘CUT DEPTH’ in Turning, Turning grooving and

Threading
Unit of data :
For metric input (0000#2=0) : 0.001 mm
For inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001 inch
When DCLMP = 0, the depth-of-cut clamping value is assumed to be

one-tenth of a specified depth of cut.
27128 ESCPCLM P
ESCPCLMP : Minimum clump value of ESCAPE AMOUNT for Turning Cycle.
Unit of data:
27129 XAXSCLM P
XAXSCLMP : Minimum clump value of X-AXIS CLEARANCE for Turning Cycle.
Unit of data:
27130 ZAXSCLM P
ZAXSCLMP : Minimum clump value of Z-AXIS CLEARANCE for Turning Cycle.
Unit of data:
- 727 -
A.4.3 Parameters for Threading Cycles
These parameters are for the settings for threading cycles.
27145 TDMIN
TDMIN : Minimum depth of cut during threading.

Unit of data :
27150 TGNOUT
TGNOUT : Thread height factor for general-purpose threads (for outside

diameters). The value 0 is regards as 0.6495.
Unit of data : 0.0001
NOTE
No.27150 is used to calculate [THREAD DEPTH] in
general-purpose threads (for outside diameters).
The formula is as follows.
(Thread Depth for Outside) = (No.27150) × (Lead)
27151 TGNIN
TGNIN : Thread height factor for general-purpose threads (for inside

NOTE
general-purpose threads (for inside diameters).
(Thread Depth for Inside) = (No.27151) × (Lead)
- 728 -
27152 TMTOUT
TMTOUT : Thread height factor for metric and unified threads (for outside
NOTE
1 No.27152 is used to calculate [THREAD DEPTH] in
metric threads (for outside diameters).
(Thread Depth for Outside) = (No.27152) × (Lead)
unified threads (for outside diameters).
(Thread Depth for Outside) (mm)
= ((No.27152) ÷ (Thread Number)) × 25.4
(Thread Depth for Outside) (inch)
= (No.27152) ÷ (Thread Number)
27153 TMTIN
TMTIN : Thread height factor for metric and unified threads (for inside
NOTE
metric threads (for Inside diameters).
(Thread Depth for Inside) = (No.27153) × (Lead)
unified threads (for Inside diameters).
(Thread Depth for Inside) (mm)
= ((No.27153) ÷ (Thread Number)) × 25.4
(Thread Depth for Inside) (inch)
- 729 -
27154 TPTOUT
TPTOUT : Thread height factor for PT and PF threads (for outside diameters).
The value 0 is regards as 0.6403.
NOTE
PT and PF threads (for outside diameters).
(Thread Depth for Outside) (mm)
= ((No.27154) ÷ (Thread Number)) × 25.4
(Thread Depth for Outside) (inch)
27155 TPTIN
TPTIN : Thread height factor for PT and PF threads (for inside diameters).
The value 0 is regards as 0.6403.
NOTE
PT and PF threads (for Inside diameters).
(Thread Depth for Inside) (mm)
= ((No.27155) ÷ (Thread Number)) × 25.4
(Thread Depth for Inside) (inch)
27156 SURFSCLM P
SURFCLMP : Minimum clump value of SURFACE CLEARANCE for Threading

Cycle.
Unit of data:
27157 ENTRCLM P
ENTRCLMP : Minimum clump value of ENTRANCE CLEARANCE for Threading

Cycle.
Unit of data:
- 730 -
27158 EXITSCLM P
EXITCLMP : Minimum clump value of EXIT CLEARANCE for Threading Cycle.
Unit of data:
- 731 -
A.4.4 Parameter for Turning and Grooving Cycles
This parameter is for the setting for turning and grooving cycles.
27175 GDMIN
GDMIN : Minimum depth of cut in turning and grooving (rough cutting).

Unit of data :
When GDMIN = 0, the minimum depth of cut is assumed to be one-

tenth of a specified depth of cut.
27176 CLRECLM P
CLRECLMP : Minimum clump value of CLEARANCE for Turning grooving Cycle.
Unit of data:
27177 ESCPCLM P
ESCPCLMP : Minimum clump value of ESCAPE CLEARANCE for Turning

grooving Cycle.
Unit of data:
- 732 -
A.4.5 Parameters for Machining Simulation (Animated)
These parameters are for the settings for machining simulation

(animated).
27300 SCALE OF THE BLANK
Scale magnification for automatic scaling in the machining simulation

function
Unit of data : 10 %
Valid data range : 0 to 20 (When 0 is set, 100% is assumed.)
NOTE
1 In case of one Cs axis of main spindle, please be
sure to set No.14717 only. If no Cs axis or
2 In case of two Cs axis with main and sub spindle,
please be sure to set No.27301, No.27302 and
No.27312 #0. And No.14717 is used as working
number for Cs axis, as follows.
3 When 27312#0 = 1, No. 14717 is rewritten to the
value of No.27301 or No.27302 by a spindle
selection command (G1998). Therefore, in the
case of No.27312 #0=1, please be sure to specify
Spindle selection command (G1998) before Milling
cycles.
4 As to Apindle selection command (G1998), please
refer to “9.5 Setting of data for Animation”.
27301 ROTATE AXIS NO. (SP1)
Rotation axis (Cs axis) number of Main spindle

<Related parameters : No.14717, No.27312#0, #1, #2, No.27302>
NOTE
Please be sure to specify Spindle selection
command (G1998 S1) before each Milling cycles.
27302 ROTATE AXIS NO. (SP2)
Rotation axis (Cs axis) number of Sub spindle

<Related parameters : No.14717, No.27312#0, #1, #2, No.27301>
NOTE
Please be sure to specify Spindle selection
command (G1998 S2) before each Milling cycles.
- 733 -
27303 MTYPE
MTYPE : Type of machine mechanism
Type Controlled rotary axis Parameter setting for the axis

Without a rotary axis
Parameter No.14178 is a tool rotary
0 Or
axis.
With a tool rotary axis
Parameter No.14178 is a work table
1 With a work table rotary axis
rotary axis.
<Related parameters : No.27301#1, No.27305,No.27307>
NOTE
1 No. of work rotated axis (usually C-axis) is set to
the parameter No.14717. In the case of machine
mechanism type=1, this parameter must not be set
to work table rotary axis No.
2 Drawing of machining simulation is not available for
a machine which takes a tool rotary axis with a
work table rotary axis.
3 Drawing of machining simulation is not available for
a machine which has the roatry axis slant for the
basic three axis.
4 Machine mechanism type=2(With a work table
rotary axis) is not available with multi-paths system
or with a subspindle.
5 The axis to set to the parameter No.14718 is only a
rotary axis about Y axis.
- 734 -
27305 TBLDISTX
TBLDISTX : In the case that type of machine mechanism is type 1(With a work
table rotary axis), distance (X-axis) from the rotary center point to the
rotary standard point of drawing blank figure. The direction of + X
axis is “+” for this data.
27307 TBLDISTZ
TBLDISTZ : In the case that type of machine mechanism is type 1(With a work
table rotary axis), distance (Z-axis) from the rotary center point to the
rotary standard point of drawing blank figure. The direction of - Z-
axis is “+” for this data.
Column blank form Rectangular solid blank form
Z WORK ORIGIN Z Z
REMOVAL K
X
X Height of blank
Length of blank
WORK ORIGIN X
Parameter No.27307
Center point of rotary
table
Parameter No.27307
Parameter No.27305
Center point of rotary
table
Parameter No.27305
- 735 -
A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX BTURNOPEEZG44
27309 DATA
DATA : R signal for selected path simulation in Multi path lathe function
(The first figure is “bit” and other figure is the R signal number.)
In the multi-path lathe, the machining simulation is performed only

at the selected path by R signal that is set at this parameter.
For example, with 2 paths system
- At Path 1, the parameter No.27309=1237 (R123.7 is 1)
- At Path 2, the parameter No.27309=11237 (R1123.7 is 1)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27310 TLD PRC
PRC 0: The soft-key of [STOP] is displayed on the animation soft-key row.

1: The soft-key of [PROC] is displayed instead of the soft-key [STOP].
NOTE
[STOP] is for the operation to stop with the end
block.
[PROC] is for the operation to stop with ‘M01’.
TLD 0: The tag of [TOOL] is not displayed on START menu window.

1: The tag of [TOOL] is displayed on START menu window
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27311 ACD ITF
ITF 0: Animated simulation continues even when the interference check

function issues an interference alarm.
1: Animated simulation is stopped temporarily even when the
interference check function issues an interference alarm.
NOTE
Parameters No. 27310 and No. 27311 can not be
used in some editions.
ACD 0 : Even If the work-piece coordinate is changed in performing

machining simulation, the drawing is performed on the same work-
piece coordinate as one on the top of simulation.( The work-piece
coordinate by drawing definition of blank form block is same as the
continuous-state work-piece coordinate on the top of simulation.)
1: If the work-piece coordinate is changed in performing machining
simulation, the drawing is performed on it.
- 736 -
NOTE
1 This parameter is availabel only in drawing of
machining sumulation. Drawing during machining is
always performed on the same workpiece
coordinate as the top of machining.
2 In multi-paths system, this parameter is a common
parameter at all paths.
3 In the case of ACD = 1, spindle at which animated
simulation is performed is the last commanded by
G1998 command at one of paths. In the case of
ACD = 0, spindle at which animated simulation is
performed is the last commanded by G1992 or
G1998 command at one of paths.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27312 INS INA SPA
SPA 0: The rotation axis number for simulation based on spindle 1 or spindle
2 with a subspindle attached is not switched by a spindle selection
command.
1: The rotation axis number for simulation based on spindle 1 or spindle
2 with a subspindle attached is switched by a spindle selection
command.
<Related parameters : No.14717, No.27312#1, #2, No.27301,
No.27302>
NOTE
When SPA = 1, No. 14717 is rewritten to the value
of No.27301 (in the case of G1998 S1) or
No.27302 (in the case of G1998 S2) by a spindle
selection command (G1998). So, please be sure to
specify a spindle selection command when SPA =
1.
INA 0: INS (#2) is not available.

1: INS (#2) is available.
NOTE
It is necessary to set SPA (#0) to 1.
- 737 -
INS 0: After animated simulation, No.14714 (the rotation axis number for
simulation) is rewritten to the value of No.27301 (axis number of
Main spindle).
1: After animated simulation, No.14714 (the rotation axis number for
simulation) is rewritten to the value of No.27302 (axis number of Sub
spindle).
NOTE
It is necessary to set SPA (#0) and INA (#1) to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27350 GTP
GTP 0: When animate general tool, Tip position is in front

1: When animate general tool, Tip position is in rear
27351 GENR TIP LENGTH
GENR TIP LENGTH :

Cutter length when animate general tool
Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
If 0 is set in case of metric input (0000#2=0), default data will be
12mm.
If 0 is set in case of inch input(0000#2=1), default data will be
0.4724inch.
27352 GENR HOLD LENGTH
GENR HOLD LENGTH : Holder length when animate general tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
50mm.
1.9685inch.
- 738 -
27353 GENR HOLD WIDTH
GENR HOLD WIDTH : Holder width when animate general tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
14mm.
0.5512inch.
27354 GENR HOLD LENGTH2
GENR HOLD LENGTH2 : Holder length2 when animate general tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
27355 GENR HOLD WIDTH2
GENR HOLD WIDTH2 : Holder width2 when animate general tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27356 TTP
TTP 0 : When animate threading tool, tip position is in front

1: When animate threading tool, tip position is in rear
27357 THREAD TIP WIDTH

THREAD TIP WIDTH : Tip width when animate threading tool
Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
3mm.
0.1181inch.
- 739 -
27358 THREAD HOLD LENGTH
THREAD HOLD LENGTH : Holder length when animate threading tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
50mm.
1.9685inch.
27359 THREAD HOLD WIDTH
THREAD HOLD WIDTH : Holder width when animate threading tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
14mm.
0.5512inch.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27360 GVP
GVP 0: When animate grooving tool tip position is in front

1: When animate grooving tool tip position is in rear
27361 GROOVE HOLD LENGTH
GROOVE HOLD LENGTH : Holder length when animate grooving tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
50mm.
1.9685inch.
- 740 -
27362 GROOVE HOLD WIDTH
GROOVE HOLD WIDTH : Holder width when animate grooving tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
14mm.
0.5512inch.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27363 BTP
BTP 0: When animate button turning tool tip position is in front

1: When animate button turning tool tip position is in rear
27364 BUTTON HOLD LENGTH
BUTTON HOLD LENGTH : Holder width when animate button turning tool
Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
50mm.
1.9685inch.
27365 BUTTON HOLD WIDTH
BUTTON HOLD WIDTH :

Holder width when animate button turning tool
Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
14mm.
0.5512inch.
- 741 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27366 STP
STP 0: When animate straight tool, tip position is in front

1: When animate straight tool, tip position is in rear
27367 STRAI TIP LENGTH
STRAI TIP LENGTH : Tip length when animate straight tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
12mm.
0.4724inch.
27368 STRAI HOLD LENGTH
STRAI HOLD LENGTH : Holder length when animate straight tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
50mm.
1.9865inch.
27369 STRAI HOLD WIDTH
STRAI HOLD WIDTH : Holder width when animate straight tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
14mm.
0.5512inch.
- 742 -
27370 STRAI HOLD LENGTH2
STRAI HOLD LENGTH2 : Holder length 2 when animate straight tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
27371 STRAI HOLD WIDTH2
STRAI HOLD WIDTH2 : Holder width 2 when animate straight tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
27372 DRILL TIP LENGTH
DRILL TIP LENGTH : Holder width when animate straight tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
50mm.
1.9865inch.
27373 F E MIL TIP LENGTH
F E MIL TIP LENGTH : Tip length when animate flat end mill tool
Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
27374 TAP TIP LENGTH
TAP TIP LENGTH : Tip length when animate tapping tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
50mm.
1.9865inch.
- 743 -
27376 C SINK TIP LENGTH
C SINK TIP LENGTH : Tip length when animate counter sink tool
Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
26mm.
1.0236inch.
27377 C SINK CUT LENGTH
C SINK CUT LENGTH : Cutter length when animate counter sink tool
Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
50mm.
1.9685inch.
27378 C SINK SHANK LENGTH
C SINK SHANK LENGTH : Shank length when animate counter sink tool
Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
130mm.
5.1181inch.
27379 C SINK SHANK DIA
C SINK SHANK DIA : Shank diameter when animate counter sink tool
Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
32mm.
1.2598inch.
- 744 -
27380 B E MIL TIP LENGTH
B E MIL TIP LENGTH : Shank diameter when animate counter sink tool
Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
50mm.
1.9685inch.
27381 REAM TIP LENGTH
REAM TIP LENGTH : Tip length when animate reamer tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
50mm.
1.9685inch.
27382 BORING TIP LENGTH
BORING TIP LENGTH : Tip length when animate boring tool

Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
50mm.
1.9685inch.
27383 F MIL TIP LENGTH
F MIL TIP LENGTH : Tip length when animate face mill tool
Input unit :
mm input (0000#2=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (0000#2=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
63mm.
2.4803inch.
- 745 -
A.4.6 Parameters for Multi Path Lathe Function
These parameters are for the Multi path lathe function.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27400 SPT
SPT 0 : Tool post is selection by the software key

1 : Tool post is selection by the HEAD switch signal
(common parameter among paths)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27401 MR2 SR2 SSP SMP SSE SME
SME 0 : Tool post 2 cannot be used with spindle 1.

SSE 0 : Tool post 2 cannot be used with spindle 2.
NOTE
SSE is available in the case of Parameter
No.14702 SUB(#1) = 1 only.
SMP 0 : Tool post 2 is placed above spindle 1.

NOTE
SMP is available in the case of Parameter
No.27401 SME(#0) = 1 only.
SSP 0 : Tool post 2 is placed above spindle 2.

NOTE
SSP is available in the case of Parameters
No.14702 SUB(#1) = 1 and No.27401 SSE(#1) = 1
only.
- 746 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27402 MR3 SR3 TSP TMP TSE TME
TME 0 : Tool post 3 cannot be used with spindle 1.

TSE 0 : Tool post 3 cannot be used with spindle 2.
NOTE
TSE is available in the case of Parameter
No.14702 SUB(#1) = 1 only.
TMP 0 : Tool post 3 is placed above spindle 1.

NOTE
TMP is available in the case of Parameter
No.27402 TME(#0) = 1 only.
TSP 0 : Tool post 3 is placed above spindle 2.

NOTE
TSP is available in the case of Parameters
No.14702 SUB(#1) = 1 and No.27402 TSE(#1) = 1
only.
- 747 -
A.4.7 Parameters for Icon of Path Number Display
These parameters are for Icon of path number display.
27410 P1ICON
P1ICON : ICON number when path-1 is selected

27411 P2ICON

27412 P3ICON

= 0 : nothing
= 1 : path-1 with lower direction and opposite to another
(2 path system)
= 2 : path-1 with upper direction and opposite to another
(2 path system)
= 3 : path-2 with upper direction and opposite to another
(2 path system)
= 4 : path-2 with lower direction and opposite to another
(2 path system)
= 5 : path-2 with upper direction and parallel to another
(2 path system)
= 6 : path-2 with lower direction and parallel to another
(2 path system)
= 10 : single path-1 with lower direction (3 path system)
= 11 : right side path-1 with upper direction (3 path system)
= 12 : left side path-1 with upper direction (3 path system)
= 13 : single path-1 with upper direction (3 path system)
= 14 : right side path-1 with lower direction (3 path system)
= 15 : left side path-1 with lower direction (3 path system)
= 22 : single side path-2 with lower direction (3 path system)
= 32 : single side path-3 with lower direction (3 path system)
- 748 -
TURNOPEEZG44 APPENDIX B.ALARMS
B ALARMS
If the input program or one or more parameter settings are not correct,
the following P/S alarms are raised.
When an alarm other than the following P/S alarms is raised, refer to
the relevant NC operator's manual.
Alarm Description
There is no area that can be machined. The tool is too large for the specified machining
Cause
3003 area.
Action Modify the machining program to use a smaller tool.
Cause The number of cuts has exceeded the limit.
3004 Modify the machining program to reduce the number of cuts by, for example, dividing
Action
the machining profile.
Cause The machining start point is invalid.
3005 Either change the machining start point to a normal one or modify the machining
Action
program to automatically decide the point.
Cause The machining area is invalid.
3006 Modify the machining program to specify a correct machining area, such as a part figure
Action
and a blank figure in a machining profile.
Cause The cutting conditions are invalid.
3007 Modify the machining program to specify normal cutting conditions such as the
Action
feedrate.
Cause Finishing is not possible under the specified conditions.
3008
Action Review the finishing program.
An interference occurred. For example, the tool path may interfere with the opposite
Cause
machining area.
3009
For example, the cutter radius may be too large for the machining area. Modify the
Action
machining program.
No machining cycle is found. No machining type block is found; only a figure block is
Cause
specified.
3010
Modify the machining program by, for example, adding the necessary machining type
Action
block.
Cause No machining cycle is found. An unavailable machining cycle is specified.
3011
Action Necessary options may not be added. Contact the machine tool builder.
G codes that cannot be combined together. A figure block not available to the
Cause
machining type block is specified.
3012
Modify the machining program to specify a correct combination of machining type block
Action
and figure block.
Cause The arbitrary figure is invalid.
3013
Action Modify the machining program to specify a correct arbitrary figure.
Cause The figure data is invalid.
3014
Action Modify the machining program to specify correct figure data.
Cause The tool offset cannot be read correctly.
3015 Necessary options, such as the number of offset sets, may not be set. Modify the
Action
machining program by, for example, changing the offset number to an available one.
- 749 -
B.ALARMS APPENDIX TURNOPEEZG44
Alarm Description
With a cycle machining command or other 4-digit G commands, necessary arguments
Cause
3016 are not entered.
Action Modify the machining program by, for example, adding necessary arguments.
Cause The parameter setting is invalid.
3025
Action Check the parameter setting.
Cause The machining type specification is invalid.
3030
Action Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate machining type.
Cause The return mode is invalid.
3031
Action Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate return mode.
Cause The I point coordinate specification is invalid.
3032
Action Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate I point coordinates.
Cause The dwell time specification is invalid.
3033 For example, a negative value may be entered as the dwell time. Modify the machining
Action
program to specify an appropriate dwell time.
Cause The overrun specification is invalid.
3034 For example, a negative value may be entered as the overrun. Modify the machining
Action
program to specify an appropriate overrun.
Cause The thread lead specification is invalid.
3035 For example, a negative value may be entered as the thread lead. Modify the machining
Action
program to specify an appropriate thread lead.
Cause The shift specification is invalid.
3036 For example, a negative value may be entered as the shift. Modify the machining
Action
program to specify an appropriate shift.
Cause The cutting method specification is invalid.
3037 A value not specifiable as threading or other cutting methods is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate cutting method.
Cause The cutting direction specification is invalid.
3038 A value not specifiable as turning or other cutting directions is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate cutting direction.
Cause The cut direction specification is invalid.
3039 A value not specifiable as turning or other cut directions is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate cut direction.
Cause The movement method specification is invalid.
3040 A value not specifiable as facing or other movement methods is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate movement method.
Cause The chamfer amount specification is invalid.
A value not specifiable as chamfering or other chamfer amounts is entered, such as a
3041
Action negative value. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate chamfer
amount.
Cause The ejection amount specification is invalid.
A value not specifiable as chamfering or other face ejection amounts is entered, such
3042
Action as a negative value. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate ejection
amount.
Cause The surplus thickness specification is invalid.
A value not specifiable as pocketing or other surplus thicknesses is entered, such as a
3043
Action negative value. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate surplus
thickness.
Cause The cutter radius is invalid.
3044 A value not specifiable as a cutter radius is entered, such as a negative value. Modify
Action
the machining program to specify an appropriate cutter radius.
Cause The depth of cut is invalid.
3045 A value not specifiable as a depth of cut is entered, such as a negative value. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate depth of cut.
- 750 -
Alarm Description
Cause The cutting angle is invalid.
3046 A value not specifiable as a cutting angle is entered. Modify the machining program to
Action
specify an appropriate cutting angle.
Cause The cut angle is invalid.
3047 A value not specifiable as pocketing or other cut angles is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate cut angle.
Cause The clearance is invalid.
3048 A value not specifiable as a clearance is entered, such as a negative value. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate clearance.
Cause The finishing allowance is invalid.
3049 A value not specifiable as a finishing allowance is entered, such as a negative value.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate finishing allowance.
Cause The feedrate is invalid.
3050 A value not specifiable as a feedrate is entered, such as zero. Modify the machining
Action
program to specify an appropriate feedrate.
Cause The number of finishing operations is invalid.
A value not specifiable as the number of threading or other finishing operations is
3051
Action entered, such as 0. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate number of
finishing operations.
Cause The approach specification is invalid.
3052 A value not specifiable as contouring or other approaches is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate approach.
Cause The escape specification is invalid.
3053 A value not specifiable as contouring or other escapes is entered. Modify the machining
Action
program to specify an appropriate escape.
Cause The compensation number is invalid.
3054 A value not specifiable as contour finishing or other compensation numbers is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate compensation number.
Cause The radius of the tool nose is invalid.
3055 A value not specifiable as turning or other tool nose radii is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate radius of the tool nose.
Cause The cutting edge angle/tool angle is invalid.
3056 A value not specifiable as turning or other cutting edge angles or tool angles is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Cause The virtual tool tip position is invalid.
3057 A value not specifiable as turning or other virtual tool tip positions is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate virtual tool tip position.
Cause The depth-of-cut change ratio is invalid.
3058 A value not specifiable as turning or other depth-of-cut change ratios is entered. Modify
Action
the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Cause The return clearance is invalid.
3059 A value not specifiable as turning or other return clearances is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Cause The tool width is invalid.
3060 A value not specifiable as turning and grooving or other tool widths is entered. Modify
Action
Cause The pecking is invalid.
3061 A value not specifiable as turning and grooving or other peckings is entered. Modify the
Action
Cause The first feed override is invalid.
3062 A value not specifiable as turning or other first feed overrides is entered. Modify the
Action
- 751 -
B.ALARMS APPENDIX TURNOPEEZG44
Alarm Description
Cause The spindle speed is invalid.
3063 A value not specifiable as the spindle speed, for example 0, is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate spindle speed.
Cause Tool data aren’t enough to execute cycle.
3064
Action Set tool data in offset window or tool cond in machining blocks.
Cause Tool type doesn’t fit the cycle type.
3065
Action Modify tool data in offset window or the cycle type in machining program.
Cause Modal can’t be sheltered and restored.
3070
Action Command G01, G02 or G03 before the cycle is executed.
3071
Action Command G40 before the cycle is executed.
3070
Action Command G80 before the cycle is executed.
Cause The figure type is invalid.
3075 A type not specifiable as the figure type of a figure block is selected. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate type.
Cause The reference position is invalid.
3076 A value not specifiable as the reference position of a figure block is entered. Modify the
Action
Cause The height/depth is invalid.
3077 A value not specifiable as the height/depth of a figure block is entered. Modify the
Action
Cause The figure length is invalid.
3078 A value not specifiable as the length of a figure block is entered. Modify the machining
Action
program to specify an appropriate value.
Cause The corner rounding specification is invalid.
3079 A value not specifiable as the corner rounding of a figure block is entered. Modify the
Action
Cause The figure angle specification is invalid.
3080 A value not specifiable as the angle of a figure block is entered. Modify the machining
Action
program to specify an appropriate value.
Cause The groove width specification is invalid.
3081 A value not specifiable as the groove width of a figure block is entered. Modify the
Action
Cause The figure radius specification is invalid.
3082 A value not specifiable as the arc radius of a figure block is entered. Modify the
Action
Cause The center-to-center distance specification is invalid.
3083 A value not specifiable as the center-to-center distance of track or other figures is
Action
entered. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Cause The pitch specification is invalid.
3084 A value not specifiable as the pitch angle of a figure block is entered. Modify the
Action
Cause The number of holes/grooves specification is invalid.
3085 A value not specifiable as the number of holes or grooves in a figure block is entered.
Action
Cause The coordinate specification is invalid.
3086 A value not specifiable as a coordinate of a figure block is entered. Modify the
Action
Cause The groove depth specification is invalid.
3087 A value not specifiable as the groove depth of a figure block is entered. Modify the
Action
- 752 -
Alarm Description
Cause The groove corner specification is invalid.
3088 A value not specifiable as the corner rounding of a figure block for grooving is entered.
Action
Cause The groove bottom specification is invalid.
3089 A value not specifiable as the groove bottom of a figure block for grooving is entered.
Action
Cause The thread/hole diameter specification is invalid.
3090 A value not specifiable as a thread or hole diameter in a figure block is entered. Modify
Action
Cause The number-of-threads specification is invalid.
3091 A value not specifiable as the number of threads in a figure block to be threaded is
Action
entered. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Cause An arbitrary figure is not closed.
An arbitrary figure entered for facing, pocketing, or turning is not closed. Modify the
3092
Action machining program to specify a closed figure that uses the same point both as the start
and end points.
Cause All figure elements of an arbitrary figure are specified as parts.
All figure elements of an arbitrary figure entered for turning are specified as "parts."
3093
Action Modify the machining program to specify the figure elements corresponding to actual
blanks as "blanks."
Cause The end face specification is invalid.
3094 A value not specifiable as the end face of the cycle machining is entered. Modify the
Action
Cause The arbitrary figure group specification is not correct.
3095 In the group specification used in, for example, pocketing with islands, either the start or
Action
end block is not entered. Enter an appropriate block.
Cause The arbitrary figure group specification is not correct.
3098 In the group specification used in, for example, pocketing with islands, either the start or
Action
end block is not entered. Enter an appropriate block.
- 753 -
C.Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i SETUP METHOD APPENDIX TURNOPEEZG44
C Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i SETUP METHOD
- 754 -
TURNOPEEZG44 APPENDIX C.Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i SETUP METHOD
C.1 GENERAL
In this chapter, the fundamental method of starting up Doosan Infracore

eZ Guide i is described. If it is already installed and running correctly,
you need not the following operations.
- 755 -
C.2 HARDWARE
The configuration of hardware for running Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i is

determined according to the combination of other CNC functions
ordered. In this manual, it is assumed that the necessary hardware is
completed.
- 756 -
C.3 SOFTWARE
Software described below is necessary for Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i.
C.3.1 Lathe
(1) In case of using only Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i Basic function (S781),
following software is necessary.
File name note

BY45*.MEM -
CEX0DAT*.MEM Horizontal type : *=H
CEX1DAT*.MEM Vertical type : *=V
(2) In case of using Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i Optional Functions like

Milling Cycle (S782), Turning Cycle (S783), Animation (S784),
Set Up Guidance (S785), or Multi Path Lathe function (S786),
following software is necessary instead of that mentioned in (1).
File name note

BY40*.MEM BY45*.MEM is not required
BH00.MEM -
(3) For 2 Path Lathe, following software is necessary addition to that

mentioned in (2).
File name note

BY41*.MEM -
BH01.MEM -
(4) For 3 Path Lathe, following software is necessary addition to that

mentioned in (2).
File name note

BH01.MEM -
BH02.MEM -
- 757 -
C.3.2 Machining Center
File name note

BY45*.MEM -

or Set Up Guidance (S785), following software is necessary
instead of that mentioned in (1).
File name note

BJ00.MEM -
CEX1DAT*.MEM Vertical Type : *=V
C.3.3 Lathe with Compound Machining Function
File name note

BY45*.MEM -

Set Up Guidance (S785), following software is necessary instead
of that mentioned in (1).
File name note

BH10.MEM -
BJ10.MEM -
- 758 -
C.3.4 Other Machines
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i Basic function (S781) is common for all machine
configurations. Following software is necessary.
File name note

BY45*.MEM -
C.3.5 Note
Some functions of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i maynotworkifCNCand

Graphic (*) software are old, because Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i uses the
CNC and Graphic functions. So it is recommended to install the latest
version of those software.
* In case of 160is/180is/210is or 160i/180i/210i, CNC screen

display function corresponds to graphic software.
- 759 -
C.4 PARAMETER SETTING
C.4.1 Lathe
Set the parameters of the cells in the first path and set those
of cells in each path in case of multi path lathe and lathe
with compound machining function.
(1) Set following parameters for Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i Basic

function.
No. Value note
CNC ignores [HELP] key during displaying C
3103#3 1
executor screen in open CNC.
[NEXT DISTANCE] display is available in single
3106#2 1
block mode
No.3106#6, position display change for 3D
3206#6 1 conversion mode, is effective in Doosan Infracore eZ
Guide i screen
3112#0 0 Servo wave display is not available
M02,M30,M99 are not regarded as the end of
3201#6 1
resister
SRAM size for application’s backup variables
8661 40
(40KB)
8662 23 SRAM size for application’s backup (23KB)
not switched to alarm screen automatically
8650#1 1
during displaying C executor screen
C executor transfer [RESET] key code to
8650#0 1
application
8701#6 1 TV check is skipped during edit operation
8701#4 1 Vacant value of P code variables can be read.
DRAM size for user program of C executor
8781 0
must be zero
Debug parameter for macro program must be
9000#0 0
zero
14700#7=0 0 Enable to run Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i
14794-14795 * Assign function key for start Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i
*
14794#0=1: [POS] key is assigned for start
#1=1: [PRG] key is assigned for start
#2=1: [OFS] key is assigned for start
#3=1: [SYS] key is assigned for start
#4=1: [MES] key is assigned for start
#5=1: [GRP] key is assigned for start
- 760 -
14795#0=1: [CUSTOM](AUX screen) key is assigned for start

(No.8652#5 must be set to 1 in case macro screen does
not exist)
#1=1: [CUSTOM](MCR screen) key is assigned for start
not exist)
#2=1: [CUSTOM](MENU screen) key is assigned for start
not exist)
#3=1: Blank key is assigned for start
(No.8652#4 must be set to 1)
(2) Set following parameters for displaying load meter. Following

parameters depend on machining configuration. Refer to
Parameter description (B-63530EN) for detail.
No. Value note

1023 ≠0 Servo axis number of control axis
2086 ≠0 regular current parameter
2165 ≠0 maximum value of amplifier current
3151-3158 ≠0 Axis number to display load meter
4127 ≠0 Displayed value in maximum load
(3) Set following parameters for optimizing cycle menu and icons of
Turning Cycle and Milling Cycle functions according to machine
configuration. In case of no above cycle options, it is
unnecessary to set.
No. Value note
14702#0 → 0:Vertical, 1:Horizontal for icons
27003#1-#0 Xxxxxx00 xxxxxx00:Lathe *
0xxx0001: 2 axes (XZ) lathe
0xxx0010: 3 axes (XZC) lathe
0xxx0100: 4 axes (XZCY) lathe
0xxx1000: 5 axes (XZCYB) lathe
1xxx0001: 2 axes (XZ) lathe
27103#7,#3 with sub spindle
→
-#0 1xxx0010: 3 axes (XZC) lathe
with sub spindle
1xxx0100: 4 axes (XZCY) lathe
with sub spindle
1xxx1000: 5 axes (XZCYB) lathe
with sub spindle
* In case 27003= xxxxxx00 & 27103=0xxx0000, all of cycle menu
is displayed
* This parameter is available on BY40/04 and later.
- 761 -
NOTE
When the parameter No.27003 or No.27103 is set,
please sure to push [F] key on NOW LOADING
screen after Power ON. The necessary parameters
are set automatically. (When the necessary
parameters are set, the message of “NOW
SETTING PARAMETERS” is displayed on the left
side of NOW LOADING screen.)
(4) Set following parameters for output of polar coordinate

interpolation command (G12.1) and cylindrical interpolation
command (G7.1) in cycle motion. In case of no Cs axis or
Milling Cycle option, it is unnecessary to set.
No. Value note

0: G12.1/G13.1 are not output in cycle motion
on XC plane
27000#2 →
1: G12.1/G13.1 are automatically output in
cycle motion on XC plane
0: G7.1Cxx/G7.1C0 are not output in cycle
motion on ZC plane
27000#3 →
1: G7.1Cxx/G7.1C0 are automatically
output in cycle motion on ZC plane
(5) Set following parameters for optimizing C axis figure data input
screen, if two rotate (Cs) axes in main and sub spindle exist and
have different axis name. In case of no Milling Cycle option, it is
unnecessary to set.
No. Value note

xxxx0011: Tab for C or A axis selection is
displayed in figure data input screen
xxxx0101: Tab for C or B axis selection is
27001#3-#0 →
xxxx1001: Tab for C or E axis selection is
- 762 -
(6) Set following parameters for adapting tool motion to work

coordinate in Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i Animation function. In case of
no Animation option, it is unnecessary to set.
No. Value note

14706 * Work coordinate for main spindle
14707 * Work coordinate for sub spindle if existing
* Setting value for 14706 and14707
16 : Right hand coordinate, right =+Z and upper =+X

X
17 : Right hand coordinate, right =-Z and upper =+X

X
18 : Right hand coordinate, right =-Z and upper =-X

Z
19 : Right hand coordinate, right =+Z and upper =-X

Z
20 : Right hand coordinate, right =+X and upper =+Z

Z
- 763 -
(7) Set following parameters for adapting rotate (Cs) axis motion to
work coordinate. If no Cs axis or Animation option, it is
unnecessary to set.
In case of one Cs axis of main spindle
No. Value note

14717 → Cs axis number
In case of two Cs axis with main and sub spindle
No. Value note

27301 → Cs axis number of main spindle
27302 → Cs axis number of sub spindle
switch Cs axis number by spindle selection
27312 xxxxxxx1
command for animation, “G1998 S__;” .
NOTE
14717 is used as working number for Cs axis.
(8) Set following parameters for adapting rotate axis motion, which
tilts tool head or table, to work coordinate. If no such axis or
No. Value note

rotate axis number, which tilts tool head or
14718 →
table
(9) Set following parameters for Set up Guidance function. If no Set

up Guidance option, it is unnecessary to set.
No. Value note

Top number of variables for measurement
12381 10000*
condition
12382 10180* Top number of variables for calibration
12383 10300*
execution
Top number of variables for storing
12384 10500*
measurement result
Amount number of variables for storing
12385 699*
measurement result
12386 951* Address of PMC R signal for measurement
12387 0* Macro program number for tool select
Macro program number for measurement
12388 3600*
execution
* Settings described above is a sample. Set proper value according to
macro program made by MTB.
- 764 -
(10) Set following parameters for Multi Path Lathe function. If no

Multi Path Lathe option, it is unnecessary to set.
No. Value note

14703#3 1 Process list editing is available
0:Softkey switches the display for each path
27400#0 → 1:Head select signal switches the display for
each path
0:Head#1 can not machine with spindle#2
14701#1 →
1:Head#1 can machine with spindle#2
0:Head#1 machines upper part of spindle#1
14701#2 →
1:Head#1 machines lower part of spindle#1
14701#3 →
27401#0 →
27401#1 →
27401#2 →
27401#3 →
27402#0 →
27402#1 →
27402#2 →
27402#3 →
27410 * Icon number for path 1 display
- 765 -
* Icon number
Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Icon
Number 10 11 12 13 14 15
Icon
Number 30 31 32 33 34 35
Icon
(1) Set following parameters for Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i Basic

function.
No. Value note

CNC ignores [HELP] key during displaying C
3103#3 1
executor screen in open CNC.
[NEXT DISTANCE] display is available in single
3106#2 1
block mode
No.3106#6, position display change for 3D
3206#6 1 conversion mode, is effective in Doosan Infracore eZ
Guide i screen
3112#0 0 Servo wave display is not available
M02,M30,M99 are not regarded as the end of
3201#6 1
resister
SRAM size for application’s backup variables
8661 40
(40KB)
8662 23 SRAM size for application’s backup (23KB)
not switched to alarm screen automatically during
8650#1 1
displaying C executor screen
C executor transfer [RESET] key code to
8650#0 1
application
8701#6 1 TV check is skipped during edit operation
8701#4 1 Vacant value of P code variables can be read.
DRAM size for user program of C executor must be
8781 0
zero
9000#0 0 Debug parameter for macro program must be zero
14700#7=0 0 Enable to run Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i
14794-
* Assign function key for start Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i
14795
*
- 766 -
14794#0=1: [POS] key is assigned for start

#1=1: [PRG] key is assigned for start
#2=1: [OFS] key is assigned for start
#3=1: [SYS] key is assigned for start
#4=1: [MES] key is assigned for start
#5=1: [GRP] key is assigned for start
14795#0=1: [CUSTOM](AUX screen) key is assigned for start

not exist)
#1=1: [CUSTOM](MCR screen) key is assigned for start
not exist)
#2=1: [CUSTOM](MENU screen) key is assigned for start
not exist)
#3=1: Blank key is assigned for start
(No.8652#4 must be set to 1)
(2) Set following parameters for displaying load meter. Following

parameters depend on machining configuration. Refer to
Parameter description (B-63530JA) for detail.
No. Value note

1023 ≠0 Servo axis number of control axis
2086 ≠0 regular current parameter
2165 ≠0 maximum value of amplifier current
3151-3158 ≠0 Axis number to display load meter
4127 ≠0 Displayed value in maximum load
(3) Set following parameters for optimizing cycle menu and icons of
Turning Cycle and Milling Cycle functions according to machine
configuration. In case of no above cycle options, it is
unnecessary to set.
No. Value note

14702#0 → 0:Vertical, 1:Horizontal for icons
27003#1- xxxxxx01: 3 axes (XYZ) Machining Center
→
#0 xxxxxx10: 5 axes (XYZCB) Machining Center
27103#7,
0xxx0000 0xxx0000: Machining Center
#3-#0
* In case 27003= xxxxxx00 & 27103=0xxx0000, all of cycle menu
is displayed
* This parameter is available on BY40/04 and later.
- 767 -
NOTE
When the parameter No.27003 or No.27103 is set,
please sure to push [F] key on NOW LOADING
screen after Power ON. The necessary parameters
are set automatically. (When the necessary
parameters are set, the message of “NOW
SETTING PARAMETERS” is displayed on the left
below of NOW LOADING screen.)
(4) Set following parameters for output of polar coordinate

interpolation command (G12.1) and cylindrical interpolation
command (G7.1) in cycle motion. In case of no Cs axis or
Milling Cycle option, it is unnecessary to set.
No. Value note

0: G12.1/G13.1 are not output in cycle motion
on XC plane
2700#2 →
1: G12.1/G13.1 are automatically output in
cycle motion on XC plane
0: G7.1Cxx/G7.1C0 are not output in cycle
motion on ZC plane
2700#3 →
1: G7.1Cxx/G7.1C0 are automatically
output in cycle motion on ZC plane
- 768 -
(5) Set following parameters for adapting tool motion to work

coordinate in Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i Animation function. In case of
no Animation option, it is unnecessary to set.
No. Value note

14706 * Work coordinate *
* Setting value for 14706
16 : Right hand coordinate, right =+Z and upper =+X

X
17 : Right hand coordinate, right =-Z and upper =+X

X
18 : Right hand coordinate, right =-Z and upper =-X

Z
19 : Right hand coordinate, right =+Z and upper =-X

Z
20 : Right hand coordinate, right =+X and upper =+Z

Z
- 769 -
(6) Set following parameters for adapting rotate (Cs) axis motion to
work coordinate. If no Cs axis or Animation option, it is
unnecessary to set.
No. Value note

14717 → Cs axis number
(7) Set following parameters for adapting rotate axis motion, which
tilts tool head or table, to work coordinate. If no such axis or
No. Value note

Rotate axis number, which tilts tool head or
14718 →
table
(8) Set following parameters for Set up Guidance function. If no Set

up Guidance option, it is unnecessary to set.
No. Value note

12381 10000*
condition
12382 10180* Top number of variables for calibration
12383 10300*
execution
Top number of variables for storing
12384 10500*
measurement result
Amount number of variables for storing
12385 699*
measurement result
12386 951* Address of PMC R signal for measurement
12387 0* Macro program number for tool select
Macro program number for measurement
12388 3600*
execution
* Settings described above is a sample. Set proper value according to
macro program made by MTB.
C.4.3 Other Machines
Refer to C.4.1 Lathe or C.4.2 Machining Center, which is closer to

your machine.
- 770 -
C.5 M CODE OUTPUTED DURING CYCLE EXECUTING
Following M code is output in milling cycle
- M code for rigid tapping

- M code for clamping and unclamping rotate axis as “C”
C.5.1 M code for Rigid Tapping
(1) M code is output in following cycles in case that rigid tap is

specified and parameter No.5200#0 is zero.
G1002 (Tapping Cycle for Machining Center by live tool)

G1112 (Tapping Cycle for Lathe by live tool)
G1102 (Tapping Cycle for Lathe by rotating work)
(2) M code is output in following timing
G90
G00 X(x1) Y(y1) Z(I point)
G99
M29 S(spindle)*
G84 Z(depth) R(R point) P(dwell) F(feed)
X(x2) Y(y2)
X(x3) Y(y3)
G80
G00 Z(I point)
* M code value depends on parameter No.5210 and No.5212.
- 771 -
C.5.2 M code for Clamping and Unclamping Rotate Axis as “C”
(1) M code is automatically output in C axis, which position C axis

in the cycle motion.
In Hole Machining Cycles combined with following figures, C

axis clamping and unclamping M codes are automatically output.
a) C-axis hole on the polar coordinate plane (circle points):

G1572
b) C-axis hole on the polar coordinate plane (random points):
G1573
c) C-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (circle points): G1672
d) C-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (random points):
G1673
In Grooving Cycles combined with following figures, C axis

clamping and unclamping M codes are automatically output.
e) X-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane: G1571

f) Z-axis groove on the cylindrical surface: G1671
(2) M code is output in following timing
In case of Hole Machining Cycles
G90
G17
Mb*
G00 X(x1) C(c1) Z(I point)
G99
G81 Z(depth) R(R point) F(feed) Ma*
Mb
X(x2) C(c2) Ma*
Mb
X(x3) C(c3) Ma*
Mb
G80
G00 Z(I point)
* Ma means C axis clamping M code, Mb means C axis

unclamping one.
M code value depends on parameter No.27005, No.27006,
No.27011 and No.27012
- 772 -
In case of Grooving Cycles
Mb *
G17
G0 X 80. C0.
G0 Z2.
Ma *
G1Z-10.F100.
G1 X40. F100.
G1Z2.F100.
Mb *
G17
G0 X80. C120.
G0 Z2.
Ma *
G1Z-10.F100.
G1 X40. F100.
G1Z2.F100.
Mb *
* Ma means C axis clamping M code, Mb means C axis

unclamping one.
M code value depends on parameter No.27005, No.27006,
No.27011 and No.27012
- 773 -
C.6 OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE
Following optional functions are installed with Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i.

when a CNC is shipped.
C.6.1 Lathe
Function NO.
J734(*)
J872
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide iBasic (S781) J972
J973
J738#256K
J878
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide iTurning Cycle (S783) J930
J855
* User application on C executor is not available.
Function NO.
J734(*)
J872
J972
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide iBasic (S781)
J973
J956
J738#256K
J890
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide iMilling Cycle (S782)
J931
* User application on C executor is not available.
- 774 -
TURNOPEEZG44 INDEX
INDEX
<+> <B>
[+INPUT] Soft Key .............................................. 180, 185 BACKGROUND EDITING ......................................... 194
BASIC EDITING OPERATIONS OF PART
<A>
PROGRAM .............................................................. 27
Addition of Optional Block Skip for Each Path
Basic Operations........................................................... 532
Program Check....................................................... 555
BASIC PARAMETERS ............................................... 678
ADDRESS SETTING OF ROTATION AXIS ............. 393
BASIC SPECIFICATIONS .......................................... 199
ALARMS...................................................................... 749
BG EDITING................................................................ 126
ALL-IN-ONE SCREEN ................................................... 9
ANIMATION FOR MULTI-PATH LATHE................ 512 <C>
Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Contouring (XY Plane) .... 334 CALCULATOR FUNCTION............................... 246, 247
Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Contouring C-AXIS CLAMPING M CODE OUTPUT .................. 395
(YZ Plane, XC Plane, ZC Plane)............................ 336 C-AXIS GROOVING................................................... 384
Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Facing (XY Plane) ........... 307 Cell ............................................................................... 529
Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Facing Changing by a Soft-key ................................................ 511
(YZ Plane, XC Plane, ZC Plane)............................ 308 Changing by a Switch on a Machine Operator’s Panel. 511
Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Grooving (XY Plane) ....... 382 CHANGING CYCLE MACHINING AND
Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Grooving FIGURE DATA........................................................ 58
(YZ Plane, XC Plane, ZC Plane)............................ 383 Changing Screens for Each Path................................... 511
Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Pocketing (XY Plane) ...... 357 CHANGING THE CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY 121
Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Pocketing Changing the Program Number (ALTER key) ............... 28
(YZ Plane, XC Plane, ZC Plane)............................ 359 CHANGING TOOL PRIORITY .................................. 588
Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Turning............................. 437 CHANGING WORK COORDINATE DURING
ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE CYLINDRICAL MACHINING SIMULATION (ANIMATION,
SURFACE (ZC PLANE) ......................................... 94 TOOL PATH DRAWING)..................................... 150
ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE POLAR Checking by Animation ........................................ 641, 672
COORDINATE INTERPOLATION PLANE CHECKING OF THE PART PROGRAM ........... 641, 672
(XC PLANE)............................................................ 83 CONTOURING ............................................................ 309
ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE XY PLANE .......... 62 COPY ............................................................................. 31
ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE YZ PLANE........... 73 Copying of a Cell.......................................................... 538
ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR TURNING CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS...................... 23
(ZX PLANE) .......................................................... 105 Creating New Part Program .................................. 626, 651
Assign of Transfer ........................................................ 551 CREATING OF PART PROGRAM..................... 626, 651
Assign of Waiting ......................................................... 546 Current Cell .................................................................. 529
ASSOCIATING TOOL NUMBERS WITH OFFSET Current Position Display Part ....................................... 522
NUMBERS ............................................................ 565 CUT ................................................................................ 30
AUTOMATIC SETTING OF INITIAL VALUE Cutting Edge Angle of Tool Data Base Function ......... 210
DATA..................................................................... 250
<D>
AUTOMATIC SETTING OF INITIAL VALUES
Data Format .................................................................. 240
ON THE INPUT DATA SCREEN......................... 251
DEALING OF THE PART PROGRAM WITH
AUTOMATIC TOOL DEFINITION BLOCK COPY.. 252
UNFITTED TO PROCESS LIST FORM............... 558
DELETE ......................................................................... 33
i-1
INDEX TURNOPEEZG44
Deleting a Block (DELETE key) .................................... 28 Entering blank form data ...................................... 627, 652
Deleting a Fixed Form Sentence................................... 192 Entering by fixed form sentence menu
Deleting a Word (DELETE key) .................................... 28 ................................ 628, 637, 640, 653, 663, 668, 670
Deletion of a Cell.......................................................... 536 Entering C-axis drilling cycle block ............................. 638
Deletion of Optional Block Skip for Each Path Entering C-axis Drilling Process .................................. 638
Program Check....................................................... 557 ENTERING CONTOUR PROGRAMS.......................... 55
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ABOUT ENTERING ENTERING CYCLE MACHINING DATA................... 45
ARBITRARY FIGURES.......................................... 59 Entering drilling cycle block......................................... 668
DETAILS...................................................................... 519 Entering Drilling Process.............................................. 668
DISABLE WARNING MESSAGE ...................... 577, 569 Entering figure for outer finishing ................................ 636
DISPLAY CONTENTS................................................ 529 Entering figure for outer roughing................................ 631
Display Life States of Group ........................................ 593 Entering figure for outer wall contouring (rough) ........ 655
DISPLAY LIFE VALUE OF TOOL LIFE Entering figure for pocket bottom finishing.................. 665
MANAGEMENT DATA SCREEN ....................... 589 Entering figure for pocket roughing.............................. 658
DISPLAY OF GROUP NUMBER LIST...................... 593 Entering figure for pocket side finishing .............. 666, 667
Display Position of Each Path ...................................... 520 ENTERING FIXED FORM FIGURE DATA FOR
DISPLAY TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA OF CNC CYCLE MACHINING............................................. 50
STANDARD SCREEN .......................................... 606 Entering hole position block................................. 639, 669
DISPLAYED OFFSET TYPES Entering in ISO-code form directly
( SET BY THE MACHINE TOOL BUILDER) ..... 605 ................................ 628, 637, 640, 653, 663, 667, 670
Displayed Warning Messages............................... 581, 583 Entering of the Fixed Form Sentence for Milling
DISPLAYED WARNING MESSAGES ...................... 596 Machining............................................................... 624
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT RESULTS ............. 123 Entering of Tool Data ................................................... 209
DISPLAYING THE DRAWING-DURING- Entering Outer Finishing Cycle Machining Process ..... 635
MACHINING WINDOW ...................................... 125 Entering outer roughing cycle block............................. 629
DISPLAYING THE MACHINING SIMULATION Entering Outer Roughing Process................................. 629
WINDOW .............................................................. 124 Entering outer wall contouring (rough) cycle block ..... 654
Distinction between Main and Sub Spindle.................. 396 Entering Outer Wall Contouring Process ..................... 654
DRAWING DURING MACHINING (TOOL PATH) . 135 Entering Pocket Bottom and Side Finishing Process.... 664
Entering pocket bottom finishing cycle block............... 664
<E>
Entering pocket roughing cycle block .......................... 656
EDITING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS......... 40
Entering Pocket Roughing Process............................... 656
EDITING IN A PROGRAM LIST ................................. 24
Entering releasing motion blocks in ISO-code form..... 636
EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS ......................... 20
ENTERING THE END COMMAND............................. 57
EDITING OF FREE FIGURE OF SUBPROGRAM
Entering the Fixed Form Sentence for Milling ............. 648
FORM .................................................................... 214
Entering the Fixed Form Sentence for Turning
Editing of Tool Name ................................................... 208
Machining............................................................... 623
EDITING OPEARTIONS ............................................ 534
ENTERING THE START COMMAND ........................ 41
EDITING WITH THE MACHINING PROGRAM
Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks
LIST ....................................................................... 118
for C-axis Drilling .................................................. 637
End ............................................................................... 528
ENDING BACKGROUND EDITING ......................... 196
for Drill................................................................... 667
Entering a Word (INSERT key) ..................................... 27
ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURE DATA FOR CYCLE
for Finishing Flat Endmill ...................................... 663
MACHINING........................................................... 52
i-2
TURNOPEEZG44 INDEX
Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating blocks HOLE MACHINING BY TURNING
for Roughing Flat Endmill ..................................... 653 (WITH THE TOOL ROTATED)............................ 290
Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks Hole Machining Type Block......................................... 262
for Turning Machining ........................................... 628 Hole Position Block (XC Plane and End Face) ............ 287
Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotation Blocks Hole Position Block (XY Plane)................................... 278
for Outer Finishing in ISO-code Form ................... 634 Hole Position Block (YZ Plane) ................................... 286
Execution Operations in Machining Simulation Hole Position Block
(Animated) ............................................................. 149 (ZC Plane and Cylindrical Surface)........................ 289
Execution Operations in Machining Simulation How to Finish ............................................................... 519
(Tool Path) ............................................................. 143 HOW TO SELECT PATH............................................ 523
EXPLANATORY NOTES ........................................... 615 How to Start.................................................................. 519
<F> <I>
FACING ....................................................................... 297 INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING............................. 60
Figure Blocks for C-axis Grooving............................... 386 INHIBITION OF EDITING TOOL MANAGEMENT
File Format Allowed for Memory Card Input/Output .. 236 DATA AT CNC STANDARD SCREEN ............... 612
Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Contouring (XY Plane) 330 Initialization to Standard Fixed Form Sentences .......... 193
Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Contouring Initializing of Tool Data ............................................... 211
(YZ Plane, XC Plane) ............................................ 333 [INP.C.] Soft Key ......................................................... 186
Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Facing (XY Plane)........ 303 Insertion of a Cell ......................................................... 535
Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Facing
<K>
(YZ Plane, XC Plane) ............................................ 306
KEY-IN PASTE ............................................................. 34
Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Grooving (XY Plane) ... 376
Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Grooving <L>
(YZ Plane, XC Plane) ............................................ 381 Lathe ..................................................... 616, 757, 760, 774
Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Pocketing (XY Plane) .. 353 Lathe with Compound Machining Function ................. 758
Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Pocketing LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA LIST SCREEN ........... 600
(YZ Plane, XC Plane) ............................................ 356
<M>
Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Threading ..................... 486
M code for Clamping and Unclamping Rotate Axis
Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Turning Grooving......... 465
as “C” ..................................................................... 772
FIXED FORM SENTENCE INSERTION ..................... 37
M code for Rigid Tapping ............................................ 771
FORMAT ..................................................................... 560
M CODE OUTPUTED DURING CYCLE
<G> EXECUTING ......................................................... 771
GROOVING................................................................. 360 Machine Configuration Setting..................................... 508
GROUP NUMBER LIST DISPLAY............................ 591 Machining Center .................................. 642, 758, 766 774
MACHINING PROGRAM FORMAT ........................... 18
<H>
MACHINING PROGRAM WINDOW AND
HANDLING A PROGRAM LARGER THAN THE
EIDITNG.................................................................. 21
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SIZE......................... 244
MACHINING SIMULATION (ANIMATED) ............. 146
HANDLING LARGE PROGRAMS............................. 242
Machining Simulation (Animation) .............................. 513
HARD COPY OF Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i SCREENS ..... 241
MACHINING SIMULATION (TOOL PATH) ............ 141
HARDWARE ............................................................... 756
MACHINING SIMULATION FOR EACH PATH ...... 514
HELP SCREEN............................................................ 227
Machining Type Blocks for C-axis Grooving............... 384
HOLE MACHINING (WORKPIECE ROTATION).... 402
Machining Type Blocks for Contouring ....................... 309
HOLE MACHINING BY MILLING ........................... 262
i-3
INDEX TURNOPEEZG44
Machining Type Blocks for Facing .............................. 297 <O>

Machining Type Blocks for Grooving .......................... 360 Operation ...................................................... 589, 607, 612
Machining Type Blocks for Hole Machining OPERATIONS DURING BACKGROUND EDITING 197
(Workpiece Rotation) ............................................. 402 OPERATIONS IN MACHINING SIMULATION ....... 133
Machining Type Blocks for Hole Machining by Operations in the “END” Menu............................ 640, 670
Turning (with the Tool Rotated)............................. 290 OPERATIONS IN THE MANUAL MODE
Machining Type Blocks for Pocketing ......................... 337 (HANDLE AND JOG) ........................................... 132
Machining Type Blocks for Threading......................... 480 OPERATIONS IN THE MDI MODE .......................... 130
Machining Type Blocks for Turning ............................ 408 OPERATIONS IN THE MEM MODE......................... 116
Machining Type Blocks for Turning Grooving ............ 438 Operations of “START” Menu ............................. 627, 652
MAGAZINE DATA SCREENS OPERATIONS OF EDITING SUBPROGRAM .......... 215
(MAGAZINE 1 TO 4)............................................ 580 OPERATIONS OF MULTI-PATH LATHE................. 511
MAIN FEATURES OF Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i................. 16 OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE.................... 774
Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i SETUP METHOD ...................... 754 Other Machines..................................................... 759, 770
M-CODE MENU............................................................ 35 OTHERS............................................... 516, 524, 561, 609
[MEASUR] Soft Key............................................ 178, 184 OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE............................ 15
Memory Card Input Operation for Part Program.......... 234 OVERVIEW OF THIS MANUAL................................... 3
Memory Card Input Operation for Tool Data ............... 239
<P>
MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION ...... 229
Parameter ...................................................................... 526
MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF PART
Parameter for Turning and Grooving Cycles ................ 732
PROGRAM ............................................................ 230
PARAMETER SETTING............................................. 760
MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF TOOL
PARAMETERS............................................................ 675
DATA..................................................................... 237
Parameters Common to Turning Cycles ....................... 725
Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Part Program .... 230
Parameters for Contouring Cycles ................................ 714
Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Tool Data ......... 237
Parameters for Facing Cycles........................................ 713
Memory Card Output Operation for Part Program ....... 232
Parameters for Grooving Cycles ................................... 722
Memory Card Output Operation for Tool Data ............ 238
Parameters for Icon of Path Number Display ............... 748
MILLING ..................................................................... 255
Parameters for Machining Simulation (Animated) ....... 733
MODAL DISPLAY OF OFFSET TYPES ................... 603
PARAMETERS FOR MILLING CYCLE
Modification of Process Name ..................................... 543
MACHINING......................................................... 708
Modifying a Block (ALTER key) ................................... 28
Parameters for Milling Cycles in General..................... 708
Modifying a Fixed Form Sentence ............................... 191
Parameters for Multi Path Lathe Function.................... 746
Modifying a Word (ALTER key) ................................... 27
Parameters for Operations in General ........................... 679
Modifying the Numeric Value of a Word
Parameters for Pocketing Cycles .................................. 717
(ALTER key)............................................................ 27
Parameters for the Axial Configuration of the
Moving of a Cell........................................................... 540
Machine.................................................................. 683
MULTI-PATH LATHE APPLICATION ..................... 507
Parameters for Threading Cycles .................................. 728
<N> Parameters for Turning Cycle Machining..................... 727
NC PROGRAM CONVERSION ................................. 127 PARAMETERS FOR TURNING CYCLE OPTIONS . 725
NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION............. 198 Parameters Required for Basic Options ........................ 676
NEXT-BLOCK DISPLAY FUNCTION ...................... 128 Parameters Required for Machining Simulation........... 677
Note .............................................................................. 759 PASTE............................................................................ 32
NOTES ......................................................................... 575 POCKETING................................................................ 337
Position of M Code Output........................................... 396
i-4
TURNOPEEZG44 INDEX
PREPARATION................................................... 508, 526 SEARHING FOR A SEQUENCE NUMBER IN

PREPARING OF THE FIXED FORM SENTENCE A PROGRAM ........................................................ 119
MENU ............................................................ 623, 648 SELECTING A CYCLE MACHINING TYPE .............. 43
PRESETTING RELATIVE COORDINATES ............. 122 SELECTING A PROGRAM FOR MACHINING
PROCESS LIST EDITING FUNCTION...................... 525 OPERATION ......................................................... 120
Program Display Part.................................................... 522 SELECTING FIGURES ................................................. 47
Program Edit................................................................. 544 SELECTING THE LIFE ,ANAGEMENT DATA
Program Selection Operation and Other Operations in SETTING SCREEN ............................................... 585
Drawing during Machining .................................... 137 SELECTING THE LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA
Program Selection Operation and Other Operations in LIST SCREEN ....................................................... 599
Machining Simulation (Animated) ......................... 148 SELECTING THE SCREEN FOR ASSOCIATING
Program Selection Operation and Other Operations in A TOOL NUMBER WITH A OFFSET NUMBER 566
Machining Simulation (Tool Path)......................... 143 SELECTING THE TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA
SETTING SCREEN ............................................... 579
<R>
SELECTING THE TOOL NUMBER-BY-TOOL
READ AT FIRST ............................................................. 4
NUMBER TOOL OFFSET SETTING SCREEN... 571
Rear End Facing ................................................... 391, 492
SELECTING TOOL DATA AT PROGRAM
REAR END FACING BY MILLING........................... 391
ENTERING ............................................................ 212
REAR END FACING BY TURNING.......................... 492
Selecting whether to Display the Tool Path or Not in
Registering a New Fixed Form Sentence...................... 189
Drawing during Machining .................................... 137
REGISTERING FIXED FORM SENTENCES............ 187
Set Icon for Selected Turret .......................................... 510
Release of Waiting........................................................ 549
SETTING A MAXIMUM PROGRAM SIZE THAT
Release Transfer ........................................................... 553
CAN BE HANDLED ............................................. 243
REQUIRED PARAMETERS....................................... 676
SETTING DATA.......................................................... 175
Restore Group Life ....................................................... 594
Setting for the Display Language.................................. 685
RESTRICTIONS .......................................................... 204
SETTING OF DATA FOR ANIMATION ................... 152
RETURN TO MENU SCREEN ................................... 610
SETTING OF THE TOOL DATA................................ 649
Return to SETTINGS Menu Screen ............................. 610
SETTING OF TOOL DATA ................................ 208, 625
REWINDING A MACHINING PROGRAM ............... 117
SETTING OF TOOL GRAPHIC DATA ...................... 213
<S> SETTING OF TOOL LENGTH OFFSET DATA ........ 643
Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations in Drawing SETTING OF TOOL OFFSET DATA ......................... 207
during Machining ................................................... 138 Setting of Tool Set ........................................................ 209
Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations in Setting of Tool Type ..................................................... 208
Machining Simulation (Animated) ......................... 149 SETTING OF WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM DATA646
Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations in SETTING OF WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT
Machining Simulation (Tool Path)......................... 145 DATA..................................................................... 621
SCREEN CONFIGURATION ..................................... 520 Setting of X-axis Offset Data........................................ 620
SCREEN DISPLAY ITEMS ................................ 567, 572 Setting of Z-axis Offset Data ........................................ 618
Screen Display Items ............................................ 580, 582 SETTING THE LIFE NOTICE FLAG ......................... 597
SCREEN DISPLAY ITEMS ................................ 586, 604 SETTING THE WORK COORDINATE DATA.......... 176
SEARCH (FORWARD AND BACKWARD)................ 29 SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA ....................... 182, 617
SEARCHING FOR A MACHINING PROGRAM TO Settings for Arbitrary Figures ....................................... 704
BE EDITED ............................................................. 26 Settings for Current Position Display ........................... 701
Settings for F Load Meter Compensation ..................... 702
i-5
INDEX TURNOPEEZG44
Settings for Graphic Display......................................... 686 SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE INPUT
Settings for Machining Simulation Animation Colors.. 697 SCREEN................................................................. 226
Settings for Machining Simulation Axes ...................... 687 SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE MAIN
Settings for Operations in General (All common path) SCREEN................................................................. 225
........................................................................ 705, 707 SHORTCUTS FOR THE M CODE INSERTION
Settings for Operations in General (Each path) ............ 706 SCREEN................................................................. 222
Settings for Path Colors During Tool Path Plotting ..... 698 SHORTCUTS FOR THE MENU SELECTION
Settings for Spindle Status Display .............................. 684 SCREEN................................................................. 221
Settings for Subprogram Selection Screens .................. 688 SHORTCUTS FOR THE PRESET SCREEN .............. 224
Settings for the Allocation of Startup Function Keys ... 699 SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM
Settings for the Color Palette for Guide Display .......... 694 CREATION SCREEN............................................ 222
Settings for the Color Palette for Icon Display ............. 692 SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM LIST SCREEN 222
Settings for the Color Palette for Screen Display ......... 689 SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM
Settings for the Color Palette for Screen Display INSERTION SCREEN........................................... 222
(No.2) ..................................................................... 678 SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM
Settings for Tool Management Functions..................... 703 REGISTRATION SCREEN ................................... 224
Settings for Tool Path Drawing Colors......................... 696 SHORTCUTS FOR THE SEARCH SCREEN ............. 223
SHORTCUT FEEDRATE THE MEASUREMENT SHORTCUTS FOR VARIOUS CONFIRMATION
RESULT SCREEN................................................. 225 OPERATIONS ....................................................... 220
SHORTCUT FOR STARTING THE CYCLE SIMULTONEOUS ALL PATH DISPLAY / EDITING
CHANGE SCREEN ............................................... 221 FUNCTION............................................................ 517
SHORTCUT FOR THE MANUAL MEASUREMENT SLANT FACE MACHINING (COORDINATE
SCREEN ................................................................ 225 CONVERSION)..................................................... 494
SHORTCUT FOR THE TOOL OFFSET SETTING SLANT FACE MACHINING COMMAND
SCREEN ................................................................ 223 (COORDINATE CONVERSION) ......................... 497
SHORTCUT FOR THE WORKPIECE SOFTWARE................................................................. 757
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING SCREEN .... 223 Spindle.......................................................................... 530
SHORTCUT FOR VARIOUS SETTING SCREENS .. 225 SPINDLE AND STANDBY POSITION TOOL
SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS .............................. 219 DISPLAY SCREEN............................................... 582
SHORTCUTS FOR COPY OPERATION ................... 220 Start .............................................................................. 527
SHORTCUTS FOR CUT OPERATION ...................... 220 START AND END OPERATIONS ............................. 527
SHORTCUTS FOR RANGE SELECTION ................. 220 STARTING BACKGROUND EDITING ..................... 195
SHORTCUTS FOR THE ALTER SCREEN FOR STARTING THE NC PROGRAM CONVERSION
REGULAR PROGRAM REGISTRATION ........... 224 FUNCTION............................................................ 201
SHORTCUTS FOR THE BASE SCREEN SOFT Status Display Part........................................................ 521
KEYS ..................................................................... 221 Support for C-axis Machining with Rotation Axis ....... 393
SHORTCUTS FOR THE COMMENT EDITING SUPPORTABLE MACHINE CONFIGURATION...... 495
SCREEN ................................................................ 223 SYMBOLS USED .......................................................... 12
SHORTCUTS FOR THE CREATION SCREEN
<T>
FOR REGULAR PROGRAM REGISTRATION .. 224
THREADING ............................................................... 480
SHORTCUTS FOR THE CYCLE INPUT SCREEN... 223
TOOL DATA BASE FUNCTION................................ 206
SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE
Tool Graphic Data ........................................................ 213
CREATION SCREEN............................................ 226
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA LIST SCREEN 598
TOOL OFFSET ............................................................ 574
i-6
TURNOPEEZG44 INDEX
Tool Path Drawing During Machining and Tool Path

Machining Simulation ............................................ 512
Transfer......................................................................... 531
TURNING ............................................................ 399, 408
TURNING GROOVING .............................................. 438
Turret ............................................................................ 530
<V>
Value of M Code Output .............................................. 395
VIEWING AND SETTING LIFE MANAGEMENT
DATA..................................................................... 584
VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL MANAGEMENT
DATA..................................................................... 578
VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET
VALUES ................................................................ 570
<W>
Waiting Line ................................................................. 531
WARNING MESSAGE................................................ 218
i-7
Revision Record
FANUC Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-63874EN)
It is changed to the contents that the whole of the manual

is often understood drastically.
Addition of following items
Changing work coordinate during machining
03 Jul., 2003 simulation, Tool data base function, Editing of free
figure of subprogram form, Multi-path lathe functions,
Modal display of offset types, Example of
programming, and Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i setup method
Correction of errors
Addition of following items

Displaying the drawing-during-machining window, BG
editing, NC statement conversion, Next-block display
function, Operations in background editing, Operations
with the NC statement conversion function, Shortcut
key operations, Help screen, Memory card input/output
function, Handling large programs, Fixed-point format
02 Jan., 2003 calculation function, Automatic setting of initial value
data, Rear end facing by milling, Subspindle-based c-
axis machining, Rear end facing by turning hole
machining (workpiece rotation), Required parameters,
Parameters common to lathing cycles, Parameters for
machining simulation (animated)
Correction of errors
01 Aug., 2002
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

Turnopeezg44 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Turnopeezg44 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Turnopeezg44 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Doosan eZ Guide

1.1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

- Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

1.2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

To ensure safety while using a machine featuring the Doosan

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .......................................................................... s-1

2 MACHINING PROGRAM FORMAT .....................................................18

4 EDITING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS ....................................40

9 OPERATIONS IN MACHINING SIMULATION ...................................133

11 BACKGROUND EDITING ..................................................................194

12 NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION.......................................198

14 EDITING OF FREE FIGURE OF SUBPROGRAM FORM ..................214

15.17 SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM REGISTRATION

18 HANDLING LARGE PROGRAMS......................................................242

III. CYCLE MACHINING TYPES

1.10 C-AXIS CLAMPING M CODE OUTPUT ....................................................395

3 SLANT FACE MACHINING (COORDINATE CONVERSION) ............494

IV. MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS

2 SIMULTONEOUS ALL PATH DISPLAY / EDITING FUNCTION........517

3.6 DEALING OF THE PART PROGRAM WITH UNFITTED TO PROCESS

4 VIEWING AND SETTING LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA .....................584

4.8 SETTING THE LIFE NOTICE FLAG..........................................................597

VI. EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING

3 MACHINING CENTER .......................................................................642

3.5.8.2 Entering by fixed form sentence menu .............................................................668

A.4 PARAMETERS FOR TURNING CYCLE OPTIONS ..................................725

1 OVERVIEW OF THIS MANUAL

The specifications and usage of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i may

It is impossible to cover all possible combinations of all functions,

This manual explains only the Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i operations

This manual explains as many detailed functions as possible.

Detailed information and special conditions are explained in notes.

What is Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i ?

Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i is the operation guidance to support an

What kind of machines can be supported?

Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i can be used for lathe, machining center

How to install Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i to CNC

In ordinary case, Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i is installed in an CNC and

How to begin to operate Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i

In order to display the screen of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, press

How to create a part program

In order to create a part program on Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i, refer to the

How to check the created part program

As to the operations for checking the created part program on

How to set the data needed for machining

In order to execute actual machining, tool offset data and work

How to edit other part program during machining

By using a background editing function, editing of other part program

How to modify part of cycle machining motions

As for NC program conversion operation, refer to the following part.

How to conserve part program and tool data

How to operate more quickly

Almost all operations of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i use soft-key excepting

As for short cut key operation, refer to the following part.

How to calculate the entering data

In order to calculate the data before entering, pocket calculator type

How are other operations of Doosan Infracore eZ Guide i ?

In addition to creating part program, many convenient functions,

What kind of machining cycles can be used ?